Offshore and Onshore Production

Government of India
Final Draft
Prepared for
Ministry of Environment and Forests
TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUAL
FOR
OFFSHORE AND ONSHORE
OIL & GAS EXPLORATION,
DEVELOPMENT AND PRODUCTION
by
IL&FS Ecosmart Limited
Hyderabad
September 2009
PROJECT TEAM
Project Coordination
Ministry of Environment & Forests
Dr. (Mrs.) Nalini Bhat
Advisor, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. (Mrs.) T. Chandni
Director, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Core Project Coordination Team
IL&FS Environment
Mr. Mahesh Babu
CEO
Mr. N. Sateesh Babu
Vice President & Project Director
Mr. B.S.V. Pavan Gopal
Manager Technical
Mr. Padmanabhachar. K
Environmental Engineer
Ms. Chaitanya Vangeti
GIS Engineer
Ms. Suman Benedicta Thomas
Technical Writer
Resource Person
Dr. Y. R. Mehta
Former Director, Gas Authority of India Limited
Expert Core & Peer Committee
Chairman
Dr. V. Rajagopalan, IAS
Principal Secretary
Government of Uttar Pradesh
Core Members
Dr. R. K. Garg
Former Chairman, EIA Committee
Mr. Paritosh C. Tyagi
Former Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board

Prof. S.P. Gautam
Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board
Dr. Tapan Chakraborti
Director, National Environmental Engineering Research Institute
Mr. K. P. Nyati
Former Head, Environmental Policy, Confederation of Indian Industry
Dr. G.K. Pandey
Dr. (Mrs.) Nalini Bhat
Dr. G.V. Subramaniam
Dr. B. Sengupta
Former Member Secretary, Central Pollution Control Board
Dr. R. C. Trivedi
Former Scientist, Central Pollution Control Board
Peer Members
Dr. Hosabettu
Former Director, Ministry of Environment and Forests
Dr. B. D. Ghosh
Director, Centre For High Technology
Member Convener
Mr. N. Sateesh Babu
Project Director
Technical EIA Guidance Manual for Oil and Gas Exploration Industry
2009
September
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. INTRODUCTION TO THE TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT 1-1
2. CONCEPTUAL FACETS OF EIA 2-1
2.3.1 Tools for assessment and analysis 2-2
2.3.2 Tools for Action 2-5
2.3.3 Tools for Communication 2-9
2.8.1 Direct impacts 2-14
2.8.2 Indirect impacts 2-14
2.8.3 Cumulative impacts 2-15
2.8.4 Induced Impact 2-15
2.9.1 Criteria/Methodology to Determine the Significance of the Identified Impa
cts 2-16
3. ONSHORE AND OFFSHORE OIL & GAS EXPLORATION DEVELOPMENT &
PRODUCTION 3-1
3.1.1 New significant discoveries 3-5
3.1.2 Exploration & production (E&P) data statistics 3-6
3.2.1 Industrial process 3-14
3.2.2 Raw material inputs and pollution outputs 3-25
3.3.1 Hazard identification 3-51
3.3.2 Hazard assessment and evaluation 3-54

3.3.3 Failure mode analysis 3-54
3.3.4 Preliminary hazard analysis (PHA) 3-55
3.3.5 Safety measures 3-58
3.3.6 Damage criteria 3-58
3.3.7 Consequence analysis 3-62
1.1 Purpose 1-2
1.2 Project Implementation 1-3
1.3 Additional Information 1-3
2.1 Environment in EIA Context 2-1
2.2 Pollution Control Strategy 2-1
2.3 Tools for Preventive Environmental Management 2-2
2.4 Objectives of EIA 2-10
2.5 Types of EIA 2-10
2.6 Basic EIA Principles 2-11
2.7 Project Cycle 2-13
2.8 Environmental Impacts 2-13
2.9 Significance of Impacts 2-15
3.1 Introduction 3-1
3.2 Scientific Aspects 3-14
3.3 Risk Potential in Bulk Storage and Handling of Hazardous Chemicals for Oil/
Gas Drilling
3-51
Table of Contents
2009
September
ii
3.4.1 General description of major statutes 3-63
3.4.2 Industry specific requirements 3-63
4. OPERATIONAL ASPECTS OF EIA 4-1
4.1.1 Application for Prior Screening for Environmental Clearance 4-2
4.1.2 Siting Guidelines 4-3
4.2.1 Pre-feasibility Report 4-5
4.2.2 Guidance for filling information in Form 1 4-6
4.2.3 Identification of Appropriate Valued Environmental Components 4-7
4.2.4 Methods for Identification of Impacts 4-7
4.2.5 Testing the significance of impacts 4-14
4.2.6 Terms of reference for EIA studies 4-15
4.3.1 EIA Team 4-27
4.3.2 Baseline Quality of the Environment 4-28
4.3.3 Significance of Impacts 4-31
4.6.1 Important Considerations for Mitigation Methods 4-38
4.6.2 Hierarchy of Elements of Mitigation Plan 4-39
4.6.3 Typical Mitigation Measures 4-40
4.6.4 Mitigation Measures on Special Environmental Issues 4-41
5. STAKEHOLDERS ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES 5-1
3.4 Summary of Applicable National Regulations 3-63
4.1 Coverage of Offshore and Onshore Oil and Gas Exploration, Development & Pro
duction
Industry under the Purview of Notification 4-1
4.2 Scoping for EIA studies 4-4
4.3 Environmental Impact Assessment 4-27
4.4 Social Impact Assessment 4-32
4.5 Risk Assessment 4-34
4.6 Mitigation Measures 4-38
4.7 Environmental Management Plan 4-54
4.8 Reporting 4-55
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
5.1
Public Consultation 4-56

Appraisal 4-59
Decision-making 4-61
Post Clearance Monitoring Protocol 4-62
EAC 5-3
Table of Contents
2009
September
iii
LIST OF TABLES
Table 3-1: Summary of the Exploration and Production Process ...................
...................................3-24
Table 3-2: List of Pollutants Generated ........................................
.....................................................3-25
Table 3-3: Potential Material Outputs from Selected Oil and Gas Extraction Proc
esses .................3-49
Table 3-4: Applicability of GOI Rules To Fuel/Chemical Storage .................
..................................3-52
Table 3-5: Properties of Fuels/Chemicals Used In Drilling.......................
........................................3-52
Table 3-6: F&EI and TI Categories ..............................................
.....................................................3-53
Table 3-7: Failure Mode Analysis ...............................................
......................................................3-54
Table 3-8: Preliminary Hazard Analysis for Process/Storage Areas ...............
..................................3-56
Table 3-9: Preliminary Hazard Analysis for the Installation in General..........
..................................3-57
Table 3-10: Damage Due to Incident Radiation Intensities .......................
........................................3-59
Table 3-11: Radiation Exposure and Lethality ...................................
...............................................3-59
Table 3-12: Damage Due to Peak over Pressure....................................
............................................3-60
Table 3-13: Critical Concentrations for Chlorine ...............................
...............................................3-61
Table 3-14: Scenarios Considered For MCA Analysis...............................
.......................................3-61
Table 3-15: Standards for Marine Disposal ......................................
.................................................3-63
Table 3-16: Toxicity Limits ....................................................
...........................................................3-63
Table 3-17: Onshore Discharge Standards.........................................
................................................3-64
Table 4-1: Advantages and Disadvantages of Impact Identification Methods .......
.............................4-7
Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts ...................................................
..........................................................4-10
Table 4-3: List of Important Physical Environment Components and Indicators of
EBM...............4-29
Table of Contents
2009
September
iv
Table 4-4: Guidance for Accidental Risk Assessment..............................
.........................................4-36
Table 4-5: Mitigation Measures for Construction Phase ..........................

.........................................4-40
Table 4-6: Mitigation Measures for Operation Phase..............................
..........................................4-40
Table 4-7: Onshore Activities - Environmental Protection Measures ..............
.................................4-44
Table 4-8: Offshore Environmental Protection Measures ..........................
....................................4-50
Table 4-9: Structure of EIA Report..............................................
......................................................4-55
Table 5-1: Roles and Responsibilities of Stakeholders Involved in Prior Environm
ental Clearance..5-1
Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions......................................
...................................................5-2
Table 5-3: EAC: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson/ Members / Secretary ......
.................................5-5
Table of Contents
2009
September
v
LIST OF FIGURES
Figure 2-1: Inclusive Components of Sustainable Development.....................
....................................2-1
Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts....................................................
.........................................................2-14
Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact ..................................................
........................................................2-15
Figure 3-1: Sedimentary Basins of India ........................................
.....................................................3-2
Figure 3-2: Categorization of Sedimentary Basins ...............................
...............................................3-3
Figure 3-3: Sedimentary Basinal Areas ..........................................
.....................................................3-4
Figure 3-4: Total Hydrocarbon Resources (as on 01-04-2006) .....................
......................................3-7
Figure 3-5: Reserves and Accretion of Hydrocarbons..............................
...........................................3-8
Figure 3-6: Seismic Data .......................................................
..............................................................3-9
Figure 3-7: Exploratory and Development Wells Drilled (2005-06).................
................................3-10
Figure 3-8: Exploratory and Development Meterage Drilled (2005-06) .............
..............................3-11
Figure 3-9: Seismic Parties/ Vessels Deployed (2005-2006) ......................
......................................3-12
Figure 3-10: Oil and Gas Production (2005-06) ..................................
..............................................3-13
Figure 3-11: Seismic Surveys ...................................................
.........................................................3-15
Figure 3-12: Drilling...........................................................
...............................................................3-16
Figure 3-13: Cross-section of a Cased Well .....................................
.................................................3-19
Figure 3-14: Typical Crude Oil/Gas Processing...................................
.............................................3-21
Figure 3-15: Concrete Gravity Platform..........................................
..................................................3-22
Figure 3-16: Directional Drilling...............................................

........................................................3-23
Figure 4-1: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities Falling Under
Category A..........4-2
Table of Contents
2009
September
vi
Figure 4-2: Approach for EIA Study .............................................
....................................................4-27
Figure 4-3: Risk Assessment Conceptual Framework................................
....................................4-36
Figure 4-4: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance ........................
.....................................4-37
Figure 4-5: Elements of Mitigation..............................................
......................................................4-39
Table of Contents
2009
September
vii
ACRONYMS
AAQ Ambient Air Quality
ADB Asian Development Bank
APHA American Public Health Association
B/C Benefits Cost Ratio
BCM Billion Cubic Metre
BIS Bureau of Indian Standards
BOD Biological oxygen demand
BOQ Bill of Quantities
BOT Built-Operate-Transfer
BLEVE (Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour Cloud) or Vapour Cloud Explosion
BPX By Product Exchange
BTEX Benzene, Ethyl benzene, Toluene, and Xylenes
CBM Coal Bed Methane
CCA Conventional Cost Accounting
CEA Central Electricity Authority
CEAA Canadian Environmental Assessment Agency
CER Corporate environmental reports
CFE Consent for Establishment
COD Chemical Oxygen Demand
CP Cleaner Production
CPCB Central Pollution Control Board
CRZ Coastal Regulatory Zone
CSR Corporate Social Responsibility
CST Central Sales Tax
DA Development Authorities
DC Drill cuttings
DfE Design for Environment
DGH Directorate General of Hydrocarbons
DO Dissolved Oxygen
EAC Expert Appraisal Committee
EBM Environmental Baseline Monitoring
EcE Economic-cum-Environmental
ECI Environmental Condition Indicators
EHS Environment Health and Safety
EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

EIS Environmental Information system
Table of Contents
2009
September
viii
E&P Exploration and Production
EPA Environmental Protection Agency
EPI Environmental performance indicators
EPR Extended Producers Responsibilities
EMA Environmental Management Accounting
EMS Environmental Management System
EMP Environmental Management Plan
ERPC Environment Research and Protection Centre
ETP Effluent Treatment Plant
FBP Final Boiling Point
FCA Full Cost Assessment
FE&TI Fire-Explosion and Toxicity Index
FP Flash Point
GEMS Global Environmental Monitoring System
GGFR Global Gas Flaring Reduction
GHF General Hazard Factors
GHG Green House Gas
GLC Ground-level Concentration
GPH General Process Hazards
GSPCL Gujarat State Petrochemicals Ltd
H
2
S Hydrogen sulfide
HPI Hydrocarbon Processing Industry
HTL High Tide Line
IL&FS Infrastructure Leasing and Financial Services
ILO International Labour Organization
IMD India Meteorological Department
INFOTERRA Global Environmental Information Exchange Network of UNEP
IVI Importance Value Index
ISO International Standard Organization
JV Joint Venture
LANDSAT Land Remote Sensing Satellite / Land use Satellite
LDAR Leak Detection and Repair
LCA Life Cycle Assessment
LEL Lower Explosive Limit
LNG Liquefied Natural Gas
LTL Low Tide Level
MCA Maximum Credible Accident
MF Material Factor
MFA Material Flow Accounting
Table of Contents
2009
ix
MMT Million Metric Tonne
MODUs Mobile Offshore Drilling Units
MoEF Ministry of Environment & Forests
MP Melting Point
MPNG Ministry of Petroleum and Natural Gas
September
MRF Material recovery facilities

MSES Multi stage evaporator systems
MSW Municipal Solid Waste
NADF Non-Aqueous Drilling Fluids
NAQM National Air Quality Monitoring
NDIR Non-dispersive Infrared
NGO Non-Government Organizations
NOAA National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration
NOC No Objection Certificate
NORM Naturally Occurring Radioactive Materials
OBM Oil-base Mud
OCD Offshore and Coastal Dispersion Model
OIL Oil India Ltd
OISD Oil Industry Safety Directorate
OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration
PAH Polycyclic Aromatic Hydrocarbons
P-CP Programmatic Cleaner Production
P-EIA Programmatic Environmental Impact Assessment
PCC Pollution Control Committee
PCPIR Petroleum, Chemicals & Petrochemical Investment Regions
POTW Publicly owned treatment works
PPV Peak Particle Velocity
R&D Research and Development
R&R Resettlement and Rehabilitation
RIL Reliance India Ltd
RMF Respective Material Factor
RPM Respirable Particulate Matter
RSPM Respirable Suspended Particulate Matter
ROW right-of-way
QA/QC Quality Assurance/Quality Control
QRA Quantitative Risk Assessment
SBM Synthetic Base Mud
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition System
SEAC State Level Expert Appraisal Committee
Table of Contents
2009
x
SEIAA State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority
SEZ Special Economic Zones
SPCB State Pollution Control Board
SPHF Special Process Hazard Factors
SPM Suspended Particulate Matter
SS Suspended Solids
TA Technology Assessment
TCA Total Cost Assessment
TDS Total Dissolved Solids
TEQM Total Environmental Quality Movement
TGM Technical EIA Guidance Manual
TNO Toegepast Naturweteshappelijk Onderzoek
TLV Threshold Limit Value
TSDF Treatment Storage Disposal Facility
TSS Total Suspended Solids
UEL Upper Explosive Limit
UNEP United Nations Environmental Programme
USEPA United States Environmental Protection Agencys
UT Union Territory
UTEIAA Union Territory Environment Impact Assessment Authority
September
UTPCC Union Territory Pollution Control Committee

VOC Volatile Organic Compounds
VEC Valued Environmental Component
WB World Bank Group / The World bank
WBCSD World Business Council on Sustainable Development
WBDF Water-based Drilling Fluids
Table of Contents
2009
September
xi
ANNEXURES
Annexure I
A Compilation of Legal Instruments
Annexure II
Form 1 (Application Form for EIA Clearance)
Annexure III
Pre-feasibility Report
Annexure IV
Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations
Annexure V
Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes
Annexure VI
Sources of Secondary Data Collection
Annexure VII
Impact Prediction Models
September
2009
1-1
1.
INTRODUCTION TO THE
TECHNICAL EIA GUIDANCE MANUALS PROJECT
Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) is a process of identifying, pred
icting,
evaluating and mitigating the biophysical, social, and other relevant e
ffects of
development proposals prior to major decisions being taken and commitme
nts made.
These studies integrate the environmental concerns of developmental acti
vities into the
process of decision-making.
EIA has emerged as one of the successful policy innovations of the 2
0th Century in the
process of ensuring sustained development. Today, EIA is formalized as a regula
tory tool
in more than 100 countries for effectively integration of environmental
concerns in the
economic development process. The EIA process in India was made mandatory and w
as
also given a legislative status through a Notification issued in Janua
ry 1994. The
Notification, however, covered only a few selected industrial developmen
tal activities.
While there are subsequent amendments, this Notification issued on September 14,
2006
supersedes all the earlier Notifications, and has brought out structura
l changes in the
clearance mechanism.
The basic tenets of this EIA Notification could be summarized into following:
Pollution potential as the basis for prior Environmental Clearance based on po
llution
potential instead of investment criteria; and
Decentralization of clearing powers to the State/Union Territory (UT)
level
Authorities for certain developmental activities to make the prior envi
ronmental
clearance process quicker, transparent and effective mechanism of clearance.
Devolution of the power to grant clearances at the state-level for certain categ
ories of the
developmental activities / projects is a step forward to fulfill the
basic tenets of the reengineering i.e., quicker, transparent and effective process but many i
ssues come on its
way of functional efficiency. These issues could be in technical and operationa
l domains
as listed below:
Technical issues
Ensuring level playing ground to avoid arbitrariness in the decision-making pr
ocess
Classification of projects which do not require public hearing and d
etailed EIA
(Category B2)
Variations in drawing Terms of Reference (ToR) for EIA studies for
a given
developmental activity across the States/UTs
Varying developmental-activity-specific expertise requirement for conduct
ing EIA
studies and their appraisal
Availability of adequate sectoral experts and variations in competency levels
Inadequate data verification, cross checking tools and supporting inst
itutional
framework
Introduction
2009
September
1-2
Meeting time targets without compromising with the quality of assessments/ rev
iews
Varying knowledge and skill levels of regulators, consultants and experts
Newly added developmental activities for prior environmental clearance, etc.
Operational issues
State level /UT level EIA Authorities (SEIAA/UTEIAA) are being formulated for
the
first time and many are functioning
Varying roles and responsibilities of involved organizations
Varying supporting institutional strengths across the States/UTs
Varying manpower availability, etc.
1.1 Purpose
The purpose of developing the sector-specific technical EIA guidance manuals (TG
M) is
to provide clear and concise information on EIA to all the stakeholde
rs i.e., the project

proponent, the consultant, the reviewer, and the public. The TGMs are organized
to cover
following:
1. Conceptual facets of an EIA
2. Details on the developmental activity including environmental concern
s and control
technologies, etc.
3. Operational aspects; and
4. Roles and responsibilities of various organizations involved in the
process of prior
environmental clearance
For any given industry, each topic listed above could alone be the s
ubject of a lengthy
volume.
However, in order to produce a manageable document, this pro
ject focuses on
providing summary information for each topic. This format provides the
reader with a
synopsis of each issue. Text within each section was researched from many sourc
es, and
was usually condensed from more detailed sources pertaining to specific topics.
The contents of the document are designed with a view to facilitate
in addressing the
relevant technical and operational issues as mentioned in the earlier
section.
Besides,
facilitates various stakeholders involved in the EIA clearance process i.e.,
Project proponent will be fully aware of the procedures, common ToR
for EIA
studies, timelines, monitoring needs, etc., in order to plan the proje
cts/studies
appropriately.
The consultants across India will gain similar understanding about a given sec
tor, and
also the procedure for conducting the EIA studies, so that the qualit
y of the EIA
reports gets improved and streamlined.
Reviewers across the States/UTs will have the same understanding about an indu
stry
sector and would able to draw a benchmark to establish the significant impacts f
or the
purpose of prescribing the ToR for EIA studies and also in the process of review
and
appraisal.
Public who are concerned about a new or expansion projects, can have access to
this
manual to know the manufacturing/production details, rejects/wastes from
the
operations, choice of cleaner/ control technologies, regulatory requireme
nts, likely
environmental and social concerns, mitigation measures, etc. in order t
o seek
Introduction
2009
September
1-3
clarifications appropriately in the process of public consultation.
Th
e procedural
clarity in the document will further strengthen them to understand the stages in
volved
in clearance and roles and responsibilities of various organizations.
In addition, these manuals would substantially ease the pressure on
reviewers at the
scoping stage and would bring in functional efficiency at the central and state
levels.
1.2 Project Implementation
The Ministry of Environment & Forests (MoEF), Government of India took up the ta
sk of
developing sector-specific TGMs for all the developmental activities lis
ted in the reengineered EIA Notification.
Infrastructure Leasing and Financial Servi
ces (IL&FS),
Ecosmart Limited (Ecosmart), has been entrusted with the task of devel
oping these
manuals for 27 industrial and related sectors. Offshore and Onshore Oil and Gas
Industry
is one of these sectors, for which this manual is prepared.
The ability to design comprehensive EIA studies for specific industries
depends on
knowledge of several interrelated topics.
Therefore, it requires exper
t inputs from
multiple dimensions such as, administrative, project management, technica
l, scientific,
social, economic risks etc., in order to comprehensively analyze the issues of c
oncern and
to draw logical interpretations.
Thus, Ecosmart has designed a well-c
omposed
implementation framework has been designed to factor inputs of the exp
erts and
stakeholders in the process of finalization of these manuals.
The process of manual preparation involved collection and collation of
the secondary
available information, technical review by sectoral resource persons and
critical review
and finalization by a competent Expert Committee composed of core and
sectoral peer
members.
The MoEF appreciates the efforts of Ecosmart, Expert Core and Peer Co
mmittee,
resource persons and all those who have directly and indirectly contri
buted to this
Manual.
1.3 Additional Information
This TGM is brought out by the MoEF to provide clarity to all the stakeholders i
nvolved
in the prior environmental clearance process.
As such, the contents an
d clarifications
given in this document do not withstand in case of a conflict with the statutory
provisions
of the Notifications and Executive Orders issued by the MoEF from time-to-time.
TGMs are not regulatory documents.
Instead these are the tools desig
ned to assist in
successful completion of an EIA.
For the purposes of this project, the key elements considered under TGMs are: co
nceptual
aspects of EIA; developmental activity-specific information; operational
aspects; and
roles and responsibilities of involved stakeholders.

This manual is prepared considering the Notification issued on Septembe
r 14, 2006 and
the updates.
For recent updates, if any, may please refer the MoEF
website i.e.,
www.envfor.nic.in.
September
2009
2-1
2.
CONCEPTUAL FACETS OF EIA
2.1 Environment in EIA Context
Environment in EIA context mainly focuses, but is not limited to physic
al, chemical,
biological, geological, social, economical, and aesthetic dimensions alon
g with their
complex interactions, which affects individuals, communities and ultimate
ly determines
their forms, character, relationship, and survival.
In the EIA contex
t, effect and
impact can often be used interchangeably. However, impact is considered as a value
judgment of the significance of an effect.
Sustainable development is built on three basic premises i.e., economic
growth,
ecological balance and social progress. Economic growth achieved in a way that
does not
consider, the environmental concerns, will not be sustainable in the l
ong run. Therefore,
sustainable development needs careful integration of environmental, economic, an
d social
needs in order to achieve both an increased standard of living in short term, an
d a net gain
or equilibrium among human, natural, and economic resources to support
future
generations in the long term.
It is necessary to understand the links between environment and development in or
der to
make choices for development that will be economically efficient, socially equit
able and
responsible, as well as environmentally sound. Agenda 21.
Figure 2-1: Inclusive Components of Sustainable Development
2.2 Pollution Control Strategy
Pollution control strategies can be broadly categorized into preventive and reac
tive. The
reactive strategy refers to the steps that may be applied once the wastes are ge
nerated or
contamination of receiving environment takes place.
The control techno
logy or a
combination of technologies to minimize the impact due to the process
rejects/wastes
varies with quantity and characteristics, desired control efficiency and economi
cs.
Conceptual Facets of EIA
2009
September
2-2
Many a number or combination of techniques could be adopted for treatment of a s
pecific
waste or the contaminated receiving environment, but are often judged based on t
echnoeconomic feasibility. Therefore, the best alternative is to take all possible s
teps to avoid
pollution itself. This preventive approach refers to a hierarchy that involves:
i) prevention
& reduction; ii) recycling and re-use; iii) treatment; and iv) disposal, respect
ively.
Therefore, there is a need to shift the emphasis from the reactive t
o preventive strategy
i.e., to promote preventive environmental management. Preventive environm
ental
management tools may be classified into following three groups:
Management Based Tools Process Based Tools Product Based Tools
Environmental management
system (EMS)
Environmental performance
evaluation
Environmental audits
Environmental reporting
and communication
Total cost accounting
Law and policy
Trade and environment
Environmental economics
Environmental technology assessment
Toxic use reduction
Best operating practices
Environmentally best practice
Best available technology (BAT)
Waste minimization
Pollution prevention
Cleaner production
Cleaner technology
Eco-efficiency
Industrial ecology
Extended producers
responsibility
Eco-labeling
Design for environment
Life cycle assessment
(LCA)
These tools are precisely discussed in next sections
2.3 Tools for Preventive Environmental Management
These tools preventive environmental management can be broadly classifie
d into
following three groups:
Tools for assessment and analysis
Tools for action; and
Tools for communication
Specific tools under each group are discussed precisely in next sections.
2.3.1 Tools for assessment and analysis
2.3.1.1 Risk assessment
Risk is associated with the frequency of failure and consequence effect. Predic
ting such
situations and evaluation of risk is essential to take appropriate preventive me
asures. The
major concern of the assessment is to identify the activities falling in a matri
x of high &
low frequencies at which the failures occur and the degree of its im
pact.
The high
frequency, low impact activities can be managed by regular maintenance
i.e., LDAR
(Leak detection and repair) programmes.
Whereas, the low frequency, h
igh impact
activities are of major concern (accidents) in terms of risk assessment. As the
frequency
is low, often the required precautions are not realized or maintained. However,
these risk
assessment identify the areas of major concerns which require additiona
l preventive
2009
September
2-3
measures, likely consequence distances considering domino effects, which
will give the
possible casualties and ecological loss in case of accidents.
These
magnitudes demand
the attention for preventive and disaster management plans (DMP). Thus is an es
sential
tool to ensure safety of operations.
2.3.1.2 Life Cycle Assessment
A broader approach followed to deal with environmental impacts during manufactur
ing is
called LCA.
This approach recognizes that environmental concerns are
associated with
every step of the processing w.r.t. the manufacturing of products and
also examines
environmental impacts at all stages of the project life cycle.
LCA
includes the product
design, development, manufacturing, packaging, distribution, usage and disposal.
LCA is
concerned with reducing environmental impacts at all these stages and
considering the
total picture rather than just one stage of the production process.
By availing this concept, firms minimize the costs incurred on the en
vironmental
conservation throughout the project life cycle.
LCA also provides suf
ficient scope to
think about cost-effective alternatives.
2.3.1.3 Total Cost Assessment
Total Cost Assessment (TCA) is an enhanced financial analysis tool that is used
to assess
the profitability of alternative courses of action ex. raw material substitution
to reduce the
costs of managing the wastes generated by process; an energy retrofit to reduce
the costs
of energy consumption.
This is particularly relevant for pollution pr
evention options,
because of their nature, often produce financial savings that are over
looked in
conventional financial analysis, either because they are misallocated, u

ncertain, hard to
quantify, or occur more than three to five years after the initial investment.
TCA involves
all of the relevant costs and savings associated with an option so that it can c
ompete for
scarce capital resources fairly, on a level playing field.
The asses
sments are often
beneficial in following:
Identification of costly resource inefficiencies
Financial analysis of environmental activities/projects such as investm
ent in cleaner
technologies
Prioritization of environmental activities/projects
Evaluation of products and product pricing
Bench marking against the performance of other processes or against the compet
itors
A comparison of cost assessments is given below:
Conventional cost accounting (CCA): Direct and indirect financial costs+ Recog
nized
contingent costs
Total cost assessment (TCA): A broader range of direct, indirect, contingent
and less
quantifiable costs
Full cost assessment (FCA): TCA + External social costs borne by society
2.3.1.4 Environmental audit/statement
The key objectives of an environmental audit includes compliance verifi
cation, problem
identification, environmental impact measurement, environmental performance
measurement, conforming effectiveness of EMS, providing a database for
corrective
2009
September
2-4
actions and future actions, developing companies environmental strategy,
communication and formulating environmental policy.
The MoEF, Government of India issued Notification on Environmental Statements (ES)
in April, 1992 and further amended in April, 1993 - as per the notification, th
e industries
are required to submit ES to the respective State Pollution Control Boards (SPCB
s). ES
is a pro-active tool for self-examination of the industry itself to reduce/minim
ize pollution
by adopting process modifications, recycling and reusing of the resourc
es.
The regular
submission of ES will indicate the systematic improvement in environmen
tal pollution
control being achieved by the industry.
In other way, the specific
points in ES may be
used as environmental performance indicators for relative comparison, im
plementation
and to promote better practices.
2.3.1.5 Environmental benchmarking
Environmental performance and operational indicators could be used to navigate,

manage
and communicate the significant aspects and give enough evidence of go
od
environmental house keeping. Besides prescribing standards, an insight t
o identify the
performance indicators and prescribing schedule for systematic improvemen
t in
performance of these indicators will yield better results.
Relative indicators may be identified for different industrial sectors to be int
egrated with
the companies and organizations to monitor and manage the different en
vironmental
aspects of the company, to benchmark and compare two or more companie
s from the
same sector.
These could cover the water consumption, wastewater gene
ration, energy
consumption, solid/hazardous waste generation, chemical consumption, etc., per t
onne of
final product.
Once these benchmarks are developed, the industries wh
ich are below
them may be guided and enforced to reach the level and those which a
re better than the
benchmark may be encouraged further by giving incentives, etc.
2.3.1.6 Environmental indicators
Indicators can be classified into environmental performance indicators (
EPI) and
environmental condition indicators (ECI).
The EPIs can be further div
ided into two
categories i.e. operational performance indicators and management perform
ance
indicators.
The operational performance indicators are related to the processes and other op
erational
activities of the organization.
These would typically address the iss
ue of raw material
consumption, energy consumption, water consumption in the industry, the
quantities of
wastewater generated, other solid wastes generated, emission from the industry,
etc.
Management performance indicators, on the other hand, are related to t
he management
efforts to influence the environmental performance of the organizations operation
s.
The environmental condition indicators provide information about the env
ironment.
These indicators provide information about the local, regional, national
or global
condition of the environment. This information helps the organization to unders
tand the
environmental impacts of its activities and thus helps in making decision to im
prove the
environmental performance.
2009
September
2-5
Indicators are basically used to evaluate environmental performance agai
nst the set

standards and thus indicate the direction in which to proceed.
Selec
tion of type of
indicators for a firm or project depends upon its relevance, clarity
and realistic cost of
collection and its development.
2.3.2 Tools for Action
2.3.2.1 Environmental Policy
An environmental policy is a statement of the organizations overall aim and princ
iples of
action w.r.t. the environment, including compliance with all relevant r
egulatory
requirements.
It is a key tool in communicating the environmental pr
iorities of the
organization to all its employees.
To ensure an organizations commitme
nt towards
formulated environmental policy, it is essential for the top management be invol
ved in the
process of formulating the policy and setting priorities. Therefore, the first
step is to get
the commitment from the higher levels of management.
The organization
should then
conduct an initial environmental review and draft an environmental poli
cy.
This draft
should be discussed and approved by the board of directors and finall
y the approved
environmental policy statement must be communicated internally among all
its
employees and must also be made available to the public.
2.3.2.2 Market-Based Economic Instruments
Market-based instruments are regulations that encourage behavior through market
signals
rather than through explicit directives regarding pollution control leve
ls.
These policy
instruments such as tradable permits pollution charge are often describ
ed as harnessing
market forces.
Market-based instruments can be categorized into four
major categories
i.e.:
Pollution charge: Charge system will assess a fee or tax on the amount of poll
ution a
firm or source generates.
It is worthwhile for the firm to reduce
emissions to the
point, where its marginal abatement costs are equal to the tax rate. Thus firms
control
pollution to different degrees i.e., High cost controllers less; low-cost contro
llers
more.
The charge system encourages the industries to further reduce
the pollutants.
The charges thus collected can form a fund for restoration of the en
vironment.
Another form of pollution charge is a deposit refund system, where th
e consumers
pay a surcharge when purchasing a potentially polluting product, and receive a r
efund
on return of the product after useful life span at appropriate centers. The con
cept of
extended producers responsibility is brought in to avoid accumulation of
dangerous
products in the environment.
Tradable permits: Under this system, firms that achieve the emission
levels below
their allotted level may sell the surplus permits.
Similarly the fir
ms, which are
required to spend more to attain the required degree of treatment/allo
tted levels, can
purchase permits from others at lower costs and may be benefited.
Market barrier reductions: Three known market barrier reduction types
are as
follows:
- Market creation: Measure and facilitate the voluntary exchange of wa
ter rights
and thus promotes efficient allocation of scarce water supplies.
- Liability concerns: Encourage firms to consider potential environmental damag
es
of their decisions
2009
September
2-6
- Information programmes: Ecolabeling and energy efficiency product lab
eling
requirements
Government Subsidy Reduction:
Subsidies are the mirror images of ta
xes and, in
theory, can provide incentives to address environmental problems.
Howe
ver, it has
been reported that the subsidies encourage economically in-efficient and
environmentally un-sound practices, and often lead to market distortions
due
differences in the area.
However, in the national interest, subsidies
are important to
sustain the expansion of production. In such cases, the subsidy may be comparab
le to
the net social benefit.
2.3.2.3 Innovative funding mechanism
There are many forums under which the fund is made available for the issues whic
h are of
global/regional concern (GEF, OECD, Deutch green fund, etc.) i.e., climate chang
e, basal
convention and further fund sources are being explored for the persist
ent organic
pollutants convention. Besides the global funding mechanism, there needs to be
localized
alternative mechanisms for boosting the investment in environmental poll
ution control.
For example, in India the Government has established mechanism to fund
the common
effluent treatment plants (CETP), which are specifically serving the sm
all and medium
scale enterprises i.e., 25% share by the State Government, matching gr
ants from the
Central Government and surety for 25% soft loan.
It means that the
industries need to
invest only 25% initially, thus encouraging voluntary compliance.
There are some more options i.e. if the pollution tax/charge is impos
ed on the residual
pollution being caused by the industries, municipalities, etc., fund wi

ll automatically be
generated, which in turn, can be utilized for funding the environmenta
l improvement
programmes.
The emerging concept of build-operate-transfer (BOT) is an
encouraging
development, where there is a possibility to generate revenue by application of
advanced
technologies.
There are many opportunities, which can be explored.
However, what is
required is the paradigm shift and focused efforts.
2.3.2.4 EMS and ISO certification
EMS is that part of the overall management system, which includes the
organizational
structure, responsibilities, practices, procedures, processes and resources for
determining
and implementing the forms of overall aims, principles of action w.r.t
. the environment.
It encompasses the totality of organizational, administrative and policy
provisions to be
taken by a firm to control its environmental influences. Common elements of an
EMS are
the identification of the environmental impacts and legal obligations, the devel
opment of
a plan for management & improvement, the assignment of the responsibil
ities and
monitoring of the performance.
2.3.2.5 Total environment quality movement (TEQM)
Quality was regarded as
A product attribute that must be set at an acceptable level and ba
lanced against the
cost
Something delivered by technical systems engineered by experts rather
than the
organization as a whole
2009
September
2-7
Assured primarily through the findings and correction of mistakes at
the end of the
production process
One expression of the total environment quality movement (TEQM) is a system of c
ontrol
called Kaizen. The principles of Kaizen are:
Goal must be continuous improvement of quality instead of acceptable quality
Responsibility of the quality shall be shared by all members of an organizatio
n
Efforts should be focused on improving the whole process and design of the pro
ducts
With some modifications, the TQM approach can be applied in the impro
vement of
corporate environmental performance in both process and product areas.
2.3.2.6 Eco-labeling
It is known as the practice of supplying information on the environmental charac
teristics
of a product or service to the general public. These labeling schemes can be gr
ouped into
three types:
Type I: Multiple criteria base; third party (Govt. or non-commercial
private
organizations) programme claims overall environmental preferability.
Type II: Specific attributes of a product; often issued by a compan
y/industrial
association
Type III: Agreed set of indices; provides quantified information; self declara
tion
Among the above, Type I are more reliable because they are established by a thir
d-party
and considers the environmental impacts of a product from cradle to grave. Howe
ver, the
labeling program will only be effective if linked with complementary p
rogramme of
consumer education and up on restriction of umbrella claims by the producers.
2.3.2.7 Cleaner production
Cleaner production is one of the tools, which has lot of bearing on
environmental
pollution control. It is also seen that the approach is changing with time i.e.
dumping-tocontrol-to-recycle-to-prevention. Promotion of cleaner production principles in
volves an
insight into the production processes not only to get desired yield, but also to
optimise on
raw material consumption i.e. resource conservation and implications of
the waste
treatment and disposal.
2.3.2.8 4-R concept
The concept endorses utilization of waste as a by-product to the exte
nt possible i.e.,
Recycle, Recover, Reuse, Recharge. Recycling refers to using wastes/ by-product
s in the
process again as a raw material to maximize the production.
Recovery
refers to
engineering means such as solvent extraction, distillation, precipitation
, etc., to separate
the useful constituents of the wastes, so that these recovered materials can be
used. Reuse
refers to utilization of waste from one process as a raw material to other. Re
charging is
an option in which the natural systems are used for renovation of waste for furt
her use.
2009
September
2-8
2.3.2.9 Eco-efficiency
The World Business Council on Sustainable Development (WBCSD) defines e
coefficiency as the delivery of competitively priced goods and services that satisf
y human
needs and bring quality of life, while progressively reducing ecologica
l impacts and
resource intensity throughout the life cycle, to a level at least in line with e
arths carrying
capacity.
The business implements the eco-efficiency on four levels i.
e., optimized
processes, recycling of wastes, eco-innovation and new services. Fussler (1995)
defined
six dimensions of eco-efficiency, which are given below to understand/e
xamine the
system.
Mass: There is an opportunity to significantly reduce mass burdens (
raw materials,
fuels, utilities consumed during the life cycle)
Reduce energy use: The opportunity is to sport the parts of the system and lif
e cycle,
which have the highest energy intensity, and to redesign the product
or its use to
provide significant energy savings
Reduce environmental toxins: This is a concern to the environmental
quality and
human health.
In nature nothing is lost. The opportunity here is to
significantly
control the dispersion of toxic elements such as carbon, sulphur, mercury etc.
Recycle when practical: Designing for recycling is important
Working with Mother Nature: Materials are borrowed and returned to t
he nature
without negatively affecting the balance of the cycle.
Make it last longer: It relates to useful life and functions of products. Inc
reasing the
functionality of products also increases their eco-efficiency.
The competitiveness among the companies and long-term survival will con
tinue and the
successful implementation of eco-efficiency will contribute to their suc
cess.
There is a
need to shift towards responsible consumerism equal to the efficiency
gains made by
corporations doing more with less.
2.3.2.10 Industrial ecosystem or metabolism
Eco-industrial development is a new paradigm for achieving excellence i
n business and
environmental performance. It opens up innovative new avenues for managing busi
ness
and conducting economic development by creating linkages among local res
ources,
including businesses, non-profit groups, governments, unions, educational
institutions,
and communities for creative fostering of dynamic and responsible growt
h.
Antiquated
business strategies based on isolated enterprises are no longer respons
ive enough to
market, environmental and community requirements.
Sustainable eco-industrial development has a systematic view of developm
ent, business
and environment attempting to stretch the boundaries of current practic
e on one level,
while it fosters right connections between the wastes and resources needed for p
roduction
and at the other level.
It is a whole new way of thinking about
doing business and
interacting with communities.
At a most basic level, it is each org
anization seeking
higher performance within itself.
However, larger chunk of eco-industr
ial activity is
moving to a new level by increasing the inter-connections between the companies.
Strategic partnership networked manufacturing and performed supplier arrangement

s are
all the examples of ways used by the businesses to ensure growth, co
ntain costs and to
reach out for new opportunities.
2009
September
2-9
For most businesses, the two essentials for success are the responsive markets a
nd access
to cost-effective, quality resources for developing products or deliveri
ng services.
In
absence of these two factors, every other incentive virtually becomes
a minor
consideration.
Transportation issues are important at two levels the ability to get goods to ma
rket in an
expeditious way is essential to success in this day of just-in-time inventories.
The use of
least impact transportation, with due consideration of speed and cost,
supports business
success and addresses the concerned in the community.
Eco-industrial development works because it consciously mixes a range o
f targeted
strategies shaped to the contours of the local community. Most importa
ntly, it works
because the communities want nothing less than the best possible in o
r near their
neighborhoods.
For companies, it provides a path towards significant
higher operating
results and positive market presence. For our environment, it provides greater
hope that
the waste will be transformed into valued product and that the stewardship will
be a joint
pledge of both businesses and communities.
2.3.2.11 Voluntary Agreements
Voluntary environmental agreements among the industries, government, publ
ic
representatives, NGOs and other concerned towards attaining certain futu
re demands of
the environment are reported to be successful.
Such agreements may b
e used as a tool
where Government would like to make the standards stringent in future
(phase-wisestringent).
These may be used when conditions are temporary and requ
ires timely
replacements.
Also these may be used as supplementary/complimentary in
implementation of the regulation. The agreements may include:
Target objectives (emission limit values/standards)
Performance objectives (operating procedures)
R&D activities Government and industry may have agreement to establi
sh better
control technologies.
Monitoring & reporting of the agreement conditions by other agents (
NGOs, public
participants, civil authority etc.,)

In India, the MoEF, has organized such programme, popularly known as
the corporate
responsibility for environment protection (CREP) considering identified 17 categ
ories of
high pollution potential industrial sectors.
Publication in this regar
d, is available with
Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB).
2.3.3 Tools for Communication
2.3.3.1 State of Environment
The Government of India brought out the state of environment report f
or entire country
and similar reports available for many of the states. These reports are publish
ed at regular
intervals to record trends and to identify the required interventions
at various levels.
These reports consider the internationally accepted DPSIR framework for the pres
entation
of the information. DPSIR refers to
D Driving forces causes of concern i.e. industries, transportation etc.
P Pressure pollutants emanating from driving forces i.e. emission
2009
September
2-10
S State quality of environment i.e. air, water & soil quality
I Impact Impact on health, eco-system, materials, biodiversity, economic dama
ge
etc.
R Responses action for cleaner production, policies (including
standards/guidelines), targets etc.
Environment reports including the above elements gives a comprehensive
picture of a
region/country in order to take appropriate measures for improvement.
Such reports
capture the concerns which could be considered in EIAs.
2.3.3.2 Corporate Environmental Reporting
Corporate Environmental Reports (CER) are just a form of environmental
reporting
defined as publicly available, stand-alone reports, issued voluntarily by the in
dustries on
their environmental activities (Borphy and starkey-1996).
CER is a me
ans to
environmental improvement and greater accountability, not an end in itself.
Three categories of environmental disclosure are:
Involuntary disclosure: Without its permission and against its will (
env. Campaign,
press etc.)
Mandatory disclosure: As required by law
Voluntary disclosure: The disclosure of information on a voluntary basis
2.4 Objectives of EIA
Objectives of EIA include the following:
To ensure that the environmental considerations are explicitly address
ed and
incorporated into the development and decision-making process;
To anticipate and avoid, minimize or offset the adverse significant biophysica

l, social
and other relevant effects of development proposals;
To protect the productivity and capacity of natural systems and the
ecological
processes which maintain their functions; and
To promote development that is sustainable and optimizes resource use
and
management opportunities.
2.5 Types of EIA
Environmental assessments could be classified into four types i.e. strategic env
ironmental
assessment, regional EIA, sectoral EIA and project level EIA.
These
are precisely
discussed below:
Strategic environmental assessment
Strategic environmental assessment (SEA) refers to systematic analysis o
f the
environmental effects of development policies, plans, programmes and oth
er proposed
strategic actions.
SEA represents a proactive approach to integrating
environmental
considerations into the higher levels of decision-making beyond the project leve
l, when
major alternatives are still open.
2009
September
2-11
Regional EIA
EIA in the context of regional planning integrates environmental concer
ns into
development planning for a geographic region, normally at the sub-country level.
Such an
approach is referred to as the economic-cum-environmental (EcE) development plan
ning
(Asian Development Bank, 1993a).
This approach facilitates adequate in
tegration of
economic development with management of renewable natural resources with
in the
carrying capacity limitation to achieve sustainable development.
It fu
lfils the need for
macro-level environmental integration, which the project-oriented EIA is
unable to
address effectively.
Regional EIA addresses the environmental impacts
of regional
development plans and thus, the context for project-level EIA of the subsequent
projects,
within the region.
In addition, if environmental effects are consider
ed at regional level,
then the cumulative environmental effects of all the projects within t
he region can be
accounted.
Sectoral EIA
Instead of project-level-EIA, an EIA should take place in the context
of regional and
sectoral level planning.
Once sectoral level development plans have t
he integrated
sectoral environmental concerns addressed, the scope of project-level EI

A will be quite
narrow.
Sectoral EIA will help to address specific environmental prob
lems that may be
encountered in planning and implementing sectoral development projects.
Project level EIA
Project level EIA refers to the developmental activity in isolation and the impa
cts that it
exerts on the receiving environment. Thus, it may not effectively integrate the
cumulative
effects of the development in a region.
From the above discussion, it is clear that the EIA shall be integra
ted at all levels i.e.,
strategic, regional, sectoral and project level.
Whereas, the strategi
c EIA is a structural
change in the way the things are evaluated for decision-making, the regional EIA
refers to
substantial information processing and drawing complex inferences.
The
project-level
EIA is relatively simple and reaches to meaningful conclusions.
There
fore in India,
largely, the project-level EIA studies are taking place and are being
considered.
However, in the re-engineered Notification, provisions are incorporated
for giving a
single clearance for the entire industrial estate for e.g., Leather parks, pharm
a cities, etc.,
which is a step towards the regional approach.
As we progress and the resource planning concepts emerge in our decis
ion-making
process, the integration of overall regional issues will become part o
f the impact
assessment studies.
2.6 Basic EIA Principles
By integrating the environmental impacts of the development activities
and their
mitigation in early stages of project planning, the benefits of EIA could be rea
lized in all
stages of a project, from exploration and planning, through constructio
n, operations,
decommissioning, and beyond site closure.
A properly-conducted-EIA also lessens conflicts by promoting community p
articipation,
informing decision-makers, and also helps in laying the base for envir
onmentally sound
2009
September
2-12
projects. An EIA should meet at least three core values (EIA Training Resource
Manual,
UNEP 2002,):
Integrity: The EIA process should be fair, objective, unbiased and balanced
Utility: The EIA process should provide balanced, credible information for dec
isionmaking
Sustainability: The EIA process should result in environmental safeguards
Ideally an EIA process should be:
Purposive- should inform decision-makers and result in appropriate lev

els of
environmental protection and community well-being.
Rigorous- should apply best practicable science, employing methodologies
and
techniques appropriate to address the problems being investigated.
Practical- should result in providing information and acceptable and
implementable
solutions for problems faced by proponents.
Relevant- should provide sufficient, reliable and usable information for devel
opment
planning and decision-making.
Cost-effective- should impose the minimum cost burdens in terms of time and fi
nance
on proponents and participants consistent with meeting accepted requirem
ents and
objectives of EIA.
Efficient- should achieve the objectives of EIA within the limits of
available
information, time, resources and methodology.
Focused- should concentrate on significant environmental effects and key issue
s; i.e.,
the matters that need to be considered while making decisions.
Adaptive- should be adjusted to the realities, issues and circumstanc
es of the
proposals under review without compromising the integrity of the proces
s, and be
iterative, incorporating lessons learnt throughout the project life cycle.
Participative- should provide appropriate opportunities to inform and
involve the
interested and affected public, and their inputs and concerns should b
e addressed
explicitly in the documentation and decision-making.
Inter-disciplinary- should ensure that the appropriate techniques and
experts in the
relevant bio-physical and socio-economic disciplines are employed, including the
use
of traditional knowledge as relevant.
Credible- should be carried out with professionalism, rigor, fairness,
objectivity,
impartiality and balance, and be subject to independent checks and verification.
Integrated- should address the inter-relationships of social, economic and bio
physical
aspects.
Transparent- should have clear, easily understood requirements for EIA
content;
ensure public access to information; identify the factors that are to
be taken into
account in decision-making; and acknowledge limitations and difficulties.
Systematic- should result in full consideration of all relevant infor
mation on the
affected environment, of proposed alternatives and their impacts, and of the mea
sures
necessary to monitor and investigate residual effects.
2009
September
2-13
2.7 Project Cycle
The generic project cycle including that of Onshore and Offshore Oil
and Gas industry
has six main stages:
1) Project concept
2) Pre-feasibility
3) Feasibility
4) Design and engineering
5) Implementation
6) Monitoring and evaluation
It is important to consider the environmental factors on an equal basis with the
technical
and economic factors throughout the project planning, assessment and im
plementation
phases. EIA should be introduced at the earliest in the project cycle and must
be made an
integral part of the project pre-feasibility and feasibility stage. If the EIA
considerations
are given due respect in the site selection process by the project proponent, th
e subsequent
stages of the clearance process would get simplified and would also f
acilitate easy
compliance to the mitigation measures through out the project life cycle.
A projects feasibility study should include a detailed assessment of si
gnificant impacts,
the prediction and quantification of impacts and delineation of EMPs. Findings o
f the EIA
study should preferably be incorporated in the project design stage so that the
project as
well as the site alternatives is studied and necessary changes, if required, are
incorporated
in the project design stage. This practice will also help the management in ass
essing the
negative impacts and in designing cost-effective remedial measures.
In
general, EIA
enhances the project quality and improves the project planning process.
2.8 Environmental Impacts
Environmental impacts resulting from proposed actions can be grouped in
to following
categories:
Beneficial or detrimental
Naturally reversible or irreversible
Repairable via management practices or irreparable
Short-term or long-term
Temporary or continuous
Occurring during construction phase or operational phase
Local, regional, national or global
Accidental or planned (recognized before hand)
Direct (primary) or Indirect (secondary)
Cumulative or single
The category of impact as stated above and its significance will faci
litate the Expert
Appraisal Committee EACto take a view on the ToR for EIA studies, as
well as, in
decision making process about the developmental activity.
2009
September
2-14
Figure 2-2: Types of Impacts
The nature of impacts could fall within three broad classifications i.e., direct
, indirect and
cumulative, based on the characteristics of impacts.
The assessment o
f direct, indirect
and cumulative impacts should not be considered in isolation or consid
ered as separate
stages in the EIA. Ideally, the assessment of such impacts should form an integ
ral part of
all stages of the EIA. The TGM does not recommend a single method to assess the
types
of impacts, but suggests a practical framework/approach that can be ad
apted and
combined to suit a particular project and the nature of impacts.
2.8.1 Direct impacts
Direct impacts occur through direct interaction of an activity with an
environmental,
social, or economic component.
The oil and gas exploration and produ
ctions activities
may contaminate the basic environmental media.
For example, the disch
arge of
wastewaters would directly impact the water and soil quality in the vicinity and
finally the
health of the workers.
2.8.2 Indirect impacts
Indirect impacts on the environment are those which are not a direct result of t
he project,
often produced away from or as a result of a complex impact pathway.
The indirect
impacts are also known as secondary or even tertiary level impacts.
An example of
indirect impact, is the decline in water quality due to the discharge
of wastewaters and
other crude oils into the sea.
This may, in turn, lead to a secon
dary indirect impact on
aquatic flora in that water body and may not be any further fishing activities.
Reduction
in fishing harvests, affecting the incomes of fishermen is a third le
vel impact.
Such
impacts are characterized as socio-economic (third level) impacts.
The
indirect impacts
may also include growth-inducing impacts and other effects related to induced ch
anges to
the pattern of land use or additional road network, population density or growth
rate. In
the process, air, water and other natural systems including the ecosys
tem may also be
affected.
2009
2-15
2.8.3 Cumulative impacts
September
Cumulative impact consists of an impact that is created as a result of the combi

nation of
the project evaluated in the EIA together with other projects in the same vicini
ty causing
related impacts.
These impacts occur when the incremental impact of
the project is
combined with the cumulative effects of other past, present and reason
ably foreseeable
future projects.
Figure 2-3 depicts the same.
Respective EAC may e
xercise their
discretion on a case-by-case basis for considering the cumulative impacts.
Figure 2-3: Cumulative Impact
2.8.4 Induced Impact
The cumulative impacts can be due to induced actions of projects and activities
that may
occur if the action under assessment is implemented such as growth-inducing impa
cts and
other effects related to induced changes to the pattern of future land use or ad
ditional road
network, population density or growth rate (e.g. excess growth may be
induced in the
zone of influence around a proposed industry, and in the process caus
ing additional
effects on air, water and other natural ecosystems). Induced actions may not be
officially
announced or be a part of any official plan.
Increase in workforce
and nearby
communities contributes to this effect.
They usually have no direct relationship with the action under assessment, and r
epresent
the growth-inducing potential of an action. New roads leading from those constr
ucted for
a project, increased recreational activities (e.g., hunting, fishing), and const
ruction of new
service facilities are examples of induced actions.
However, the cumulative impacts due to induced development or third le
vel or even
secondary indirect impacts are difficult to be quantified.
Because of
higher levels of
uncertainties, these impacts cannot normally be assessed over a long t
ime horizon.
An
EIA practitioner can only guess as to what such induced impacts may be and the p
ossible
extent of their implications on the environmental factors.
Respective
expert appraisal
committee may exercise their discretion on a case by case basis for
considering the
induced impacts.
2.9 Significance of Impacts
This TGM establishes the significance of impacts first and proceeds to
delineate the
associated mitigations and measures.
So the significance here reflects
the worst-casescenario before mitigation is applied, and therefore provides an underst
anding of what
2009
September
2-16
may happen if mitigation fails or if it is not as effective as pred
icted.
For establishing
significance of different impacts, understanding the responses and inter
action of the
environmental system is essential. Hence, the impact interactions and pathways
are to be
understood and established first.
Such an understanding will help in
the assessment
process to quantify the impact as accurately as possible.
Complex in
teractions,
particularly in case of certain indirect or cumulative impacts, may give rise to
non-linear
responses which are often difficult to understand and therefore might be difficu
lt to assess
their significance.
It is hence understood that indirect or cumulativ
e impacts are more
complex than the direct impacts.
Currently the impact assessments are
limited to direct
impacts.
In case mitigation measures are delineated before determining
significance of
the effect, the significance represents the residual effects.
However, the ultimate objective of an EIA is to achieve sustainable d
evelopment. The
development process shall invariably cause some residual impacts even a
fter
implementing an EMP effectively.
Environmentalists today are faced wit
h a vital, noteasy-to-answer questionWhat is the tolerable level of environmental impact within
the
sustainable development framework?
As such, it has been recognized tha
t every
ecosystem has a threshold for absorbing deterioration and a certain ca
pacity for selfregeneration. These thresholds based on concept of carrying capacity are as fol
lows:
Waste emissions from a project should be within the assimilative capacity of t
he local
environment to absorb without unacceptable degradation of its future wa
ste
absorptive capacity or other important services.
Harvest rates of renewable resource inputs should be within the regenerative c
apacity
of the natural system that generates them; depletion rates of non-rene
wable inputs
should be equal to the rate at which renewable substitutes are develo
ped by human
invention and investment.
The aim of this model is to curb over-consumption and unacceptable en
vironmental
degradation.
But because of limitation in available scientific basis,
this definition
provides only general guidelines for determining the sustainable use of
inputs and
outputs. For establishing the level of significance to each identified impact,
a three-stage
analysis may be referred:
First, an impact is qualified as being either negative or positive.
Second, the nature of impacts such as direct, indirect, or cumulativ
e is determined
using the impact network
Third, a scale is used to determine the severity of the effect; for example, a
n impact is
of low, medium, or high significance.
It is not sufficient to simply state the significance of the effect. This deter
mination must
be justified, coherent and documented, notably by a determination metho
dology, which
must be described in the methodology section of the report. There are many reco
gnized
methodologies to determine the significance of effects.
2.9.1 Criteria/Methodology to Determine the Significance of the Identifi
ed
Impacts
The criteria can be determined by answering some questions regarding t
he factors
affecting the significance.
This will help the EIA stakeholders, the
practitioner in
particular, to determine the significance of the identified impacts eve
ntually.
Typical
2009
September
2-17
examples of such factors (one approach reported by Duval and Vonk 199
4) include the
following:
Exceedance of a threshold: Significance may increase if the threshold
is exceeded.
For e.g., Emissions of SO
2
and/or PM10 exceed the permissible threshold.
Effectiveness of mitigation: Significance may increase as the effectiv
eness of
mitigation measures decreases. e.g., control technologies, which may not
assure
consistent compliance to the requirements.
Size of study area: Significance may increase as the zone of effect
s increases.
e.g.,
High temperature discharge from a cooling tower into the sea may impa
ct the
mangrove ecology at a distant location.
Incremental contribution of effects from action under review: Signific
ance may
increase as the relative contribution of an action increases.
Relative contribution of effects of other actions: Significance may d
ecrease as the
significance of nearby larger actions increase.
Relative rarity of species: Significance may increase as a species b
ecomes
increasingly rare or threatened.
Significance of local effects: Significance may increase as the signi
ficance of local
effects is high.
Magnitude of change relative to natural background variability: Signif
icance may
decrease if effects are within natural assimilative capacity or variability.
Creation of induced actions: Significance may increase as the signifi

cance of the
induced activities is also high.
Degree of existing disturbance: Significance may increase if the surr
ounding
environment is pristine.
For determining the significance of impacts, it is important to rememb
er that secondary
and higher order effects can also occur as a result of a primary in
teraction between the
project activity and local environment.
Where a primary effect is id
entified, the
practitioner should always think if secondary or tertiary effects on o
ther aspects of the
environment could also arise.
The EIA should also consider the effects that could arise from the project due t
o induced
developments, which take place as a consequence of the project. Ex., Population
density
and associated infrastructure and jobs for people attracted to the are
a by the project.
It
also requires consideration of cumulative effects that could arise from
a combination of
the effects due to other projects with those of other existing or planned devel
opments in
the surrounding area. So the necessity to formulate a qualitative checklist is
suggested to
test significance, in general.
September
2009
3-1
3.
ONSHORE AND OFFSHORE OIL & GAS
EXPLORATION, DEVELOPMENT & PRODUCTION
3.1 Introduction
India has substantial quantity of oil reserves in its territory. So far 26 sedi
mentary basins
of hydrocarbon potential have been identifies within the country. Bomba
y high, KG
basin, Cambay, Cauvery, Assam, Andaman and Nicobar Islands, Rajasthan,
etc., are a
few of the major sedimentary basins.
The sedimentary basins of India
, onshore and
offshore up to the 200 meter (m) isobath, have an areal extent of a
bout 1.79 million
square kilometer (km
2
).
In the deep waters beyond the 200 m isobath, the sedimentary
area has been estimated to be about 1.35 million km2.
Thus the tot
al sedimentary area
basins including onshore and offshore areas within Indian territorial limits wor
ks out to be
3.14 million km2 of which about 15% of area is still unexplored. The sedimentar
y basin
map of India is shown in Figure 3.1.
The sedimentary basins are di
vided into four
categories based on their degree of prospect as presently known.
The
details of
categorization and sedimentary basinal areas are given in Figure 3-1 a

nd Figure 3-2
respectively.
India largely depends on Gulf Countries for its oil and gas requirements. Curre
ntly 70%
of the domestic hydrocarbon requirements are being imported and are ra
pidly rising due
to the rapid development. The oil companies in the country produce ab
out 34 million
tones of oil per annum and 65 million standard cubic meters of gas per day. ONG
C alone
accounts for 77% of the oil and gas produced in India.
The national oil companies i.e. Oil & Natural Gas Corporation Limited (ONGC) and
Oil
India Ltd. (OIL) and private companies that work independently or as joint Ventu
re (JV)
with national oil companies are engaged in the Exploration and Production (E&P)
of oil
and natural gas in the country. The private companies include Reliance India Lt
d (RIL),
Cairn Energy, Essar, British Gas, Niko Resources, Hardly Oil, Gujarat
State
Petrochemicals Ltd. (GSPCL), Phoenix, Premier Oil, HOEC etc.
Operational Aspects of an EIA
2009
September
3-2
Figure 3-1: Sedimentary Basins of India

2009
September
3-3
Figure 3-2: Categorization of Sedimentary Basins
2009
September
3-4
Figure 3-3: Sedimentary Basinal Areas

2009
3-5
September
3.1.1 New significant discoveries

3.1.1.1 Discoveries by national oil companies (NOC) in nomination blocks
In the last six years (2000-06), the NOCs viz., ONGC and OIL made 3
8 significant
hydrocarbon discoveries of which 13 are offshore and 25 on land. Out
of 13 offshore
discoveries, 8 were made in Kutch & Mumbai Basins, Western Offshore,
and 5 in KG
basin, Eastern Offshore.
All these offshore discoveries were by ONGC.
In 2005-06,
discoveries made by ONGC are B-9-1(Gas) within Daman Fm. in Saurashtra-Dahanu an
d
RV-1 (Gas) within Panna Fm.
in Western Offshore and GS-15-E-1 (Gas)
within Ravva
Fm. in (KG) Eastern Offshore.
Out of the 25 Onland discoveries, 13 discoveries were made by OIL in
Upper Assam
Shelf and 12 discoveries were made by ONGC in Rajasthan, Cambay, Cauvery, K-G an
d
in Assam Arakan Basins. In 2005-06, discoveries made by OIL were Moran-109 (Gas
) in
Oligocene Barail Sand, Bazaloni-1 (Oil & Gas) in Oligocene Barail Sand
, Moran-107
(Oil & Gas) in Lakadong + Therria Sand of Eocene age, Baghjan-2 (Oil
& Gas) and
Barekuri-4 (Oil & Gas) in Langpar Sand of Late Cretaceous age. The discoveries
made
by ONGC were Turputallu (gas) in K-G and Mekeypore (Oil) in Upper Assam Shelf.
3.1.1.2 Discoveries by private / JV companies
In the last 6 years, under PSC regime Pvt/JV companies have made 59
significant
hydrocarbon discoveries (as on September, 06), both in the NELP and Pre-NELP blo
cks.
These discoveries were made in five major areas: Krishna-Godavari Offshore, Maha
nadiNEC Offshore, Gulf of Cambay, onland Rajasthan and Cambay Basins.
RIL made a series of oil & gas discoveries in their deep water bloc
k KG-DWN-98/3
through the drilling and testing of Dhirubhai wells 18, 19, 22, 23 a
nd 26.
In the block
KG-OSN-2001/2 Reliance has discovered oil & gas in Dhirubhai-24 and 25. Recentl
y in
the block KG-OSN-2001/1 RIL has discovered oil & gas reserves in Dhirubhai #28.
Recent gas discoveries namely Dhirubhai 20, 21 in Upper Miocene Pay Sand made by
RIL in shallow offshore block NEC-OSN-97/2 located in Mahanadi-NEC basi
n have
upgraded the category of the basin from Cat.-III to Cat.-II. When these discover
ies are put
on production along with earlier discoveries, the category of the basi
n will be further
upgraded to Cat.-I and will become the 8th basin with established commercial pro
duction.
In deepwater block KG-DWN-98/2, M/s. ONGC made three important discover
ies:
DWN-A-1 (Gas), U-1 (Gas) & W-1 (Gas).
Recently in block CB-ONN-2000/1, GSPC has discovered oil & gas in Sanand East(1)
in
Olpad. It also discovered oil in Kalol in well Tarapur-1 in CB-ON/2 block. In
offshore
block KG-OSN- 2001/3, M/s. GSPC has discovered gas in KG-8 well in L
ower
Cretaceous Sand and oil & gas in KG-17 well in Upper Cretaceous Sand
. In CB-ON/3
block, M/s. Essar Oil has discovered oil in ESU-1 well and its comme
rciality was
approved in August, 2006. In Panna-Mukta field BGEPIL discovered oil and gas in
SW
Panna (SWP-1) in Bassein Limestone of Eocene-Oligocene age.
In the Rajasthan onland block RJ-ON-90/1 in Barmer-Sanchor sub-basin, C
airn Energy
has made a string of oil & gas discoveries viz., NI-2, NC-west-1 & GS-V-1 in Fat
hegarh
2009
September
3-6
Fm. These discoveries along with previous discoveries have put Rajasthan firmly
on the
oil map of India. In RJ-ON/6 block FOCUS Energy has discovered gas in SGL-1 well
.
Source: Directorate General of Hydrocarbons (DGH)
3.1.2 Exploration & production (E&P) data statistics
3.1.2.1 Resources and reserves
The hydrocarbon resources, inclusive of deep waters, are estimated at
around 28 billion
tones oil and oil-equivalent of gas (O+OEG).
As on 01.04.2006, initi
al in place oil of
8.46 billion tonnes and ultimate reserves of 3.25 billion tonnes have
been established.
The resources estimated by DGH for its internal use, for the country,
are 32 billion
tonnes (O+OEG).
3.1.2.2 Seismic surveys
During the year 2005-06, 2-D seismic data acquisition comprised 7,265
.17 LKM
onland and 12,780.48 LKM offshore data.
In respect of 3-D seismic data, 4,415.64 km
2
onland and 39,344.10 km
2
offshore data
were acquired.
A total of 16 2D seismic parties and 27 3D seismic parties were deployed in
onland
areas. 8 seismic vessels were engaged to carryout 2D and 3D seismic
surveys in
offshore areas.
3.1.2.3 Drilling
During 2003-04, a total of 418 hydrocarbon wells were drilled where 1
98 were
exploratory and 220 development wells.
The NOCs contributed to the b
ulk of the
drilling.
A total of 11,09,480 m were drilled, including 561,620 m
of exploratory and
547,860 m of development drilling
3.1.2.4 Production
Total oil production during the year was over 32.189 million metric t
onne (MMT) and

that of gas 32.200 billion cubic metre (BCM). The contribution of Private/ Join
t Venture
companies was about 18% of the total Oil & OEG production. Relevant details are
given
below in Figures 3.4 -3.10.
2009
September
3-7
Figure 3-4: Total Hydrocarbon Resources (as on 01-04-2006)
2009
September
3-8
Figure 3-5: Reserves and Accretion of Hydrocarbons
2009
September
3-9
Figure 3-6: Seismic Data

2009
September
3-10
Figure 3-7: Exploratory and Development Wells Drilled (2005-06)
2009
September
3-11
Figure 3-8: Exploratory and Development Meterage Drilled (2005-06)
2009
3-12
Figure 3-9: Seismic Parties/ Vessels Deployed (2005-2006)
September

2009
September
3-13
Figure 3-10: Oil and Gas Production (2005-06)

2009
September
3-14
3.2 Scientific Aspects
3.2.1 Industrial process
The oil & gas industry comprises of three segments, Upstream, Midstrea
m &
Downstream.
Upstream segment deals with oil & gas exploration and production
Midstream deals with the transportation of crude oil petroleum produc
ts,
transportation of natural gas and LNG receiving terminals
Downstream segment deals with refining, gas processing and marketing of oil &
gas
to the ultimate consumers
In the Indian context initially companies were set up for a specific
purpose but after
liberalization almost all the companies are now getting to be fully integrated (
involving in
the above mentioned streams).
The primary products of the oil and gas industry are crude oil, natu
ral gas liquids, and
natural gas.
Crude oil consists of a mixture of hydrocarbons having
varying molecular
weights and properties.
Natural gas can be produced from oil wells, or wells can be drilled with natural
gas as the
primary product. Methane is the predominant component of natural gas,
but ethane,
propane, and butane could also be the significant components. The heav
ier components,
including propane and butane, exist as liquids when cooled and compressed and th
ese are
often separated and processed as LPG.
The oil and gas extraction industry can be classified into four major processes:
exploration
appraisal
development and production, and
decommissioning and abandonment.
3.2.1.1 Exploration activities
A. Exploration surveying
In the first stage of the search for hydrocarbon-bearing rock formations, geolog
ical maps
are reviewed in desk studies to identify major sedimentary basins.

A
erial photography
can be used to identify promising landscape formations such as faults or anticli
nes. More
detailed information is assembled using a field geological assessment, followed
by one of
three main survey methods: magnetic, gravimetric and seismic.
The magnetic method depends on measuring the variations in intensity o
f the magnetic
field which reflects the magnetic character of
the
various rocks p
resent,
while the
gravimetric method involves the measurement of small variations in the gra
vitational
field at the surface of the earth.
Measurements are made, on land
and at sea, using an
aircraft or a survey ship respectively.
2009
September
3-15
Seismic surveys are the most common assessment methods used to pinpoin
t potential
hydrocarbon reserves in geological formations. Seismic technology uses the refl
ection of
sound waves to identify subsurface geological structures.
The surveys
are conducted
through the generation of seismic waves by a variety of sources ranging from exp
losives
that are detonated in shot-holes drilled below the surface, to vibrose
is machinery (a
vibrating pad lowered to the ground from a vibroseis truck). Reflected seismic w
aves are
measured with a series of sensors known as geophones laid out in series on the s
urface. A
typical seismic survey is illustrated in Figure 3-11.
Figure 3-11: Seismic Surveys
Source: Joint E&P Forum/ UNEP Technical Publication
In modern marine seismic surveys, as many as 16 streamers (cables conta
ining the
hydrophones used to detect the sound reflected from the subsurface) are towed be
hind the
seismic vessel, at a depth of 5 to 10 m.
Each cable can be as l
ong as 8 to 10 km.
In
addition to the hydrophone array, the vessel tows seismic source array
s comprising a
number of air guns which discharge sound bursts of between 200250 deci
bels (dB)
downward. The sound bursts, repeated on average every 6 to 10 seconds, are refl
ected off
deep geological formations and recorded by the hydrophone array.
B. Exploration drilling
Exploratory drilling activities onshore/ offshore follow the analysis of
seismic data to
verify and quantify the amount and extent of oil and gas resources f
rom potentially
productive geological formations.
Most of the exploratory boreholes ar
e drilled to
confirm the presence of hydrocarbons and the thickness and internal pr
essure of a
reservoir. However, some are also drilled to gain knowledge of the geological f
ormation.
All wells that are drilled to discover hydrocarbons are called explorat
ion wells,
2009
September
3-16
commonly known by drillers as wildcats.
The location of a drill site
depends on the
characteristics of the underlying geological formation.
For onshore operations, a well pad is constructed at the chosen location to acco
mmodate a
drilling rig, associated equipment and support services.
A pad for a
single exploration
well occupies between 400015000 square meter (m
2
).
The type of pad construction
depends on terrain, soil conditions and seasonal constraints. The drilling rig
and support
services are transported to site, typically in modules and assembled. Typical d
rilling rig
modules, as shown in figure 3-12, include a derrick, drilling mud han
dling equipment,
power generators, cementing equipment and tanks for fuel and water.
Figure 3-12: Drilling
Operations over water can be conducted using a variety of self-contained mobile
offshore
drilling units (MODUs), the choice of which depends on the depth of
water, seabed
conditions and prevailing meteorological conditions, - particularly
win
d speed, wave
height and current speed.
The following are the various types of mobile offshore drilling rigs:
Jack-up rigs: Suitable for shallow water up to 100 m deep and transported to l
ocation
either under their own propulsion, or towed by tugs. Once there, electric or hy
draulic
jacks lower three or four legs to the seafloor to support the drilli
ng platform above
water.
2009
September
3-17
Semi-submersible rigs: Suitable for deep waters and transported to lo
cation either
under their own propulsion, or towed by tugs. The hull is partially submerged a
nd the
rig held in place by a series of anchors.
Submersible rigs: Limited to shallow waters and towed onto location.

Consisting of
two hulls: an upper hull, or platform, and lower hull that is filled
with water and
submerged to the seafloor.
Drilling barges as floating platform: Suitable for shallow waters, es
tuarine areas,
lakes, marshes, swamps and rivers. Not suitable for open or deep water. Towed on
to
location.
Drillships: Designed for drilling in deep water locations. Drilling ta
kes place from a
drilling platform and derrick positioned in the middle of the deck, f
rom which drill
stems are lowered through a hole in the hull (moonhole).
Once on location, a series of well sections of decreasing diameter are drilled f
rom the rig.
A drill bit, attached to the drill string suspended from the rigs der
rick, is rotated in the
well. Drill collars are attached to add weight and drilling fluids are circulat
ed through the
drill string and pumped through the drill bit. Drilling operations are generall
y conducted
round-the-clock.
The time taken to drill a bore hole depends on the
depth of the
hydrocarbon bearing formation and the geological conditions, but it is
commonly of the
order of one or two months. Where a hydrocarbon formation is found, initial well
tests
possibly lasting another month are conducted to establish flow rates
and formation
pressure. These tests may generate oil, gas and formation water each of which n
eeds to
be disposed off.
After drilling and initial testing, the rig is usually dismantled and moved to t
he next site.
If the exploratory drilling has discovered commercial quantities of hyd
rocarbons, a
wellhead valve assembly may be installed.
If the well does not cont
ain commercial
quantities of hydrocarbon, the site is decommissioned to a safe and s
table condition and
restored to its original state or an agreed after use. Open rock formations are
sealed with
cement plugs to prevent upward migration of wellbore fluids. The casing of the
wellhead
and the top joint of the casings are cut below the ground level and capped with
a cement
plug.
Drilling fluids
The fluid has a number of functions.
It imparts hydraulic force tha
t assists the drill bit
cutting action, and it cools the bit, removes cuttings rock from the wellbore an
d protects
the well against formation pressures. When each well section has been
drilled, steel
casing is run into the hole and cemented into place to prevent well
collapse.
When the
reservoir is reached the well may be completed and tested by running a produ
ction liner
and equipment to flow the hydrocarbons to the surface to establish reservoir pro
perties in
a test separator.
Various drilling fluids are available, but they ca
n generally be
categorized into one of two fluid systems:
Water-Based Drilling Fluids (WBDF): Fluids where the continuous phase
and
suspending medium for solids is seawater or a water miscible fluid. There are m
any
WBDF variations, including gel, salt-polymer , salt-glycol and salt-silicate flu
ids;
Non-Aqueous Drilling Fluids (NADF): The continuous phase and suspendin
g
medium for solids is a water immiscible fluid that is oil-based, enhanced minera
l oilbased, or synthetic-based.
2009
September
3-18
Diesel-based fluids are also available, but the use of systems that contain di
esel as the
principal component of the liquid phase is not considered current good
practice for
offshore drilling programs and should be avoided.
Typically, the solid medium used in most drilling fluids is barite (b
arium sulfate) for
weight, with bentonite clays as a thickener.
Drilling fluids also co
ntain a number of
chemicals that are added depending on the downhole formation conditions.
Drilling fluids are either circulated downhole with direct loss to the
seabed along with
displaced cuttings, particularly while drilling well sections nearest to
the surface of the
seabed, or are recirculated to the offshore facility where they are r
outed to a control
system that filters solids. In this control system, the drilling fluids are sepa
rated from the
cuttings so that they may be recirculated downhole leaving the cutting
s behind for
disposal.
These cuttings contain a proportion of residual drilling fl
uid.
The volume of
cuttings produced will depend on the depth of the well and the diame
ter of the hole
drilled.
The drilling fluid is replaced when its rheological properties or density of the
fluid can no
longer be maintained or at the end of the drilling program.
These
spent fluids are then
contained for reuse or disposal.
Casing
As the hole is drilled, casing is placed in the well to stabilize the hole and p
revent caving.
The casing also isolates water-bearing and hydrocarbon-bearing zones. As
shown in
Figure 3-13 three or four separate casing strings (lengths of tubing of a given di
ameter)
may be used in intermediate-depth wells.
In locations where surface
soils may cave in

during drilling, a conductor casing may be placed at the surface, extending only t
wenty
to one hundred feet from the surface. This string is often placed before the dr
illing starts.
with a pile driver (Berger and Anderson, 1992).
The next string, or
surface casing,
begins at the surface and may penetrate two thousand to three thousan
d feet deep.
Its
primary purpose is to protect the surrounding freshwater aquifer(s) from the inc
ursion of
oil or brine from greater depths. The intermediate string begins at the surface a
nd ends
within a couple thousand feet of the bottom of the wellbore.
This
section prevents the
hole from caving in and facilitates the movement of equipment used in the hole,
e.g., drill
strings and logging tools.
The final production string extends the ful
l length of the
wellbore and encases the downhole production equipment. Shallow wells may have
only
two casing strings, and deeper wells may have multiple intermediate casings. Af
ter each
casing string has been installed, cement is forced out through the bottom of the
casing up
the annulus to hold it in place and surface casing is cemented to t
he surface.
Casing is
cemented to prevent migration of fluids behind the casing and to prevent communi
cation
of higher pressure productive formations with lower pressure non-productive form
ations.
Additional features and equipment will be installed during the completi
on process for
production.
Perforations will allow reservoir fluid to enter the well
bore; tubing strings
will carry the fluid to the surface; and packers (removable plugs) ma
y be installed to
isolate producing zones.
Casing is important for both drilling and production phases of operati
on, and must
therefore be designed properly.
It prevents natural gas, oil, and as
sociated brine from
leaking out into the surrounding freshwater aquifer(s), limits sediment
from entering the
wellbore, and facilitates the movement of equipment up and down the h
ole.
Several
considerations are involved in planning the casing. First, the bottom of the we
llbore must
be large enough to accommodate any pumping equipment that will be needed either
upon
commencement of pumping, or in the later years of production.
Also,
unusually
2009
September
3-19
pressurized zones will require thicker casing in that immediate area.
Any casing strings
that must fit within this string must then be smaller, but must stil
l accommodate the
downhole equipment. Finally, the driller is encouraged to keep the siz
e of the hole to a
minimum; as size increases, so does cost and waste.
Figure 3-13: Cross-section of a Cased Well
Source: EPA
3.2.1.2 Appraisal
When exploratory drilling is successful, more wells are drilled to determine t
he size and
the extent of the field. Wells drilled to quantify the hydrocarbon reserves fou
nd are called
outstep or appraisal wells. The appraisal stage aims to evaluate the size and na
ture
of the reservoir, to determine the number of confirming
or
apprais
al
wells
required,
and
whether
any further seismic work is necessary.
The technica
l procedures in
appraisal drilling are same as those employed for exploration wells, a
nd the description
provided above applies equally to appraisal operations. A number of wells may b
e drilled
from a single site, which increases the time during which the site is occupied.
Deviated
or directional drilling at an angle from a site adjacent to the original discove
ry bore-hole
may be used to appraise other parts of the reservoir, in order to r
educe the land used or
footprint.
3.2.1.3 Field development and production
Development and production is the phase during which the infrastructure
is installed to
extract the hydrocarbon resource over the life of the estimated reserve. It may
involve the
2009
September
3-20
drilling of additional wells called development or production wells, th
e operation of
central production facilities to treat the produced hydrocarbons, the i
nstallation of flow
lines, and the installation of pipelines to transport hydrocarbons to export fac
ilities.
A small reservoir may be developed using one or more of the appraisa
l wells.
A larger
reservoir will require the drilling of additional production wells.
M
ultiple production
wells are often drilled from one pad to reduce land requirements and
the overall
infrastructure cost.
The number of wells required to exploit the hyd
rocarbon reservoir
varies with the size of the reservoir and its geology. Large oilfields can requ
ire a hundred
or more wells to be drilled, whereas smaller fields may only require
ten or so.
The
drilling procedure involves similar techniques to those described for e
xploration;
however, with a larger number of wells being drilled, the level of a
ctivity obviously
increases in proportion.
The well sites will be occupied for long a
nd support services
workforce accommodation, water supply, waste management, and other servi
ces will
correspondingly increase.
As each well is drilled it has to be prep
ared for production
before the drilling rig departs. The heavy drill pipe is replaced by lighter we
ight tubing in
the well and occasionally one well may carry two or three strings of
tubing, each one
producing from different layers of reservoir rock.
Following development drilling and well completion, a Christmas tree is placed on
each
wellhead to control flow of the formation fluids to the surface. Hydr
ocarbons may flow
freely from the wells if the underground formation pressures are adequate, but a
dditional
pressure may be required such as a sub-surface pump or the injection
of gas or water
through dedicated injection wells to maintain reservoir pressure. Depending on
reservoir
conditions, various substances (steam, nitrogen, carbon dioxide, and surfa
ctants) may be
injected into the reservoir to remove more oil from the pore spaces, increase pr
oduction,
and extend well life.
Production from most wells follows a predictable pattern called a decl
ine curve where
production increases relatively rapidly to a peak, and then follows a
long, slow decline.
Operators may periodically perform well workovers to clean out the wel
lbore, allowing
oil or gas to move more easily to the surface.
Other measures to
increase production
include fracturing and treating the bottom of the wellbore with acid
to create better
pathways for the oil and gas to move to the surface. Formation fluids are then
separated
into oil, gas and water at a central production facility, designed an
d constructed
depending on the reservoir size and location.
The production facility processes the hydrocarbon fluids. Crude oil processing
essentially
involves the removal of gas and water before export.
Gas processing
involves the
removal of liquids and other impurities such as carbon dioxide, nitrog
en and hydrogen
sulfide. Oil and gas terminal facilities receive hydrocarbons from outs
ide locations
sometimes offshore and process and store the hydrocarbons before they
are exported.
There are several types of hydrocarbon terminals, including inland pipe
line terminals,
onshore / coastal marine receiving terminals (from offshore production),
barge shipping,
or receiving terminals.
A schematic representation of a typical crude
oil processing
facility is shown in figure 3.14.
2009
September
3-21
Figure 3-14: Typical Crude Oil/Gas Processing
The infrastructure required for development drilling in onshore operations is si
milar to the
one described above for exploration. However, once drilling is completed, the in
dividual
wellhead assemblies and well sites occupy considerably lesser space tha
n when the drill
rig was on site.
Typically, each well requires an area of some 10
square meter (m
2
)
surrounded by a security fence.
Often the well sites are concentrate
d within a central
area, which includes processing facilities, offices and workshops, and this woul
d typically
occupy an area of several hectares, depending upon the capacity of th
e field.
Since the
production operation is a long-term development, the temporary facilitie
s used in
exploration are replaced by permanent facilities and are subject to de
tailed planning,
design, engineering and construction.
The temporary workforce associate
d with
exploration activity is replaced by a permanent workforce, usually accommodated
in the
local area and, where desirable, fully integrated with the local community: inde
ed a large
proportion of the workforce may be recruited locally and receive speci
alized training.
Similarly, the local infrastructure provides a variety of requirements in additi
on to labour,
such as material supplies, education, medical, etc.
In offshore production developments, permanent structures are necessary
to support the
required facilities, since typical exploration units are not designed f
or full scale
production operations. This will involve the installation of an offshor
e drilling and
production platform that is self sufficient in terms of energy and wa
ter needs for the
workforce and for drilling wells and processing hydrocarbons ready for export.
There are many types of offshore platforms, including:
Fixed platforms: Used in water depths up to 500 m. Consists of steel or concre
te legs
(jacket) secured directly to the seabed by steel piles that support a steel deck
. Drilling
equipment, production facilities and accommodation are typically housed on the d
eck.
Compliant towers: Used in water depths ranging from 500 m to 1,000

m. These
towers consist of a narrow, flexible tower on a piled foundation supp
orting a
conventional deck.
2009
September
3-22
Tension leg platforms: Used in water depths of up to 2,000 m and
consists of a
floating facility moored to the seabed and fixed in place by anchors. Mini tens
ion leg
platforms (Seastars) exist that are used in water depths between 200 m and 1,000
m.
Jack-up platforms: Used in shallower water up to 100m and transporte
d to location
where the legs are lowered by hydraulic jacks into position to support the deck.
Normally, a steel platform is installed to serve as the gathering and proc
essing centre
and more than 40 wells may be drilled directionally from this platform
. Concrete
platforms are sometimes used (see Figure 3-15). If the field is large enough
, additional
satellite
platforms may
be
needed,
linked by
subsea flow lines
to
the central
facility.
In shallow waters, typically a central processing facility
is supported by a
number of smaller wellhead platforms.
Recent technological developments
, aimed at
optimizing operations, include remotely operated subsea systems which re
move the
requirement for satellite platforms.
This technology is also being us
ed in deep water
where platforms are unsuitable, and for marginal fields where platforms
would be
uneconomic.
In these cases, floating systems ships and semi-submersib
les service
the subsea wells on a regular basis.
Figure 3-15: Concrete Gravity Platform
Produced oil and gas may be exported by pipeline, trucks, tankers or rail tank c
ars. Gasto-liquids is an area of technology development that allows natural gas to be co
nverted to
liquid.
Gas is often exported, after liquefaction, as liquefied natur
al gas (LNG) using
specially constructed tankers. Pipelines are constructed in a sequential proces
s, including
staking of the right-of-way (ROW) and pipeline centerline; ROW clearing
and grading;
2009
September
3-23
trenching (for buried pipeline); pipe laying, welding, and bending; field coatin
g of welded
joints; testing; lowering; trench backfilling; and ROW reinstatement.
Pumps or
compressors are used to transport liquids or gas from the oil and gas fields to
downstream
or export facilities. During commissioning, flow lines, pipelines, and associat
ed facilities
(e.g., block valves and meters, regulators and relief devices, pump st
ations, pigging
stations, storage tanks) are filled with water and hydro tested to ensure integr
ity. Pipeline
operation usually requires frequent inspections (ground and aerial surve
illance, and
facility inspections) and periodic ROW and facility maintenance. Production and
pipeline
operation is usually monitored and controlled from a central location
through a
supervisory control and data acquisition system (SCADA) which allows fi
eld operating
variables to be monitored such as flow rate, pressure, and temperature
and to open and
close valves.
Recent advances in horizontal drilling have enhanced directional drillin
g as a means of
concentrating operations at one site and reducing the footprint on land
of production
operations (Figure 3-16) and the number of platforms offshore.
The t
echnology now
enables access to a reservoir up to several kms from the drill rig,
while technology is
developing to permit even wider range.
This further minimizes the foo
tprint by
reducing the need for satellite wells. It also offers more flexibility in selec
ting a drill site,
particularly where environmental concerns are raised.
Figure 3-16: Directional Drilling
3.2.1.4 Decommissioning and Abandonment
The decommissioning of onshore/ offshore facilities occurs at the end of their c
ommercial
life, typically after 2040 years, i.e. when the reservoir is depleted
or the production of
hydrocarbons from that reservoir becomes unprofitable. It involves removal of b
uildings
and equipment, restoration of the site to environmentally-sound conditio
ns,
implementation of measures to encourage site re-vegetation, and continued monito
ring of
2009
3-24
September
the site after closure. Planning for decommissioning is an integral part o

f the overall
management process and should be considered at the beginning of the devel
opment
during design, and is equally applicable to both onshore and offshore operati
ons.
Parts of the onshore/offshore facilities, such as the aboveground facil
ities/ platforms
located in the oil or gas field area and along the transmission line
s, in case of onshore
facility, are treated to remove hydrocarbons and other chemicals and w
astes or
contaminants and removed.
Other components such as flow lines and pi
pelines/
production components are often left in place/ rendered safe and left
in place to avoid
environmental disturbances associated with removal.
Wells are plugged
and abandoned
to prevent fluid migration within the wellbore or to the surface. The downhole
equipment
is removed and the perforated parts of the wellbore are cleaned of s
oil, scale, and other
debris.
The wellbore is then plugged.
Fluids with an appropriate d
ensity are placed
between the plugs to maintain adequate pressure. During this process, the plugs
are tested
to verify their correct placement and integrity.
Finally, the casing
is cut off below the
surface and capped with a cement plug.
When oil wells are closed, considerable volume of oil still remains i
n place. Chemicals
used during the production of oil are not totally consumed.
The pro
blems with
abandonment of wells are as follows:
Subsurface mitigation of methane and on surface oxidation by air
Production of Hydrogen Sulphide by Sulfate reducers
Subsidence of spent oil fields and consequent earth tremors
Oxidation of light petroleum to form viscous air
By their nature, most exploration wells will be unsuccessful and will be de-comm
issioned
after the initial one-to-three months of activity.
It is, therefore,
prudent to plan for this
from the outset, and ensure minimal environmental disruption.
Decommis
sioning and
rehabilitation will subsequently be simplified.
Table 3-1: Summary of the Exploration and Production Process
Activity Potential requirement on ground
Desk study: identifies area with favorable
geological conditions
None
Aerial survey: if favorable features revealed,
then
Low-flying aircraft over study area
Seismic survey: provides detailed
information on geology
Access to onshore sites and marine resource
areas
Possible onshore extension of marine
seismic lines
Onshore navigational beacons

Onshore seismic lines
Seismic operation camps
Exploratory drilling: verifies the presence or
absence of a hydrocarbon reservoir and
quantifies the reserves
Access for drilling unit and supply units
Storage facilities
Waste disposal facilities
Testing capabilities
Accommodation
Appraisal: determines if the reservoir is
economically feasible to develop
Additional drill sites
Additional access for drilling units and
supply units
2009
3-25
Activity
September
Potential requirement on ground
Additional waste disposal and storage

facilities
Development and production: produces oil
and gas from the reservoir through
formation pressure, artificial lift, and
possibly advanced recovery techniques,
until economically feasible reserves are
depleted
Improved access, storage and waste disposal
facilities
Wellheads
Flow lines
Separation/treatment facilities
Increased oil storage
Facilities to export product
Flares
Gas production plant
Accommodation, infrastructure
Transport equipment
Decommissioning and rehabilitation may
occur for each of above phases.
Equipment to plug wells
Equipment to demolish and remove
installations
Equipment to restore site
Source: Joint E&P Forum / UNEP Technical Publication
3.2.2 Raw material inputs and pollution outputs
The various types of and sources of pollutants generated in this industry are li
sted below:
Table 3-2: List of Pollutants Generated
Liquid Effluents Gaseous Emissions Solid Waste
1. Drilling Stage
Formation Water Test-Flaring (Insignificant) Drill Cuttings

Wash waste from bit
cuttings (mud treatment),
auxiliary waste-sanitary
DG sets Drilling mud
2. Production Stage
Produced water Associated gas Oily sludge
3.2.2.1 Onshore
A. Air emissions
The main sources of continuous or non-continuous air emissions resultin
g from onshore
activities include:
Combustion sources from power and heat generation
Use of compressors, pumps, and reciprocating engines (boilers, turbine
s, and other
engines)
Flaring and venting of hydrocarbons
2009
September
3-26
Fugitive emissions
Principal pollutants from these air emission sources include
Nitrogen oxides
Sulfur oxides
Carbon monoxide and particulates
Additional pollutants
- Hydrogen sulfide (H
2
S)
- Volatile organic compounds (VOC) methane and ethane
- Benzene
- Ethyl benzene
- Toluene, and xylenes (BTEX)
- Glycols
- Polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHS).
Significant amount of toxic gas emissions from the site facilities and
activities shall be
quantified annually in accordance with nationally/internationally recogniz
ed
methodologies and reporting procedures in order to reduce air emissions
.
Also, costeffective options that are technically feasible shall be evaluated for
reducing these
emissions.
Air quality impacts should be estimated by the use of baseline air quality asses
sments and
atmospheric dispersion models to establish potential ground level ambien
t air
concentrations during facility design and operations planning as described in th
e General
EHS Guidelines.
These studies should ensure that no adverse impacts
to human health
and the environment result.
i. Exhaust gases
The most significant sources of exhaust gas emissions from onshore facilities ar
e
Combustion of gas or liquid fuels in turbines, boilers, compressors, pumps and
other
engines for power and heat generation
Water injection
Oil and gas export, etc.
Air emission specifications should be considered during all equipment s
election and
procurement. General EHS emission standards shall be followed for manag
ement of
emission sources.
ii. Venting and flaring
Associated gas brought to the surface with crude oil during oil produ
ction is sometimes
disposed off at onshore facilities by venting or flaring to the atmosphere. Thi
s practice is
now widely recognized to be a waste of a valuable resource, as well
as a significant
source of green house gas (GHG) emissions. However, flaring or venting
are also
important safety measures used on onshore oil and gas facilities to e
nsure gas and other
hydrocarbons are safely disposed in the event of an emergency, power
or equipment
failure, or other plant upset condition.
Measures consistent with the Global Gas Flaring and Venting Reduction
Voluntary
Standard (part of the World Bank Groups Global Gas Flaring Reduction P
ublic-Private
Partnership (GGFR program3) should be adopted when considering flaring
and venting
2009
September
3-27
options for onshore activities.
The standard provides guidance on how
to eliminate or
achieve reductions in the flaring and venting of natural gas.
Continuous venting of associated gas is not considered a good practice
and should be
avoided.
The associated gas stream should be routed to an efficient
flare system,
although continuous flaring of gas should be avoided if feasible alternatives ar
e available.
Before flaring is adopted, feasible alternatives for the use of the gas should b
e evaluated
to the maximum extent possible and integrated into production design.
Alternative options may include gas utilization for on-site energy needs, export
of the gas
to a neighboring facility or to market, gas injection for reservoir p
ressure maintenance,
enhanced recovery using gas lift, or gas for instrumentation.
An ass
essment of
alternatives should be adequately documented and recorded.
If none of
the alternative
options are currently feasible, then measures to minimize flare volumes
should be
evaluated and flaring should be considered as an interim solution, with the elim
ination of
continuous production associated gas flaring as the preferred goal. If flaring
is necessary,
continuous improvement of flaring through implementation of best practic
es and new
technologies should be demonstrated.
The following pollution prevention and control measures should be consi
dered for gas
flaring:
Implementation of source gas reduction measures to the maximum extent possible
Use of efficient flare tips, and optimization of the size and number of burnin
g nozzles
Maximizing flare combustion efficiency by controlling and optimizing flare fue
l / air
stream flow rates to ensure the correct ratio of assist stream to flare stream
Minimizing flaring from purges and pilots, without compromising safety
, through
measures including installation of purge gas reduction devices, flare g
as recovery
units, inert purge gas, soft seat valve technology where appropriate,
and installation
of conservation pilots
Minimizing risk of pilot blow-out by ensuring sufficient exit velocit
y and providing
wind guards
Use of a reliable pilot ignition system
Installation of high-integrity instrument pressure protection systems,
wherever
necessary, to reduce high-pressure events and to avoid or reduce flaring situati
ons
Minimizing liquid carry-over and entrainment in the gas flare stream
with a suitable
liquid separation system
Minimizing flame lift off and / or flame lick
Operating flare to control odor and visible smoke emissions (no visible black
smoke)
Locating flare at a safe distance from local communities and the workforce inc
luding
workforce accommodation units
Implementation of burner maintenance and replacement programs to ensur
e
continuous maximum flare efficiency
Metering flare gas
In event of an emergency or equipment breakdown, or plant upset conditions, exce
ss gas
should not be vented but should be sent to an efficient flare gas s
ystem.
Emergency
venting may be necessary under specific field conditions where flaring of the ga
s stream
2009
September
3-28
is not possible, or where a flare gas system is not available, such
as lack of sufficient
hydrocarbon content in the gas stream to support combustion or lack o

f sufficient gas
pressure to allow it to enter the flare system.
Justification for e
xcluding a gas flaring
system should be fully documented before an emergency gas venting faci
lity is
considered.
To minimize flaring events as a result of equipment breakdowns and pl
ant upsets, plant
reliability should be high (>95%) and provision should be made for eq
uipment sparing
and plant turn down protocols.
Flaring volumes for new facilities should be estimated during the init
ial commissioning
period so that fixed volume flaring targets can be developed. The vol
umes of gas flared
for all flaring events should be recorded and reported.
iii. Fugitive emissions
Fugitive emissions at onshore facilities may be associated with cold vents, leak
ing pipes
and tubing, valves, connections, flanges, packing, open-ended lines, pum
p seals,
compressor seals, pressure relief valves, tanks or open pits / contain
ments, and
hydrocarbon loading and unloading operations.
Methods for controlling and reducing fugitive emissions should be consi
dered and
implemented in the design, operation, and maintenance of facilities. Th
e selection of
appropriate valves, flanges, fittings, seals, and packing should conside
r safety and
suitability requirements as well as their capacity to reduce gas leaks
and fugitive
emissions. Additionally, leak detection and repair programs should be i
mplemented.
Vapor control units should be installed, as needed, for hydrocarbon loading and
unloading
operations.
Use of open vents in tank roofs should be avoided by installing pres
sure relief valves.
Vapor control units should be installed, as needed, for the loading and unloadin
g of ship
tankers.
Vapor processing systems may consist of different units, suc
h as carbon
adsorption, refrigeration, thermal oxidation, and lean oil absorption un
its. Additional
guidance for the prevention and control of fugitive emissions from sto
rage tanks are
provided in the EHS Guidelines for Crude Oil and Petroleum Product Terminals.
iv. Well testing
During well testing, flaring of produced hydrocarbons should be avoided
wherever
practical and possible, and especially near local communities or in en
vironmentally
sensitive areas. Feasible alternatives should be evaluated for the recovery of
hydrocarbon
test fluids, while considering the safety of handling volatile hydrocarbons, for
transfer to a
processing facility or other alternative disposal options.
An evaluati
on of disposal
alternatives for produced hydrocarbons should be adequately documented and recor

ded.
If flaring is the only option available for the disposal of test flu
ids, only the minimum
volume of hydrocarbons required for the test should be flowed and wel
l test durations
should be reduced to the extent practical.
An efficient test flare
burner head equipped
with an appropriate combustion enhancement system should be selected to
minimize
incomplete combustion, black smoke, and hydrocarbon fallout. Volumes of hydroca
rbons
flared should be recorded.
2009
September
3-29
B. Wastewaters
The General EHS Guidelines provide information on wastewater management,
water
conservation and reuse, along with wastewater and water quality monitor
ing programs.
The guidance below is related to additional wastewater streams specific to the o
nshore oil
and gas sector.
i. Produced water
Oil and gas reservoirs contain water (formation water) that is produced when bro
ught to
the surface during hydrocarbon production. The produced water stream can be one
of the
largest waste products, by volume, managed and disposed of by the onsh
ore oil and gas
industry. Produced water contains a complex mixture of inorganic (dissolved sal
ts, trace
metals, suspended particles) and organic (dispersed and dissolved hydrocarbons,
organic
acids) compounds, and in many cases, residual chemical additives (e.g.,
scale and
corrosion inhibitors) that are added into the hydrocarbon production process.
Feasible alternatives for the management and disposal of produced water
should be
evaluated and integrated into production design.
The main disposal al
ternatives may
include injection into the reservoir to enhance oil recovery, and injection into
a dedicated
disposal well drilled to a suitable receiving subsurface geological for
mation.
Other
possible uses such as irrigation, dust control, or use by other industry, may be
appropriate
to consider if the chemical nature of the produced water is compatible with thes
e options.
Produced water discharges to surface waters or to land should be the
last option
considered and only if there is no other option available.
Produced water treatment technologies depend on the final disposal alte
rnative selected
and particular field conditions.
Technologies to consider may include
combinations of
gravity and / or mechanical separation and chemical treatment, and may

require a
multistage system containing a number of technologies in series to mee
t injection or
discharge requirements. Sufficient treatment system backup capability should be
in place
to ensure continual operation and or an alternative disposal method should be av
ailable.
To reduce the volume of produced water for disposal the following should be cons
idered:
Adequate well management during well completion activities to minimize
water
production
Recompletion of high water producing wells to minimize water production
Use of downhole fluid separation techniques, where possible, and wate
r shutoff
techniques, when technically and economically feasible
Shutting in high water producing wells
To minimize environmental hazards related to residual chemical additives in the
produced
water stream where surface disposal methods are used, production chemic
als should be
selected carefully by taking into account their volume, toxicity, bioav
ailability, and
bioaccumulation potential.
Disposal into evaporation ponds may be an option for produced waters. The const
ruction
and management measures for surface storage or disposal pits can also apply to p
roduced
water ponds.
2009
September
3-30
ii. Hydrostatic testing waters
Hydrostatic testing of equipment and pipelines involves pressure testing
with water to
detect leaks and verify equipment and pipeline integrity.
Chemical ad
ditives (corrosion
inhibitors, oxygen scavengers, and dyes) may be added to the water to
prevent internal
corrosion or to identify leaks. For pipeline testing, test manifolds installed
onto sections
of newly constructed pipelines should be located outside the riparian zones and
wetlands.
Water sourcing for hydro-testing purposes should not adversely affect t
he water level or
flow rate of a natural water body, and the test water withdrawal rate (or volum
e) should
not exceed 10% of the stream flow (or volume) of the water source.
Erosion control
measures and fish-screening controls should be implemented as necessary
during water
withdrawals at the intake locations.
The disposal alternatives for test waters following hydro testing inclu
de injection into a
disposal well, if available or discharge to surface waters or land su
rface.
If a disposal
well is unavailable and discharge to surface waters or land surface i
s necessary, the
following pollution prevention and control measures should be considered:
Reduce the need for chemicals by minimizing the time that test water remains i
n the
equipment or pipeline;
If chemical use is necessary, carefully select chemical additives in
terms of dose
concentration, toxicity, biodegradability, bioavailability, and bioaccumula
tion
potential;
Conduct toxicity testing as necessary using recognized test methodologies. A h
olding
pond may be necessary to provide time for the toxicity of the water to decrease.
Holding ponds should meet the standards for surface storage or dispo
sal pits as
discussed below;
Use the same hydro test water for multiple tests
Hydrostatic test water quality should be monitored before use and di
scharge and
should be treated to meet the discharge limits.
If significant quantities of chemically treated hydrostatic test waters are re
quired to be
discharged to a surface water body, water receptors both upstream and downstream
of
the discharge should be monitored.
Post-discharge chemical analysis of
receiving
water bodies may be necessary to demonstrate that no degradation of e
nvironmental
quality has occurred
If discharged into water, the volume and composition of the test water, as wel
l as the
stream flow or volume of the receiving water body, should be considered in selec
ting
an appropriate discharge site to ensure that water quality will not b
e adversely
affected outside of the defined mixing zone
Use break tanks or energy dissipators (e.g., protective riprap, sheeting, tarp
aulins) for
the discharge flow
Use sediment control methods (e.g., silt fences, sandbags or hay bal
es) to protect
aquatic biota, water quality, and water users from the potential effec
t of discharge,
such as increased sedimentation and reduced water quality
If discharged to land, the discharge site should be selected to pre
vent flooding,
erosion, or lowered agriculture capability of the receiving land. Direc
t discharge on
cultivated land and land immediately upstream of community / public wa
ter intakes
should be avoided
2009
3-31
September
Water discharge during cleaning pig runs and pretest water should be
collected in
holding tanks and should be discharged only after water-quality testing to ensur
e that
it meets discharge criteria.
iii. Cooling water
Water conservation opportunities provided in the General EHS Guidelines
should be
considered for oil and gas facility cooling and heating systems. If cooling wat
er is used,
it should be discharged to surface waters in a location that allows maximum mi
xing and
cooling of the thermal plume to ensure that the temperature is within
3
o
Celsius (
o
C) of
ambient temperature at the edge of the defined mixing zone or within
100 m of the
discharge point.
If biocides and / or other chemical additives are
used in the cooling
water system, consideration should be given to residual effects at dis
charge using
techniques such as risk based assessment.
iv. Other wastewaters
Wastewaters routinely generated at onshore oil and gas facilities inclu
de sewage waters,
drainage waters, tank bottom water, fire water; equipment and vehicle
wash waters,
general oily water and non-process industrial wastewater like engine coolant and
unused
cement slurry. These wastewaters range from ones containing practically no cont
aminant
(snowmelt, for example) to waters like cement slurries which clearly r
equire treatment
before they can be discharged or recycled.
Pollution prevention and treatment measures that should be considered f
or such
wastewater should include:
Sewage: Gray and black water from showers, toilets and kitchen facili
ties should be
treated as described in the General EHS Guidelines.
Drainage and stormwater: Separate drainage systems for drainage water from pro
cess
areas that could be contaminated with oil (closed drains) and drainage
water from
non-process areas (open drains) should be available to the extent prac
tical.
All
process areas should be bunded to ensure drainage water flows into th
e closed
drainage system and that uncontrolled contaminated surface run-off is a
voided.
Drainage tanks and slop tanks should be designed with sufficient capac
ity for
foreseeable operating conditions, and systems to prevent overfilling sho
uld be
installed.
Drip trays, or other controls, should be used to collect
run-off from
equipment that is not contained within a bunded area and the contents
routed to the
closed drainage system. Stormwater flow channels and collection ponds installed
as
part of the open drainage system should be fitted with oil / water
separators.
Separators may include baffle type or solid particle escaping plate type and sho
uld be
regularly maintained.
Stormwater runoff should be treated through oil
/ water
separation system able to achieve an oil and grease concentration of 10 milligra
m per
litre (mg/L).
Additional guidance on the management of stormwater is
provided in
the General EHS Guideline.
Tank bottom waters: The accumulation of tank bottom water should be minimized
by
regular maintenance of tank roofs and seals to prevent rainwater infil
tration.
Consideration should be given to routing these waters to the produced
water stream
for treatment and disposal, if available.
Alternatively they should b
e treated as a
hazardous waste and disposed in accordance with the facility waste management pl
an.
Tank bottom sludges should also be periodically removed and recycled o
r disposed
off as a hazardous waste.
2009
September
3-32
Firewater: Firewater from test releases should be directed to the fa
cility drainage
system.
Wash water: Equipment and vehicle wash waters should be directed to
the closed
drainage system.
General oily water: Oily water from drip trays and liquid slugs fro
m process
equipment and pipelines should be routed to the closed drainage system.
C. Waste management
Typical non-hazardous and hazardous wastes routinely generated at onshor
e facilities
other than permitted effluents and emissions include general office and packagin
g wastes,
waste oils, paraffins, waxes, oil contaminated rags, hydraulic fluids, used batt
eries, empty
paint cans, waste chemicals and used chemical containers, used filters, fluoresc
ent tubes,
scrap metals, and medical waste, among others.
Waste materials should be segregated into non-hazardous and hazardous w
astes for
consideration for re-use, recycling, or disposal.
Waste management pla
nning should
establish a clear strategy for wastes that will be generated including
options for waste
elimination, reduction or recycling or treatment and disposal, before a
ny wastes are
generated. A waste management plan documenting the waste strategy, storage (inc
luding
facilities and locations) and handling procedures should be developed and should
include
a clear waste tracking mechanism to track waste consignments from the
originating
location to the final waste treatment and disposal location.
Guidance
for waste
management of these typical waste streams is provided in the General EHS Guideli
nes.
Significant additional waste stream specific to onshore oil and gas development
activities
may include:
Drilling fluids and drilled cuttings
Produced sand
Completion and well work-over fluids
Naturally occurring radioactive materials (NORM)
i. Drilling fluids and drilled cuttings
The major source of pollution in the drilling system is the drilling mud and cut
tings from
the bit.
Drill mud: Drill mud (also called cutting mud) is a complex colloidal mixture
of water,
bentonitic clays, chemical additives, and trace amounts of oil from cu
ttings of the
hydrocarbon-bearing zones. This mud serves several purposes in oil dril
ling as it is
circulated down the inside of the rotating drill from the surface and
backup the annular
space between the drill pipe and the drilled hole.
At the drill bi
t/rock interface, it cools
and lubricates the cutting action.
As it flows up the annular space
, it lifts rock chips
which can then be screened out at the surface.
Most important, the
column of mud
creates hydrostatic pressure which keeps pressurized oil or gas from b
eing expelled
uncontrollably (a blowout).
Much of this drill mud is recycled, but after repeated use it picks
up fine rock particles
and water soluble subsurface minerals until it is no longer economical
ly practical to
recondition it.
The colloidal mass can then be separated from the w
ater either by
centrifugal processes or by simply allowing it to settle in a pit.
The remaining fluid is
2009
September
3-33
then disposed off by deep injection. Much progress has been made in the last de
cade in
the employment of low toxicity mud additives, which has enabled the E
PA to issue
NPDES permits for offshore discharges of treated mud and cuttings.
Drill cuttings: Drill cuttings are the pieces of rock and soil removed from the
ground as a
drill bit cuts a hole for a well.
The volume of rock cuttings pro
duced from drilling is
primarily a function of the depth of the well and the diameter of the wellbore.
It has been
estimated that between 0.2 barrels and 2.0 barrels (8.4 and 84.0 gallons) of to
tal drilling
waste is produced for each vertical foot drilled (EPA, 1987).
Drilling operations also produce air emissions, such as exhaust from d
iesel engines and
turbines that power the drilling equipment. The air pollutants from these devic
es will be
those traditionally associated with combustion sources, including nitroge
n oxides,
particulates, ozone, and CO.
Additionally, hydrogen sulfide may be re
leased during the
drilling process (EPA, 1992).
Some steps in the well completion process may produce waste.
The mo
st prominent is
stimulation.
Unused hydrochloric acid must be neutralized if acid sti
mulation is being
used, and paraffins and any other dissolved materials brought to the
surface from the
formation must also be disposed.
In addition, solid wastes such as
waste cement and
metal casing may remain from the casing process.
The primary functions of drilling fluids used in oil and gas field d
rilling operations
include removal of drilled cuttings (rock chippings) from the wellbore
and control of
formation pressures.
Other important functions include sealing permeabl
e formations,
maintaining wellbore stability, cooling and lubricating the drill bit,
and transmitting
hydraulic energy to the drilling tools and bit. Drilled cuttings removed from t
he wellbore
and spent drilling fluids are typically the largest waste streams gene
rated during oil and
gas drilling activities.
Numerous drilling fluid systems are available
, but they can
generally be categorized into one of two fluid systems:
Water-Based Drilling Fluids (WBDF): The continuous phase and suspendin
g
medium for solids (or liquid) is water or a water miscible fluid.
There are many
WBDF variations, including gel, salt-polymer, salt-glycol, and salt-silicate flu
ids;
Non-Aqueous Drilling Fluids (NADF): The continuous phase and suspendin
g
medium for solids (or liquid) is a water immiscible fluid that is oi
l-based, enhanced
mineral oil-based, or synthetic-based.
Diesel-based fluids are also available, but the use of systems that c
ontain diesel as the
principal component of the liquid phase is not considered current good practice.
arium sulfate) for
ntain a number of

Drilling fluids are circulated downhole and routed to solids control system at t
he surface
facilities where fluids can be separated from the cuttings so that they may be r
ecirculated
downhole leaving the cuttings behind for disposal. These cuttings contain a pro
portion of
residual drilling fluid. The volume of cuttings produced will depend on the dep
th of the
well and the diameter of the hole sections drilled. The drilling fluid is repla
ced when its
rheological properties or density of the fluid can no longer be maintained or at
the end of
the drilling program. These spent fluids are then contained for reuse or dispos
al (NADFs
are typically reused).
2009
September
3-34
Feasible alternatives for the treatment and disposal of drilling fluids
and drilled cuttings
should be evaluated and included in the planning for the drilling pro
gram. Alternative
options may include one, or a combination of, the following:
Injection of the fluid and a mixture of cuttings into a dedicated disposal wel
l
Injection into the annular space of a well
Storage in dedicated storage tanks or lined pits prior to treatment, recycling
, and / or
final treatment and disposal
On-site or off-site biological or physical treatment to render the f
luid and cuttings
non-hazardous prior to final disposal using established methods such as
thermal
desorption in an internal thermal desorption unit to remove NADF for
reuse,
bioremediation, land farming, or solidification with cement and / or c
oncrete.
Final
disposal routes for the non-hazardous cuttings solid material should be
established,
and may include use in road construction material, construction fill,
or disposal
through landfill including landfill cover and capping material where ap
propriate.
In
case of land farming it should be demonstrated that sub-soil chemical, biologica
l, and
physical properties are preserved and water resources are protected;
Recycling of spent fluids back to the vendors for treatment and re-use.
Consider minimizing volumes of drilling fluids and drilled cuttings requiring
disposal
by:
- Use of high-efficiency solids control equipment to reduce the need
for fluid
change out and minimizing the amount of residual fluid on drilled cuttings;
- Use of slim-hole multilateral wells and coiled tubing drilling techn
iques, when
feasible, to reduce the amount of fluids and cuttings generated.
Pollution prevention and control measures for spent drilling fluids and drille
d cuttings
should include:
Minimizing environmental hazards related to residual chemicals additive
s on
discharged cuttings by careful selection of the fluid system.
Careful selection of fluid additives taking into account the technica
l requirements,
chemical additive concentration, toxicity, bioavailability and bioaccumula
tion
potential;
Monitoring and minimizing the concentration of heavy metal impurities
(mainly
mercury and cadmium) in barite stock used in the fluid formulation.
The construction and management measures for surface storage or dispo
sal pits
should be applied to cuttings and drilling fluid pits.
For drilling
pits, pit closure
should be completed as soon as practical, but no longer than 12 months, after th
e end
of operations. If the drilling waste is to be buried in the pit following operat
ions (the
Mix-Bury-Cover disposal method), the following minimum conditions should be met:
The pit contents should be dried out as far as possible
If necessary, the waste should be mixed with an appropriate quantity
of subsoil
(typically three parts of subsoil to one part of waste by volume)
A minimum of one meter of clean subsoil should be placed over the mix
Top soil should not be used but it should be placed over the sub-soil to fully
reinstate
the area.
2009
September
3-35
The pit waste should be analyzed and the maximum lifetime loads sho
uld be
calculated.
A risk-based assessment may be necessary to demonstrate t
hat
internationally recognized thresholds for chemical exposure are not exceeded
ii. Produced sand
Produced sand originating from the reservoir is separated from the for
mation fluids
during hydrocarbon processing.
The produced sand can be contaminated
with
hydrocarbons, but the oil content can vary substantially depending on location,
depth, and
reservoir characteristics. Well completion should aim to reduce the production
of sand at
source using effective downhole sand control measures.
Produced sand should be treated as an oily waste, and may be treated
and disposed of
along with other oil contaminated solid materials (e.g., with cuttings
generated when
NADFs are used or with tank bottom sludges).
If water is used to remove oil from produced sand, it should be recovered and ro
uted to an
appropriate treatment and disposal system (e.g., the produced water tre
atment system
when available).
iii. Completion of well work-over fluids
Completion and well work-over fluids (including intervention and service
fluids) can
typically include weighted brines, acids, methanol and glycols, and oth
er chemical
systems.
These fluids are used to clean the wellbore and stimulate
the flow of
hydrocarbons, or simply used to maintain downhole pressure. Once used these flu
ids may
contain contaminants including solid material, oil, and chemical additiv
es.
Chemical
systems should be selected with consideration of their volume, toxicity
, bioavailability,
and bioaccumulation potential. Feasible disposal options should be evalu
ated for these
fluids. Alternative disposal options may include one, or a combination of, the
following:
Collection of fluids if handled in closed systems and shipping to the original
vendors
for recycling
Injection to a dedicated disposal well, where available
Inclusion as part of the produced water waste stream for treatment
and disposal.
Spent acids should be neutralized before treatment and disposal
On-site or off-site biological or physical treatment at an approved
facility in
accordance with the waste management plan.
iv. Naturally occurring radioactive materials (NORM)
Depending on the field reservoir characteristics, NORMs may precipitate
as scale or
sludges in process piping and production vessels. Where NORM is presen
t, a NORM
management program should also be developed so that appropriate handlin
g procedures
are followed. If removal of NORM is required for occupational health reasons, d
isposal
options may include:
canister disposal during well abandonment;
deep well or salt cavern injection;
injection into the annular space of a well or disposal to landfill in sealed c
ontainers.
Sludge, scale, or NORM-impacted equipment should be treated, processed, or isola
ted so
that potential future human exposures to the treated waste would be within inter
nationally
2009
September
3-36
accepted risk-based limits.
Recognized industrial practices should be
used for disposal.
If waste is sent to an external facility for disposal, the facility must be lice
nsed to receive
such waste.
v. Hazardous materials
General guidance for the management of hazardous materials is provided

in the General
EHS Guidelines.
The following additional principles should be followed
for chemicals
used in the onshore oil and gas sector:
Use chemical hazard assessment and risk management techniques to eval
uate
chemicals and their effects. Selected chemicals should have been tested
for
environmental hazards;
Select chemicals with least hazard and lowest potential environmental and / or
health
impact, whenever possible;
Use of Ozone Depleting Substances should be avoided.
D. Noise
Oil and gas development activities can generate noise during all phase
s of development
including the seismic surveys, construction activities, drilling and pro
duction, aerial
surveys and air or road transportation. During operations, the main sources of
noise and
vibration pollution are likely to emanate from flaring and rotating eq
uipment.
Noise
sources include flares, vents, pumps, compressors, generators, and heate
rs.
Noise
prevention and control measures are described in the General EHS Guidelines, alo
ng with
the recommended daytime and night time noise level guidelines for urba
n or rural
communities.
Noise impacts should be estimated by the use of baseline noise assess
ments for
developments close to local human populations.
For significant noise
sources, such as
flare stacks at permanent processing facilities, noise dispersion models
should be
conducted to establish the noise level guidelines can be met and to assist in th
e design of
facility siting, stack heights, engineered sound barriers, and sound insulation
on buildings.
Field-related vehicle traffic should be reduced as far as possible and access th
rough local
communities should be avoided when not necessary. Flight access routes and low
flight
altitudes should be selected and scheduled to reduce noise impacts without compr
omising
aircraft and security.
The sound and vibration propagation arising fr
om seismic
operations may result in impacts to human populations or to wildlife. In planni
ng seismic
surveys, the following should be considered to minimize impacts:
Minimize seismic activities in the vicinity of local population wherever possi
ble
Minimize simultaneous operations on closely spaced survey lines
Use the lowest practicable vibrator power levels
Reduce operation times, to the extent practical
When shot-hole methods are employed, charge size and hole depth shou
ld be
appropriately selected to reduce noise levels.
Proper back-fill or pl
ugging of holes
will also help to reduce noise dispersion;

Identify areas and time periods sensitive to wildlife such as feedin
g and breeding
locations and seasons and avoid them when possible;
2009
September
3-37
If sensitive wildlife species are located in the area, monitor their presence
before the
onset of noise creating activities, and throughout the seismic program. In area
s where
significant impacts to sensitive species are anticipated, experienced wildlife o
bservers
should be used. Slowly buildup activities in sensitive locations.
E. Terrestrial impacts and project footprint
Project footprints resulting from exploration and construction activities
may include
seismic tracks, well pads, temporary facilities, such as workforce base
camps, material
(pipe) storage yards, workshops, access roads, airstrips and helipads,
equipment staging
areas, and construction material extraction sites (including borrow pits and qua
rries).
Operational footprints may include well pads, permanent processing treat
ment,
transmission and storage facilities, pipeline right-of-way corridors, access roa
ds, ancillary
facilities, communication facilities (e.g., antennas), and power generati
on and
transmission lines. Impacts may include loss of or damage to, terrestrial habit
at, creation
of barriers to wildlife movement, soil erosion, and disturbance to water bodies
including
possible sedimentation, the establishment of non-native invasive plant species a
nd visual
disturbance.
The extent of the disturbance will depend on the activi
ty along with the
location and characteristics of the existing vegetation, topographic fea
tures and
waterways.
The visual impact of permanent facilities should be considered in design so that
impacts
on the existing landscape are minimized. The design should take advantage of the
existing
topography and vegetation, and should use low profile facilities and s
torage tanks if
technically feasible and if the overall facility footprint is not sign
ificantly increased.
In
addition, consider suitable paint color for large structures that can
blend with the
background.
General guidance on minimizing the project footprint durin
g construction
and decommissioning activities is provided in the General EHS Guidelines.
Additional prevention and control measures to minimize the footprint of onshore
oil and
gas developments may include the following:
Establish all facilities in locations that avoid critical terrestrial and aqua
tic habitat and

plan construction activities to avoid sensitive times of the year;
Minimize land requirements for aboveground permanent facilities;
Minimize areas to be cleared. Use hand cutting where possible, avoid
ing the use of
heavy equipment such as bulldozers, especially on steep slopes, water
and wetland
crossings, and forested and ecologically sensitive areas;
Use a central processing / treatment facility for operations, when practical;
Minimize well pad size for drilling activities and satellite / clust
er, directional,
extended reach drilling techniques should be considered, and their use maximized
in
sensitive locations;
Avoid construction of facilities in a floodplain, whenever practical,
and within a
distance of 100 m of the normal high-water mark of a water body or a water well
used
for drinking or domestic purposes;
Consider the use of existing utility and transport corridors for acc
ess roads and
pipeline corridors to the extent possible;
Consider the routing of access roads to avoid induced impacts such
as increased
access for poaching;
2009
September
3-38
Minimize the width of a pipeline ROW or access road during construc
tion and
operations as far as possible;
Limit the amount of pipeline trench left open during construction at
any one time.
Safety fences and other methods to prevent people or animals from falling into o
pen
trenches should be constructed in sensitive locations and within 500 m
of human
populations. In remote areas, install wildlife escape ramps from open
trenches
(typically every 1km where wildlife is present);
Consider use of animal crossing structures such as bridges, culverts,
and over
crossings, along pipeline and access road rights-of-way;
Bury pipelines along the entire length to a minimum of 1 m to the
top-of-pipe,
wherever this is possible;
Carefully consider all of the feasible options for the construction
of pipeline river
crossings including horizontal directional drilling;
Clean-up and fully reinstate following construction activities (includi
ng appropriate
revegetation using native plant species following construction activities) the p
ipeline
right-of-way and temporary sites such as workforce accommodation camps,
storage
yards, access roads, helipads and construction workshops, to the pre-ex
isting
topography and drainage contours;

Reinstate off-site aggregate extraction facilities including borrow pit
s and quarries
(opened specifically for construction or extensively used for construction);
Implement repair and maintenance programs for reinstated sites;
Consider the implementation of low impact seismic techniques (e.g. minimize se
ismic
line widths (typically no wider than 5 m), limit the line of sight along new cut
lines in
forested areas (approximately 350 m));
Consider shot-hole methods in place of vibroseis where preservation o
f vegetation
cover is required and when access is limited. In areas of low cover
(e.g. deserts, or
tundra with snow cover in place), vibroseis machinery should be select
ed, but soft
soil locations should be carefully assessed to prevent excessive compaction;
Install temporary and permanent erosion and sediment control measures,
slope
stabilization measures, and subsidence control and minimization measures
at all
facilities, as necessary;
Regularly maintain vegetation growth along access roads and at perman
ent above
ground facilities, and avoid introduction of invasive plant species.
In controlling
vegetation use biological, mechanical and thermal vegetation control mea
sures and
avoid the use of chemical herbicides as much as possible.
If it is
demonstrated that
the use of herbicides is required to control vegetation growth along access road
s or at
facilities, then personnel must be trained in their use.
Herbicides
that should be
avoided include those listed under the World Health Organization recomm
ended
Classification of Pesticides by Hazard Classes 1a and 1b, the World H
ealth
Organization recommended Classification of Pesticides by Hazard Class II
(except
under conditions as noted in IFC Performance Standard 3: Pollution Pre
vention and
Abatement;7), and Annexes A and B of the Stockholm Convention, except under the
conditions noted in the convention.8
F. Spills
Spills from onshore facilities, including pipelines, can occur due to
leaks, equipment
failure, accidents, and human error or as a result of third party in
terference.
Guidelines
2009
September
3-39
for release prevention and control planning are provided in the General EHS Guid
elines,
including the requirement to develop a spill prevention and control plan.
Additional spill prevention and control measures specific to onshore oil and gas
facilities
include:
Conduct a spill risk assessment for the facilities and design, drill
ing, process, and
utility systems to reduce the risk of major uncontained spills;
Ensure adequate corrosion allowance for the lifetime of the facilities or inst
allation of
corrosion control and prevention systems in all pipelines, process equi
pment, and
tanks;
Install secondary containment around vessels and tanks to contain accidental r
eleases;
Install shutdown valves to allow early shutdown or isolation in the event of a
spill;
Develop automatic shutdown actions through an emergency shutdown syste
m for
significant spill scenarios so that the facility may be rapidly brough
t into a safe
condition;
Install leak detection systems. On pipelines consider measures such a
s telemetry
systems, Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition (SCADA9), pressure sen
sors,
shut-in valves, and pump-off systems,
Develop corrosion maintenance and monitoring programs to ensure the integrity
of all
field equipment. For pipelines, maintenance programs should include regular pigg
ing
to clean the pipeline, and intelligent pigging should be considered as required;
Ensure adequate personnel training in oil spill prevention, containment, and r
esponse;
Ensure spill response and containment equipment is deployed or availa
ble for a
response.
All spills should be documented and reported.
Following a spill, a
root cause
investigation should be carried out and corrective actions should be undertaken
to prevent
reoccurrence. A Spill Response Plan should be prepared, and the capability to i
mplement
the plan should be in place.
The Spill Response Plan should address
potential oil,
chemical, and fuel spills from facilities, transport vehicles, loading
and unloading
operations, and pipeline ruptures. The plan should include:
A description of the operations, site conditions, logistic support and oil pro
perties
Identification of persons responsible for managing spill response effo
rts, including
their authority, roles and contact details
Documentation of cooperative measures with government agencies as appropriate
Spill risk assessment, defining expected frequency and size of spills
from different
potential release sources
Oil spill trajectory in potentially affected surface water bodies, wi
th oil fate and
environmental impact prediction for a number of credible most-probable
spill
simulations (including a worst case scenario, such as blowout from an oil well)
using
an adequate and internationally recognized computer model

Clear demarcation of spill severity, according to the size of the s
pill using a clearly
defined Tier I, Tier II and Tier III approach
Strategies and equipment for managing Tier I spills at a minimum
2009
September
3-40
Arrangements and procedures to mobilize external resources for responding to l
arger
spills and strategies for deployment
Full list, description, location, and use of on-site and off-site response equ
ipment and
the response time estimates for deploying equipment
Sensitivity mapping of the environment at risk. Information should in
clude: soil
types; groundwater and surface water resources; sensitive ecological and
protected
areas; agricultural land; residential, industrial, recreational, cultural,
and landscape
features of significance; seasonal aspects for relevant features, and o
il spill response
types to be deployed
Identification of response priorities, with input from potentially affected or
concerned
parties
Clean up strategies and handling instructions for recovered oil, chem
icals, fuels or
other recovered contaminated materials, including their transportation, t
emporary
storage, and treatment / disposal
3.2.2.2 Offshore
A. Air emissions
The main sources of air emissions (continuous or non-continuous) resulting from
offshore
activities include: combustion sources from power and heat generation,
and the use of
compressors, pumps, and reciprocating engines (boilers, turbines, and ot
her engines);
emissions resulting from flaring and venting of hydrocarbons; and fugitive emiss
ions.
Principal pollutants from these sources include NOx, SOx, CO
2
, CO, and particulates.
Additional pollutants can include: hydrogen sulfide (H
2
S); volatile organic compounds
(VOC) methane and ethane; benzene, ethyl benzene, toluene, and xylenes
(BTEX);
glycols; and polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons (PAHs).
i. Exhaust gases
Exhaust gas emissions produced by the combustion of gas or liquid fue
ls in turbines,
boilers, compressors, pumps and other engines for power and heat gener
ation, or for
water injection or oil and gas export, can be the most significant source of air
emissions
from offshore facilities.

ii. Venting and flaring
Associated gas brought to the surface with crude oil during oil produ
ction is sometimes
disposed off at onshore/ offshore facilities by venting or flaring to the atmosp
here. This
practice is now widely recognized to be a waste of a valuable resour
ce, as well as a
significant source of GHG emissions.
All efforts should be made to
keep flaring to the
minimum and only for technical reasons ad safety. Flares are also a problem in t
erms of
aesthetics.
iii. Fugitive emissions
Fugitive emissions at onshore facilities may be associated with cold vents, leak
ing pipes
and tubing, valves, connections, flanges, packings, open-ended lines, pu
mp seals,
compressor seals, pressure relief valves, tanks or open pits / contain
ments, and
hydrocarbon loading and unloading operations.
2009
September
3-41
iv. Well testing
During well testing, flaring of produced hydrocarbons should be avoided
wherever
practical and possible, and especially near local communities or in en
vironmentally
sensitive areas. Feasible alternatives should be evaluated for the recovery of
hydrocarbon
test fluids, while considering the safety of handling volatile hydrocarbons, for
transfer to a
processing facility or other alternative disposal options.
An evaluati
on of disposal
alternatives for produced hydrocarbons should be adequately documented and recor
ded.
If flaring is the only option available for the disposal of test flu
ids, only the minimum
volume of hydrocarbons required for the test should be flowed and wel
l test durations
should be reduced to the extent practical.
An efficient test flare
burner head equipped
with an appropriate combustion enhancement system should be selected to
minimize
incomplete combustion, black smoke, and hydrocarbon fallout. Volumes of hydrocar
bons
flared should be recorded.
B. Wastewaters
i. Produced water
Produced water, water produced in association with crude oil, is by far the larg
est waste
stream in most oil fields, accounting for up to 95 percent of total wastes. It
is composed
of a complex mixture of inorganic (dissolved salts, trace metals, suspended part
icles) and
organic (dispersed and dissolved hydrocarbons, organic acids) compounds,
and in many
cases, residual chemical additives (e.g. scale and corrosion inhibitors) that ar
e added into
the hydrocarbon production process.
In wells nearing the end of their productive lives, water can comprise 98%of the
material
brought to the surface (Wiedeman, 1996).
The American Petroleum Insti
tute estimates
that over 15 billion barrels of water are produced annually. This is nearly eigh
t barrels of
water for every barrel of oil produced.
Natural gas wells typically
produce much lower
volumes of water than oil wells, with the exception of certain types of gas reso
urces such
as Coal Bed Methane (CBM) or Devonian/Antrim shales (API, 1997).
Although many petroleum components are separated from the water easily,
some
components and impurities are water-soluble and difficult to remove.
Some substances
may be found in high concentrations, including chloride, sodium, calciu
m, magnesium
and potassium. Others found are:
Organic compounds: benzene, naphthalene, toluene, phenanthrene,
bromodichloromethane, and pentachlorophenol;
Inorganics: lead, arsenic, barium, antimony, sulfur, and zinc;
Radionuclides: uranium, radon, and radium (EPA, 1992).
It should be noted that concentrations of these pollutants vary considerably dep
ending on
the location of the well and the extent of treatment of the water. Geography can
be a key
factor in whether a substance may exist in produced water. For example, radionuc
lides are
found only in some areas of the country.
ii. Hydrostatic testing waters
Hydrostatic testing of offshore equipment and marine pipelines involves pressure
testing
with water (typically filtered seawater, unless equipment specifications do not
allow it) to
2009
September
3-42
verify equipment and pipeline integrity. Chemical additives (corrosion inhibito
rs, oxygen
scavengers, and dyes) may be added to the water to prevent internal
corrosion or to
identify leaks.
In managing hydrotest waters, the following pollution
prevention and
control measures should be considered:
Minimizing the volume of hydrotest water offshore by testing equipmen
t at an
onshore site before the equipment is loaded onto the offshore facilities;
Using the same water for multiple tests
Reducing the need for chemicals by minimizing the time that test water remains
in the
equipment or pipeline
Careful selection of chemical additives in terms of dose concentratio
n, toxicity,
biodegradability, bioavailability, and bioaccumulation potential

Sending offshore pipeline hydrotest water to shore facilities for tre
atment and
disposal, where practical.
If discharge of hydrotest waters to the sea is the only feasible alt
ernative for disposal, a
hydrotest water disposal plan should be prepared that considers points
of discharge, rate
of discharge, chemical use and dispersion, environmental risk, and monitoring.
Hydrotest
water disposal into shallow coastal waters should be avoided.
iii. Cooling waters
Anti-foulant chemical dosing to prevent marine fouling of offshore facility cool
ing water
systems should be carefully considered.
Available alternatives should b
e evaluated and,
where practical, the seawater intake depth should be optimized to reduce the nee
d for use
of chemicals.
Appropriate screens should be fitted to the seawater i
ntake if safe and
practical. The cooling water discharge depth should be selected to maximize mix
ing and
cooling of the thermal plume to ensure that the temperature is within
3
o
C of ambient
seawater temperature at the edge of the defined mixing zone or within
100 m of the
discharge point.
iv. Desalination brine
Operators should consider mixing desalination brine from the potable water syste
m with
the cooling water or sewage water discharge.
If mixing with other d
ischarge waste
streams is not feasible, the discharge location should be carefully selected w.r
.t. potential
environmental impacts.
v. Other wastewater
Wastewater routinely generated at offshore facilities is listed below:
Sewage: Gray and black water from showers, toilets, and kitchen facilities
Food waste: Organic (food) waste from the kitchen
Storage displacement Water: Water pumped in and out of storage during loading
and
off-loading operations
Bilge water: Bilge water from machinery spaces in offshore facilities
and support
vessels
Deck drainage water: Drainage water generated from precipitation, sea
spray, or
routine operations, such as deck and equipment cleaning and fire drills,
2009
September
3-43
C. Waste management
Typical non-hazardous and hazardous wastes routinely generated at offsho
re facilities
include general office and packaging waste, waste oils, oil contaminate
d rags, hydraulic
fluids, used batteries, empty paint cans, waste chemicals and used che
mical containers,
used filters, fluorescent tubes, scrap metals, and medical waste, etc.
These waste
materials should be segregated offshore into non-hazardous and hazardous
wastes at a
minimum, and shipped to shore for re-use, recycling, or disposal. A waste mana
gement
plan for the offshore facility should be developed that contains a cl
ear waste tracking
mechanism to track waste consignments from the originating location offshore to
the final
waste treatment
and disposal location onshore.
Efforts should be ma
de to eliminate,
reduce, or recycle wastes at all times.
Guidance for waste managemen
t of these typical
waste streams onshore is provided in the General EHS Guidelines. Significant ad
ditional
waste streams specific to offshore development activities include:
Drilling fluids and drilled cuttings
Produced sand
Completion and well work-over fluids
NORM
i. Drilling fluids and drilled cuttings
The primary functions of drilling fluids used in oil and gas field d
rilling operations
include removal of drilled cuttings (rock chippings) from the wellbore
and control of
formation pressures.
Other important functions include sealing permeabl
e formations,
maintaining wellbore stability, cooling and lubricating the drill bit,
and transmitting
hydraulic energy to the drilling tools and bit. Drilled cuttings removed from t
he wellbore
and spent drilling fluids are typically the largest waste streams gene
rated during oil and
gas drilling activities.
Various drilling fluids are available, but they can generally be categorized int
o one of two
fluid systems:
WBDF: Fluids where the continuous phase and suspending medium for so
lids is
seawater or a water miscible fluid. There are many WBDF variations, including ge
l ,
salt-polymer , salt-glycol and salt-silicate fluids;
NADF: The continuous phase and suspending medium for solids is a wa
ter
immiscible fluid that is oil-based, enhanced mineral oil-based, or synthetic-bas
ed.
Diesel-based fluids are also available, but the use of systems that c
ontain diesel as the
principal component of the liquid phase is not considered current good
practice for
offshore drilling programs and should be avoided.
arium sulfate) for
ntain a number of

Drilling fluids are either circulated downhole with direct loss to the
seabed along with
displaced cuttings, particularly while drilling well sections nearest to
the surface of the
seabed, or are recirculated to the offshore facility where they are routed to a
solids control
system. In the solids control system, the drilling fluids are separated from th
e cuttings so
that they may be recirculated downhole leaving the cuttings behind for
disposal.
These
cuttings contain a proportion of residual drilling fluid. The volume of cutting
s produced
depends on the depth of the well and the diameter of the hole sections drilled.
2009
September
3-44
The drilling fluid is replaced when its rheological properties or density of the
fluid can no
longer be maintained or at the end of the drilling program.
These
spent fluids are then
contained for reuse or disposal. Disposal of spent NADF by discharge to the sea
must be
avoided.
Instead, they should be transferred to shore for recycling
or treatment and
disposal.
Feasible alternatives for the disposal of spent WBDF and drilled cutti
ngs from well
sections drilled with either WBDF or NADF should be evaluated.
Optio
ns include
injection into a dedicated disposal well offshore, injection into the
annular space of a
well, containment and transfer to shore for treatment and disposal and
, when there is no
other option available, discharge to sea.
When discharge to sea is the only alternative, a drilled cuttings and
fluid disposal plan
should be prepared taking into account cuttings and fluid dispersion,
chemical use,
environmental risk, and necessary monitoring.
Discharge of cuttings to
sea from wells
drilled with NADF should be avoided.
If discharge is necessary, cutt
ings should be
treated before discharge. Guidance for the treatment and disposal of f
luids and cuttings
shipped to shore are provided in the EHS Guidelines for Onshore Oil
and Gas
Development.
Pollution prevention and control measures to consider prior to the dis
charge of spent
drilling fluids and drilled cuttings should include:
Minimizing environmental hazards related to residual chemicals additive
s on
discharged cuttings by careful selection of the fluid system. WBDFs sh
ould be
selected whenever appropriate
Careful selection of fluid additives taking into account their concen
tration, toxicity,
bioavailability and bioaccumulation potential
Use of high efficiency solids control equipment to reduce the need
for fluid change
out and minimizing the amount of residual fluid on drilled cuttings
Use directional drilling (horizontal and extended reach) techniques to avoid s
ensitive
surface areas and to gain access to the reservoir from less sensitive surface ar
eas
Use of slim-hole multilateral wells and coiled tubing drilling techni
ques, when
feasible, to reduce the amount of fluids and cuttings
Drilling fluids to be discharged to sea (including as residual material on drill
ed cuttings)
are subject to tests for toxicity, barite contamination, and oil conte
nt. All discharges
should be made via a caisson at least 15 m below the sea surface.
ii. Produced sand
Produced sand originating from the reservoir is separated from the for
mation fluids
during hydrocarbon processing.
The produced sand can be contaminated
with
hydrocarbons, but the oil content can vary substantially depending on location,
depth, and
reservoir characteristics. Well completion should aim to reduce the production
of sand at
source using effective downhole sand control measures.
Whenever practi
cal, produced
sand removed from process equipment should be transported to shore for
treatment and
disposal, or routed to an offshore injection disposal well if available. Discha
rge to sea is
not considered to be current good practice.
If discharge to sea is
the only demonstrable
feasible option then the discharge should meet some guideline values.
2009
September
3-45
iii. Completion and well work-over fluids
Completion and well work-over fluids (including intervention fluids and
service fluids)
can typically include weighted brines or acids, methanol and glycols,
and many other
chemical systems. These fluids are used to clean the wellbore and sti
mulate the flow of
hydrocarbons, or simply used to maintain downhole pressure. Once used these flui
ds may
contain contaminants including solid material, oil, and chemical additiv
es. Feasible
disposal options should be considered, where practical, including:
Collection of fluids if handled in closed systems and shipping to shore to the
original
vendors for recycling
Injection in an available injection disposal well, where available
Shipping to shore for treatment and disposal
If discharge to sea is the only demonstrated feasible option:
Chemical systems should be selected in terms of their concentration,

toxicity,
bioavailability and bioaccumulation potential;
Consideration should be given to routing these fluids to the produced water st
ream for
treatment and disposal, if available;
Spent acids should be neutralized before treatment and disposal;
The fluids should meet the discharge levels in Table 1 in Section 2 of this Gu
ideline.
iv. Naturally occurring radioactive materials
Naturally Occurring Radioactive Material, or NORM, is produced in solutio
n with oil
field brines and deposited as scale on the inside of oil field vesse
ls and piping.
Its
radioactivity (rated as low specific activity by the Nuclear Regulatory
Commission)
poses a hazard if it is inhaled as a dry dust during vessel and pi
pe cleaning or repair.
Recycling of this material is impeded by the lack of safe exposure levels.
Depending on the field reservoir characteristics, NORMs may precipitate
as scale or
sludges in process piping and production vessels. Where NORM is presen
t, a NORM
management program should be developed so that appropriate handling pro
cedures are
followed. If removal of NORM is required for occupational health reaso
ns, disposal
options may include: canister disposal during well abandonment; injectio
n into the
annular space of a well; shipping to shore for disposal to landfill in sealed co
ntainers; and,
depending on the type of NORM and when there is no other option available, disch
arge to
sea with the facility drainage.
Sludge, scale, or NORM-impacted equipment should be treated, processed, or isola
ted so
that potential future human exposures to the treated waste would be within inter
nationally
accepted risk-based limits. Recognized industrial practices should be used for d
isposal. If
waste is sent to an external onshore facility for disposal, the facil
ity must be licensed to
receive such waste.
v. Hazardous materials management
There are many hazardous materials used in offshore oil and gas opera
tions. General
guidance for the management of hazardous materials is provided in the
General EHS
Guidelines.
2009
September
3-46
The following additional principles should be followed for offshore chemicals:
Use of chemical hazard assessment and risk management techniques to
evaluate
chemicals and their effects
Selected chemicals should be previously tested for environmental hazards

Offshore drilling and production chemicals should be selected based on the OSP
AR4
Harmonized Offshore
Chemical Notification Format (HOCNF) or similar internationally recognized sys
tem
Chemicals with least hazard and lowest potential environmental impact,
and lowest
potential health impact, should be selected, whenever possible
Use of chemicals suspected to cause taint or known endocrine disrupt
ors should be
avoided
Use of Ozone-depleting Substances should be avoided
Chemicals known to contain heavy metals, other than in trace quantit
ies, should be
avoided
D. Noise
Oil and gas development activities generating marine noise include seis
mic operations,
drilling and production activities, offshore and nearshore structural installati
on (especially
pile driving) and construction activities, and marine traffic. Noise from offsh
ore activities
(especially from seismic operations) can temporarily affect fish and ma
rine mammals.
Recommended measures to reduce the risk of noise impact to marine species includ
e:
Identifying areas sensitive for marine life such as feeding, breeding
, calving, and
spawning areas
Planning seismic surveys and offshore construction activities to avoid sensiti
ve times
of the year
Identifying fishing areas and reducing disturbance by planning seismic
surveys and
construction activities at less productive times of the year, where possible
Maximize the efficiency of seismic surveys to reduce operation times, where po
ssible
If sensitive species are anticipated in the area, monitor their presence befor
e the onset
of noise creating activities, and throughout the seismic program or co
nstruction. In
areas where significant impacts to sensitive species are anticipated, e
xperienced
observers should be used
When marine mammals are observed congregating close to the area of
planned
activities, seismic start up or construction should begin at least 500 m away
If marine mammals are sighted within 500 m of the proposed seismic
array or
construction area, start up of seismic activities or construction shoul
d be postponed
until they have moved away, allowing adequate time after the last sighting
Soft-start procedures, also called ramp-up or slow buildup, should be used in
areas of
known marine mammal activity. This involves a gradual increase in sound pressure
to
full operational levels
The lowest practicable power levels should be used throughout the se
ismic surveys,
and their use should be documented

2009
September
3-47
Methods to reduce and/or baffle unnecessary high frequency noise prod
uced by air
guns or other acoustic energy sources should be used, where possible
E. Spills
Spills from offshore facilities can occur due to leaks, equipment fail
ure, accidents, or
human error. Guidelines for release prevention and control planning are provide
d in the
General EHS Guidelines, including the requirement to develop a spill p
revention and
control plan. Additional spill prevention and control measures specific to offs
hore oil and
gas facilities include:
Conducting a spill risk assessment for offshore facilities and support vessels
;
Design of process, utility, and drilling systems to reduce the risk
of major
uncontained spills;
Install valves, including subsea shutdown valves, to allow early shutdown or i
solation
in the event of an emergency;
Ensure adequate corrosion allowance for the lifetime of the facilitie
s and / or
installation of corrosion control and prevention systems in all pipelin
es, process
equipment, and tanks;
Develop maintenance and monitoring programs to ensure the integrity o
f well field
equipment. For export pipelines, maintenance programs should include reg
ular
pigging to clean the pipeline, and intelligent pigging should also be
considered as
required;
Install leak detection systems. Use of sub-sea pipelines measures, su
ch as telemetry
systems, SCADA6 systems, pressure sensors, shut-in valves, and pump-off
systems,
as well as normally unattended installations (unmanned) facilities to e
nsure rapid
detection of loss of containment;
For facilities with potentially significant releases, install an Emerg
ency Shutdown
System that initiates automatic shutdown actions to bring the offshore
facility to a
safe condition
Adequate personnel training in oil spill prevention, containment and response.
Ensure spill response and containment equipment is deployed or availa
ble as
necessary for response
All spills should be documented and reported. Following a spill, a ro
ot cause
investigation should be carried out and corrective action taken. A Spill Respons
e Plan is
required, along with the capability to implement the plan. The Spill Response Pl
an should
address potential oil, chemical, and fuel spills from offshore faciliti
es, support vessels
including tankers, and pipeline ruptures. The plan should also include:
A description of operations, site conditions, current and wind data, sea condi
tions and
water depth, and logistical support;
Identification of persons responsible for managing spill response effo
rts, their
responsibility, authority, roles and contact details;
Cooperative measures with government agencies, if appropriate;
Spill risk assessment, defining expected frequency and size of spills
from different
potential release sources; including assessment of foreseeable scenarios;
2009
September
3-48
Oil spill trajectory modeling with oil fate and environmental impact
prediction for a
number of spill simulations (including worst case scenario, such as blowout from
an
oil well) using an adequate and internationally recognized computer mod
el with the
ability to input local current and wind data;
Clear demarcation of spill severity, according to the size of the s
pill using a clearly
defined Tier I, Tier II and Tier III approach;
Strategies for managing Tier I spills at a minimum, from the offshore installa
tion and
support vessels;
Arrangements and procedures to mobilize external resources for responding to l
arger
spills and strategies for deployment;
Full list, description, location, and use of on-site and off-site response equ
ipment, and
the response times for deployment;
Strategies for containment and recovery of floating oil, including use (and li
mitations)
of chemical dispersants;
Maps identifying sensitive ecological areas (seasonal / monthly) prepa
red using
sensitivity mapping of the environment at risk;
Identified priorities for response (with input from potentially affect
ed or concerned
parties);
Shoreline cleanup strategies;
Handling instructions for spilled oil, chemicals, fuels or other recovered con
taminated
materials, including their transportation, temporarily storage, and disposal.
F. Surface Storage or Disposal Pits
If surface pits or ponds are used for wastewater storage or for inte
rim disposal during
operations, the pits should be constructed outside environmentally sensitive loc
ations.
Installation of a liner so that the bottom and sides of the pit h
ave a coefficient of
permeability no greater than 1 x 10-7 centimeters per second (cm/sec). Liners sh
ould
be compatible with the material to be contained and of sufficient str
ength and
thickness to maintain the integrity of the pit.
Typical liners may
include synthetic
materials, cement/clay type or natural clays, although the hydraulic co
nductivity of
natural liners should be tested to ensure integrity
Construction to a depth of typically 5 m above the seasonal high water table
Installation of measures (e.g., careful siting, berms) to prevent nat
ural surface
drainage from entering the pit or breaching during heavy storms
Installation of a perimeter fence around the pit or installation of
a screen to prevent
access by people, livestock and wildlife (including birds)
Regular removal and recovery of free hydrocarbons from the pit contents surfac
e
Removal of pit contents upon completion of operations and disposal i
n accordance
with the waste management plan
Reinstatement of the pit area following completion of operations

2009
September
3-49
Workover and completion wastes
Workover and completion wastes result from operations where an oil wel
ls head is
partially open to the atmosphere and is filled with a water base flu
id that maintains
pressure on the formation to prevent blowout. Workover fluid is injected into s
uch a well
while the wells interior tubing string, valves, packer gaskets, or othe
r components are
undergoing maintenance. When maintenance is complete, the workover fluid is rem
oved
from the well before starting routine operation. Completion fluids are typicall
y used in a
well when the well casing is perforated just before starting productio
n.
Both fluids
become contaminated with oil and formation brine.
Proppants/frac sand
Proppants (also called frac sand) refers to the aluminum silicate beads of varying
sizes
injected into wells to hold formation fractures open, thus increasing subsurface
oil flow to
the wells. When these materials are transported back to facilities with crude o
il from the
wells, the beads settle out, along with formation sand, to form a semi-solid slu
dge in the
bottoms of vessels.
Bottom wastes
Tank bottom wastes are a type of sediment that accumulates in oil fi
eld vessels and
pipelines when fluid turbulence is low. These dense sludges are composed of cru
de oil,
paraffin, asphaltics, reservoir material, drilling mud, and slightly rad
ioactive material
(called NORM) in addition to the frac sand/proppant discussed above.
Dehydration and sweetening wastes
Polyols and glycols are used in the oil and gas industry as antifree
ze additives and to
remove traces of water from natural gas streams in the production of
fuel gas. Waste
dehydration polyols and glycols sometimes emit traces of benzene.
H
2
S, a corrosive gas more toxic than hydrogen cyanide, is emitted by s
ulfate-reducing
bacteria growing in subsurface formations and oil field surface equipment.
Oily debris and filter media
Oily debris saturated with crude oil comes from oil spill cleanups (minor and ma
jor) and
can include oily soil and gravel. Similarly, filter media which filter crude oi
l may become
saturated with oil.
Hydrocarbon wastes
Oil fields generate waste hydrocarbons such as dirty diesel fuel contami
nated from
pressure testing pipelines.
Table 3-3: Potential Material Outputs from Selected
Oil and Gas Extraction Processes
Process Air Emissions Process Waste Water Residual Wastes
Generated
Well
development
fugitive natural gas, other
volatile organic
drilling muds, organic
acids, alkalis, diesel oil,
drill cuttings (some oilcoated), drilling mud
2009
3-50
Process Air Emissions Process Waste Water
Generated
compounds (VOCs),
Polyaromatic
hydrocarbons (PAHs),
carbon dioxide, carbon
monoxide, hydrogen
sulfide
crankcase oils, acidic
stimulation fluids
(hydrochloric and
hydrofluoric acids)
solids, weighting
agents, dispersants,
corrosion inhibitors,
Residual Wastes
September
surfactants, flocculating
agents, concrete,
casing, paraffins
Production Fugitive natural gas, other
VOCs, PAHs, carbon
dioxide, carbon
monoxide, hydrogen
sulfide, fugitive BTEX
(benzene, toluene,
ethylbenzene, and xylene)
from natural gas
conditioning
produced water
possibly containing
heavy metals,
radionuclides, dissolved
solids, oxygendemanding organic
compounds, and high
levels of salts. also may
contain additives
including biocides,
lubricants, corrosion
inhibitors. wastewater
containing glycol,
amines, salts, and
untreatable emulsions
produced sand,
elemental sulfur, spent
catalysts, separator
sludge, tank bottoms,
used filters, sanitary
wastes
Maintenance volatile cleaning agents,
paints, other VOCs,
hydrochloric acid gas
completion fluid,
wastewater containing
well-cleaning solvents
(detergents and
degreasers), paint,
stimulation agents
pipe scale, waste paints,
paraffins, cement, sand
Abandoned
Wells, Spills
and Blowouts
fugitive natural gas and
other VOCs, PAHs,
particulate matter, sulfur
compounds, carbon
dioxide, carbon monoxide
escaping oil and brine contaminated soils,
sorbents
Sources: Siting, 1978, EPA Office of Solid Waste, 1987
G. Decommissioning
Decommissioning of onshore facilities usually includes the complete remo
val of
permanent facilities and well abandonment, including associated equipment, mater
ial, and
waste disposal or recycling. General guidance on the prevention and control of
common
environmental impacts during decommissioning activities is provided in the Gener
al EHS
Guidelines. Specific additional requirements to consider for oil and gas facili
ties include
well abandonment and pipeline decommissioning options.
Wells should be abandoned in a stable and safe condition. The hole should be se
aled to
the ground surface with cement plugs and any known hydrocarbon zones
should be
isolated to prevent fluid migration. Aquifers should also be isolated. If the
land is used
for agriculture, the surface casing should be cut and capped below plow depth.
Decommissioning options for pipelines include leaving them in place, or removing
them
for reuse, recycling or disposal, especially if they are above ground
and interfere with
human activities.
Pipelines left in place should be disconnected and
isolated from all
2009
September
3-51
potential sources of hydrocarbons; cleaned and purged of hydrocarbons; and seale
d at its
ends.
A preliminary decommissioning and restoration plan should be developed
that identifies
disposal options for all equipment and materials, including products us
ed and wastes
generated on site.
The plan should consider the removal of oil from
flow lines, the
removal of surface equipment and facilities, well abandonment, pipeline
decommissioning and reinstatement.
The plan should be further develope
d during field
operations and fully defined in advance of the end of field life, and should inc
lude details
on the provisions for the implementation of decommissioning activities and arran
gements
for post-decommissioning monitoring and aftercare.
3.3 Risk Potential in Bulk Storage and Handling of Hazardous Chemicals
for Oil/Gas Drilling
There are various hazardous bulk chemicals (toxic and flammable), which
will be used
during exploratory and production drilling. Storage areas are provided for these
fuels and
these should be handled with utmost care following the safety norms f
or handling of
hazardous chemicals. Bulk storages are required for those fuels, which will be r
equired in
the large quantity and are flammable/toxic in nature. The storage tank
s should be in an
isolated zone and should have firewater hydrant system.
Storing bentonite, mixing areas and supply lines
As using bentonite is required for drilling, ensure that it is contai

ned well within the
working area and does not enter any watercourses or surface water dra
ins. Ensure that
storage silos are bunded.
Surround areas where bentonite is mixed wi
th a small wall or
contain them within a bund. This will help to control the slurry pro
duced and prevent it
from entering surface water drains or watercourses. Position bentonite stora
ge silos and
supply lines as far as possible from surface water drains or watercourses.
Heavy Fuel Oils having flash points above 55C is not classified as fl
ammable.
Flammability limits for fuel vapour /air mixtures lie between approximately 1.0
to 6.0 %
(V/V); auto-ignition temperatures are in the range of approximately 220
to 300C.
Ignition of heavy fuel oils at ambient temperature may be difficult,
but if ignited at
elevated temperatures, the product will burn, it is recommended that the head sp
ace of all
heavy fuel oil tanks should be considered potentially flammable and ap
propriate
precautions taken.
3.3.1 Hazard identification
Identification of hazards in QRA is of primary significance in the analysis, qua
ntification
and cost-effective control of accidents involving chemicals and process.
A classical
definition of hazard states that hazard is in fact the characteristic of system/
plant/process
that presents potential for an accident.
Hence, all the components o
f a system/plant/
process need to be thoroughly examined to assess their potential for
initiating or
propagating an unplanned event/sequence of events, which can be termed as an acc
ident.
The typical methods for hazard identification employed are:
Identification of major hazardous units based on Manufacture, Storage and Impo
rt of
Hazardous Chemicals Rules, 1989 of Government of India (as amended in 2000); and
2009
September
3-52
Identification of hazardous units and segments of plants and storage
units based on
relative ranking technique, viz. Fire-Explosion and Toxicity Index (FE&TI).
Hazardous substances may be classified into three main classes namely
Flammable
substances, unstable substances and Toxic substances.
Flammable substan
ces require
interaction with air for their hazard to be realized.
Under certain
circumstances the
vapours arising from flammable substances when mixed with air may be
explosive,
especially in confined spaces. However, if present in sufficient quantity such
clouds may
explode in open air also.
Unstable substances are liquids or solids,
which may
decompose with such violence so as to give rise to blast waves. Besides, toxic
substances
are dangerous and cause substantial damage to life when released into
the atmosphere.
The ratings for a large number of chemicals based on flammability, reactivity an
d toxicity
have been given in NFPA Codes 49 and 345 M.
Table 3-4: Applicability of GOI Rules To Fuel/Chemical Storage
Threshold Quantity (T) for
Application of Rules
S. No. Chemical/ Fuel
Listed in
Schedule
5,7-9, 13-15 10-12
1 Light Diesel Oil 1 (part I) 5000 MT 50000 MT
2 Heavy Fuel Oil 1(part I) 5000 MT 50000 MT
3 Chlorine 3 (part I) 10 MT 25 MT
4 HSD 1 (part I) 5000 MT 50000 MT
5 Natural gas 3 (part I) -- -A systematic analysis of the fuels/chemicals and their quantities of storage is
required, to
determine threshold quantities as notified by GOI Rules, 1989 (as amended in 200
0) and
the applicable rules are as above.
Table 3-5: Properties of Fuels/Chemicals Used In Drilling
FBP MP FP UEL LEL Chemical Codes/Label TLV
C %
Light Diesel
Oil
Flammable -- 360 - 66 - Heavy Fuel
Oil
Flammable -- 400 338 65 7.5 0.6
Chlorine Toxic 1 ppm 34 - -101 - HSD Flammable -- 375 - 70 - Natural Gas Flammable -- -- -- -- - Note:
TLV: Threshold Limit Value
FBP: Final Boiling Point
MP: Melting Point
FP: Flash Point
UEL: Upper Explosive Limit
LEL: Lower Explosive Limit
2009
September
3-53
Fire explosion and toxicity index (Fe&Ti) approach
FE&Ti is a rapid ranking method for identifying the degree of hazard. The appli
cation of
FE&Ti helps in making a quick assessment of the nature and quantification of the
hazard
in these areas. However, this does not provide precise information. Respective
Material
Factor (RMF), General Hazard Factors (GHF), Special Process Hazard Fact
ors (SPHF)
are computed using standard procedure of awarding penalties based on s
torage handling
and reaction parameters.
Before hazard indexing can be applied, the
installation in
question should be subdivided into logical, independent elements or uni
ts.
In general, a
unit can logically be characterized by the nature of the process that
takes place in it.
In
some cases, the unit may consist of a plant element separated from the other ele
ments by
space or by protective walls.
A plant element may also be an appar
atus, instrument,
section or system that can cause a specific hazard. For each separate plant pro
cess which
contains flammable or toxic substances, a fire and explosion index (F)
and/or a toxicity
index (T) could be determined in a manner derived from the method for determinin
g a fire
and explosion index developed by the DOW Chemical Company.
DOWs Fire and Explosion Index (F and E) is a product of Material Fac
tor (MF) and
hazard factor (F3) while MF represents the flammability and reactivity of the su
bstances,
the hazard factor (F3), is itself a product of General Process Hazard
s (GPH) and special
process hazards (SPH). An accurate plot plan of the plant, a process flow sheet
and F&E
Index and Hazard Classification Guide published by DOW are required to
estimate the
FE&Ti of any process plant or a storage unit. The F&E index can be calculated f
rom the
following formula:
F&EI = MF x (GPH) x (SPH)
The degree of hazard potential is identified based on the numerical value of F&E
I as per
the criteria given below:
F&EI Range
Degree of Hazard
0-60
Light
61-96 Moderate
97-127 Intermediate
128-158 Heavy
159-up Severe
The toxicity index is primarily based on the index figures for health
hazards established
by the NFPA in codes NFPA 704, NFPA 49 and NFPA 345 m. By comparing the indices
F&EI and TI, the unit under QRA is classified into one of the following three ca
tegories
established for the purpose.
Table 3-6: F&EI and TI Categories
Category Fire and Explosion Index (F&EI) Toxicity Index (TI)
I F&EI < 65 TI < 6
II 65 < or = F&EI < 95 6 < or = TI < 10
III F&EI > or = 95 TI > or = 10
September
2009
3-54
Certain basic minimum preventive and protective measures are required f
or the three
hazard categories. Fire and Explosion are also the likely hazards due to the fu
el storage
hence, FE&TI should be estimated.
3.3.2 Hazard assessment and evaluation
A preliminary hazard analysis is carried out to identify the major hazards assoc
iated with
storages in the plant. This is followed by consequence analysis to quantify the
se hazards.
Finally the vulnerable zones are plotted for which risk reducing measures are de
duced and
implemented.
Physical and Health Occupational Hazards in any large scale Chemical /
Hydrocarbon
Processing Industry (CPI/HPI) can be broadly classified into the following categ
ories:
Mechanical Risks
Electrical Risks
Fire/Explosion Risks
High /low Temperature Exposure Risks
Toxic/Carcinogenic Chemicals Exposure Risks
Corrosive/Reactive/Radioactive Chemicals Exposure Risks
The first two types of risks are of universal nature associated with any industr
ial activity
and not specific to a particular plant or process.
Mechanical risks
which are generally
encountered are injuries to the head, Limbs, eyes, etc., usually as a result of
negligence on
the part of operating/maintenance personnel in the use of improper too
ls, by-passing
prescribed safety procedures neglect of personal protective wear and risks assoc
iated with
rotating machinery as well as risks associated with high-energy release from com
pressed
gases. Electrical risks which result in shock and/or burns are most often a con
sequence of
poor maintenance, ingress of dust or moisture, handling by unauthorized
personnel and
use of improper/substandard hardware.
3.3.3 Failure mode analysis
There are various modes in which flammable and toxic chemicals can le
ak into
atmosphere causing adverse affects. It may be small leaks from gaskets
of the flanged
joints, or guillotine failure of a pipeline of even catastrophic failu
re of the storage tank.
Some typical modes of failures and their possible causes are discussed below:
Table 3-7: Failure Mode Analysis
S.No. Failure Mode Probable Cause Remarks
1. Flange / Gasket
failure
Incorrect gasket Incorrect
installation.
Attention to be paid during
selection and installation of
gaskets.
2 Weld failure It is normally due to poor
quality of welds
Welding to be done by certified
welders with right quality of
welding rods. Inspection and
radiography must also be done.
2009
3-55
S.No. Failure Mode Probable Cause Remarks
3 Pipe corrosion
erosion or failure
due to stress
Some times fabrication or
installation leaves stress in
the pipes. Erosion or
corrosion also is sometimes
the cause.
Pipes material of construction
should be selected correctly.
Design should take care of erosion
effects. And installation of pipes
should not leave any stress.
4 Over
pressurization of
pipeline
Over pressurization can
occur due to failure of SRV
or incorrect operation.
Necessary procedures should be
there to prevent.
5 Deficient
installation of
pipes
Pipes design and installation
is sometimes not as per
appropriate standard.
It must be ensured that installation
is as per correct standards
completely.
6 Leaks from valve Leaks from glands, bonnets
or failures valves spindle is
sometimes the cause.
Right selection of valves and their
maintenance should be ensured.
7 Instruments failure Multifarious instruments are
used for control of process
parameters. Any such
instrument failure can cause
mishap.
Reliability of instruments working
must be ensured through proper
selection and maintenance.
8 Failures of
protective system
Protective system like SRV,
September
bursting discs, vent header,

drain lines etc., are provided
to take care of abnormal
conditions.
Reliability of protective system
must be ensured highest through
inspection and proper
maintenance.
9 Operational effort Plant operational parameters
should not be exceeded
beyond the permissible
limits.
Operating procedures must be
complete and strictly followed.
10 Other failures There are external other
reasons causing the failures.
Design and operating philosophy
must consider all possible reasons.
3.3.4 Preliminary hazard analysis (PHA)
The purpose of the preliminary hazards analysis is to identify early in the desi
gn process
the potential hazards associated with, or inherent in the design, thus
eliminating costly
and time consuming delays caused by design changes made later.
This
also eliminates
potential hazard points at design stage itself.
An assessment of the conceptual design is conducted for the purpose o
f identifying and
examining hazards related to stored materials, utility and support systems, envi
ronmental
factors, proposed drilling operations, facilities, and safeguards.
In the proposed installation major hazard is fire due to the storage
of fuel/chemicals.
Other hazardous installation is the borehole where the oil/gas coming
out could get
ignited at various stages of operation.
2009
September
3-56
3.3.4.1 Electrical hazards
Electrical hazards leading to fire and explosion in switchgear and other equipme
nt mainly
due to failure of circuit breakers, insulators, fuses, busbars, and po
or maintenance.
Accidents may also occur in transformer due to open arcing, flashover
above oil level,
insulator failure, overloading, failure of air cooling system, lighting etc., Ne
vertheless, all
these hazards lead to localized accidents only.
3.3.4.2 Fire hazards
There could be other areas in the installation that have a potential
for fire hazard and
require adequate fire fighting equipment. These are considered here sin
ce uncontrolled
fire may trigger the above emergencies due to domino effect. However f
or the proposed
installation, safety guidelines will be as per Tariff Advisory Committee.

3.3.4.3 Cable galleries (DG Room)
For containment of fire and preventing it from spreading in the cable galleries,
unit wise
fire barriers with self-closing fire resistant doors are planned. The
ventilation system
provided in the cable galleries will be interlocked with the fire alarm system s
o that, in the
event of a fire alarm, the ventilation system is automatically switched off. A
lso to avoid
spreading of fire, all cable entries/openings in cable galleries, tunne
ls, channels, floors,
barriers etc., will be sealed with non-inflammable/fire resistant sealing materi
al.
3.3.4.4 Toxic release
In some instances use of chorine may be required, which is toxic. If not handled
properly
it will lead to toxicity. Self-contained breathing apparatus will be a
vailable at the
installation in the event of leakage in case of emergency. Workers wi
ll be trained in
handling the self-contained breathing apparatus. Since the quantity of toxic rel
ease will be
limited, off site implications of release are not envisaged.
Table 3-8: Preliminary Hazard Analysis for Process/Storage Areas
Equipment Process/Storage Potential Hazard Provision
Turbine Converts pressure
in the fuel into
mechanical energy.
Mechanical and fire
hazards.
Layout of equipment/
machinery is done in
accordance with plant and
electrical inspectorate.
Generator Converts
mechanical energy
into electrical
energy.
Mechanical hazards
and fire hazards in
Lube oil system
Cable galleries
Short circuits
As above
Power
Transformers
- Fire and explosion All electrical fittings and
cables are provided as per the
specified standards. Ensure
that all electrical cabling in
the area are properly insulated
2009
3-57
Equipment Process/Storage Potential Hazard Provision
and covered. Foam / CO
September
2
/ dry
powder type fire extinguishers
are to be provided.
Switch Yard Switch Yard Fire As above
Switch Yard
control room
- Fire in cable galleries
and switch
As above
DG set
Fires in Cable
galleries, Short
circuits in Control
Rooms and Switchgears
Layout of equipment and
machinery according to Plant
& electrical inspectorate
Natural Gas
pipeline
Fire and Explosion Frequent monitoring of valves
and joints. Sprinkling system
shall be provided. Ensure that
all electrical cabling in the
area are properly insulated
and covered. Foam / CO
2
/ dry
powder type fire extinguishers
are to be provided. Pipeline
design as per OISD norms.
Chlorine Used for water
treatment in
different phases in
cooling water,
potable water and
raw water.
Toxic accidental
release
Leak detection and
neutralization system will be
provided.
HFO storage
(Heavy Fuel)
Combustion at
elevated temperature
Leak detection and
neutralization system will be
provided.
LDO Storage
Fire
HSD
Fire
Table 3-9: Preliminary Hazard Analysis for the Installation in General
PHA Category Description of
Plausible Hazard
Provision
If there is any leakage
and eventuality of
source of ignition.
All electrical fittings and cables are provided
as per the specified standards. All motor

starters are flame proof.
Environmental
factors
Highly inflammable
nature of the
fuel/chemicals may
cause fire hazard
A well designed fire protection including
protein foam, dry powder, CO
2
extinguisher
should be provided. Fire extinguisher of
small size and big size are provided at all
potential fire hazard places.
2009
September
3-58
3.3.5 Safety measures
3.3.5.1 Maximum credible accident (MCA) analysis
Hazardous substances may be released as a result of failures or catas
trophes, causing
possible damage to the surrounding area. This section deals with the question of
how the
consequences of the release of such substances and the damage to the
surrounding area
can be determined. MCA analysis encompasses certain techniques to identify the h
azards
and calculate the consequent effects in terms of damage distances of heat radiat
ion, toxic
releases, vapour cloud explosion, etc. A host of probable or potential
accidents of the
major units in the complex arising due to use, storage and handling
of the hazardous
materials are examined to establish their credibility. Depending upon t
he effective
hazardous attributes and their impact on the event, the maximum effect
on the
surrounding environment and the respective damage caused can be assessed.
Consequence analysis is basically a study of quantitative analysis of
hazards due to
various failure scenarios. It is that part of risk analysis, which considers fai
lure cases and
the damage caused by these failure cases. It is done in order to fo
rm an opinion on
potentially serious hazardous outcome of accidents and their possible consequenc
es. The
reason and purpose of consequence analysis are many folds like:
Part of Risk Assessment
Plant Layout/Code Requirements
Protection of surroundings
Protection of the public
Emergency Planning
Design Criteria
The results of consequence analysis are useful for getting information
about all known

and unknown effects that are of importance when some failure scenario
occurs in the
plant and also to get information as how to deal with the possible catastrophic
events. It
also gives the workers at the installation and people the vicinity, an understan
ding of their
personal situation.
3.3.6 Damage criteria
The storage and unloading at the storage facility may lead to fire and explosion
hazards.
The damage criteria due to an accidental release of any hydrocarbon a
rise from fire and
explosion.
Tank fire would occur if the radiation intensity is high on the peri
pheral surface of the
tank leading to increase in internal tank pressure. Fire would occur
when the flammable
liquid/gas due to leakage gets ignited.
3.3.6.1 Fire damage
A flammable liquid in a pool will burn with a large turbulent diffus
ion flame. This
releases heat based on the heat of combustion and the burning rate o
f the liquid/gas. A
part of the heat is radiated while the rest is converted away by ri
sing hot air and
2009
September
3-59
combustion products. The radiations can heat the contents of a nearby
storage unit to
above its ignition temperature and thus result in a spread of fire.
The radiations can also cause severe burns or fatalities of workers or fire figh
ters located
within a certain distance. Hence, it will be important to know before
hand the damage
potential of a flammable pool likely to be created due to leakage or catastrophi
c failure of
a storage vessel. This will help to decide the location of other storage/vessels
, decide the
type of protective clothing the workers/fire fighters need, the duration
of time for which
they can be in the zone, the fire extinguishing measures needed and
the protection
methods needed for the nearby storage vessels.
Table 3-11 tabulates the damage effect on equipment and people due to thermal ra
diation
intensity whereas; the effect of incident radiation intensity and exposure time
on lethality
is given in Table 3-11.
Table 3-10: Damage Due to Incident Radiation Intensities
Type of Damage Intensity
Sr.
No.
Incident
Radiation
(kW/m
2
)
Damage to Equipment Damage to People
1 37.5 Damage to process equipment
100% lethality in 1 min. 1%
lethality in 10 sec.
2 25.0
Minimum energy required to ignite
wood at indefinitely long exposure
without a flame
50% Lethality in 1 min.
Significant injury in 10 sec.
3 19.0
Maximum thermal radiation intensity
allowed on thermally unprotected
adjoining equipment
-4 12.5
Minimum energy to ignite with a
flame; melts plastic tubing
1% lethality in 1 min.
5 4.5 -Causes pain if duration is longer
than 20 sec, however blistering is
un-likely (First degree burns)
6 1.6 -Causes no discomfort on long
exposures
Source: Techniques for Assessing Industrial Hazards by World Bank.
Table 3-11: Radiation Exposure and Lethality
Radiation
Intensity (kW/m
2
)
Exposure Time
(seconds)
Lethality
(%)
Degree of Burns
1.6 -- 0
No Discomfort even after long
exposure
4.5 20 0 1 st
4.5 50 0 1 st
8.0 20 0 1 st
8.0 50 <1 3 rd
2009
3-60
Radiation
Intensity (kW/m
2
)
Exposure Time
(seconds)
September
Lethality
(%)
Degree of Burns
8.0 60 <1 3 rd
12.0 20 <1 2 nd
12.0 50 8 3 rd
12.5 -- 1 -25.0 -- 50 -37.5 -- 100 -3.3.6.2 Damage due to explosion
Explosion is a sudden and violent release of energy accompanied by th
e generation of
pressure wave and a loud noise. The rate of energy release is very large and has
potential
to cause serious injury to the people, damage the nearby property etc. The effec
t of overpressure can directly result in deaths to those working in the immedi
ate vicinity of the
explosion. The pressure wave may be caused by a BLEVE (Boiling Liquid
Expanding
Vapour Cloud) or Vapour Cloud explosion.
3.3.6.3 BLEVE - fireball
BLEVE is sometimes referred to as a fireball. A BLEVE is a combinati
on of fire and
explosion with an intense radiant heat emission within a relatively sh
ort time interval.
This phenomenon can occur as a result of overheating of a pressurized
vessel by a
primary fire. If a pressure vessel fails as a result of a weakening
of its structure the
contents are instantaneously released from the vessel as a turbulent mixture of
liquid and
gas expanding rapidly and dispersing in air as a cloud. When this cl
oud is ignited a
fireball occurs causing enormous heat radiation intensity within a few seconds.
This heat
intensity is sufficient to cause severe skin burns and deaths at seve
ral hundred meters
from the vessel, depending on the quantity of gas involved. A BLEVE
can therefore be
caused by a physical impact on a vessel or a tank, which is already overstressed
.
3.3.6.4 Vapour cloud explosion
Explosion can be confined and unconfined vapour cloud explosions. Confined explo
sions
are those, which occur within some sort of containment such as a ves
sel or pipeline.
Explosions which occur in the open air are referred to as unconfined
explosions and
produce peak pressures of only a few kPa. The peak pressures of confined explosi
ons are
generally higher and may reach hundreds of kPa. Table 3-13 tabulates the damage
criteria
as a result of peak over pressure of a pressure wave on structures and people.
Table 3-12: Damage Due to Peak over Pressure
Human Injury Structural Damage
Peak Over
Pressure (bar)
Type of Damage Peak Over
Pressure (bar)
Type of Damage
5 - 8 100% lethality 0.3 Heavy (90% damage)
2009
September
3-61
Human Injury Structural Damage
Peak Over
Pressure (bar)
Type of Damage Peak Over
Pressure (bar)
Type of Damage
3.5 - 5 50% lethality 0.1 Repairable (10%
damage)
2 - 3 Threshold lethality 0.03 Damage of Glass
1.33 - 2 Severe lung damage 0.01 Crack of Windows
1 - 1
1/3
50% Eardrum rupture - Source: Marshall, V.C. (1977) How lethal are explosives and toxic escapes.
3.3.6.5 Effect due to toxic gas release
Chlorine is a greenish-yellow, highly reactive halogen gas that has a pungent, s
uffocating
odor. The vapor is heavier than air and will form a cloud in the v
icinity of a spill. Like
other halogens, chlorine exists in the diatomic state in nature. Chlor
ine is extremely
reactive and rapidly combines with both inorganic and organic substances. Chlori
ne is an
eye and respiratory tract irritant and, at high doses, has direct toxic effects
on the lungs
The critical values of chlorine concentrations in air are given in Table 3-14.
Table 3-13: Critical Concentrations for Chlorine
Criteria Concentration
90% lethality (10 min exposure) 866 ppm
Immediate Damage to life and Health (IDLH) 25 ppm
3.3.6.6 Typical scenarios considered in oil/gas drilling for MCA analysis
Based on the storage and properties of the chemicals at the site, so
me typical scenarios
relevant for MCA analysis include:
Table 3-14: Scenarios Considered For MCA Analysis
Sr.
No.
Fuel/Chemical
Quantity Pool Fire Explosion Toxic
Release
Jet
Fire
1 Failure of LDO storage
tanks
* - - -2 Catastrophic Failure of
LDO + HFO Storage
Tanks
* - - -3 Failure of Chorine
cylinder
- - * -Operational Aspects of an EIA
2009
September
3-62
Sr.
No.
Fuel/Chemical
Quantity Pool Fire Explosion Toxic
Release
Jet
Fire
4 Catastrophic Failure of all
HSD Storage Tanks
* - - -5 Catastrophic Failure of
Natural Gas Pipeline
connected to turbine
- - - *
Note:
* Considered for MCA Analysis
# Most likely scenario is leakage of Chlorine and forming toxic cloud during unl
oading operation
and leakage of Hydrogen leading to explosion during filling operation.
A perusal of the above table indicates that major material storage is
flammable liquid.
Fires could occur due to presence of ignition source at or near the source of le
ak or could
occur due to flashback upon ignition of the traveling vapor cloud. Ta
nk fires may occur
due to the following:
Ignition if rim seal leak leading to rim seal fire and escalating to full-fled
ged tank fire.
Lighting is a major source of ignition of tank fires; and
Overflow from tank leading to spillage and its subsequent ignition,
which flashes
back to the tank leading to tank fire. The chance of overflow should
be less unless
operator has grossly erred. Spillage due to overflow may result in a
dyke fire if
ignition occurs after sufficiently long period.
For radiation calculations, pool fire may be important and the crite
ria of 4.5 kW/m
2
could be selected to judge acceptability of the scenarios. The assumpt
ions for
calculations are:
It is not continuous exposure;
It is assumed that No fire detection and mitigation measures are initiated;
There is not enough time available for warning the public and initi
ating emergency
action;
Secondary fire at public road and building is not likely to happen;
The effect of smoke on reduction of source radiation intensity has
not been
considered; therefore hazard distances calculated tend to be conservative; and
Shielding effect of intervening trees or other structures has not be
en considered. No
lethality is expected from this level of intensity although burn injur
y takes place
depending on time of exposure.
3.3.7 Consequence analysis
3.3.7.1 Effect of thermal radiation on population
TLV of 1.6 kW/m
2
can be adopted as the safe radiation intensity for human population
even for long exposures to calculate safe zone.
2009
September
3-63
Domino effect
The term domino effect denotes a chain of accidents, or situations, i
n which a
fire/explosion load generated by an accident in one area causes second
ary and higher
order accidents in other areas. Such chains of accidents have a greater propensi
ty to cause
damage than stand-alone accidents.
3.4 Summary of Applicable National Regulations
3.4.1 General description of major statutes
A comprehensive list of all the laws, rules, regulations, decrees and
other legal
instruments applicable to oil & gas exploration industry is annexed as Annexure
I.
3.4.2 Industry specific requirements
3.4.2.1 Standards for liquid effluent
A. Onshore facilities
Table 3-15: Standards for Marine Disposal
Parameters Concentration not to exceed
Onshore Facilities (for
marine disposal)
pH
Oil & grease
Suspended solids
BOD, 27C for 3 days
5.5-9.0
10 mg/l
100 mg/l
30 mg/l
For on-shore discharge of effluents, in addition to the standards prescribed abo
ve, proper
marine outfall has to be provided to achieve the individual pollutant concentrat
ion level in
sea water below their toxicity limits as given below, within a distan
ce of 50 metre from
the discharge point, in order to protect the marine aquatic life.
Table 3-16: Toxicity Limits

Parameter
Toxicity limit, mg/l
Chromium, as Cr
0.1
Copper, as Cu
0.05
Cyanide, as CN
0.005
Fluoride, as F
1.5
Lead, as Pb
0.05
Mercury, as Hg
0.01
Nickel, as Ni
0.1
Zinc, as Zn
0.1
2009
September
3-64
Oil and gas drilling and processing facilities, situated on land and away from s
aline water
sink, may opt either for disposal of treated water by onshore disposal or by reinjection in
abandoned well, which is allowed only below a depth of 1000m from the ground lev
el . In
case of re-injection in abandoned well the effluent have to comply only w.r.t. s
uspended
solids and oil & grease at 100 mg/l and 10 mg/l, respectively. For
onshore disposal, the
permissible limits are given below:
Table 3-17: Onshore Discharge Standards
S.No
Parameter
On-shore discharge standards
(Not to exceed)
1
pH
5.5 -9.0
2
Temperature
40C
3
Suspended solids
100 mg/l
4
Zinc
2 mg/l
5
BOD at 27Cfor 3 days
30 mg/l
6 COD 100mg/l
7
Chlorides
600 mg/l
8
Sulphates
1000 mg/l
9
Total Dissolved Solids
2100 mg/
10
% Sodium
60 mg/l
11
Oil & grease
10 mg/l
12
Phenolics
1.2 mg/l
13
Cyanides
0.2 mg/l
14
Fluorides
1.5 mg/l
15
Sulphides
2.0 mg/l
16
Chromium (hexavalent)
0.1 mg/l
17
Chromium (Total)
1.0 mg/l
18
Copper
0.2 mg/l
19
Lead
0.1 mg/l
20
Mercury
0.01 mg/l
21
Nickel
3.0 mg/l
B. Offshore facilities
For offshore discharge of effluents, the oil content of the treated effluent wit
hout dilution
shall not exceed 40 mg/l for 95% of the observation and shall never
exceed 100 mg/l.
Three 8hourly grab samples are required to be collected daily and the
average value of
soil and grease content of the three samples should comply with these standards.
2009
September
3-65
3.4.2.2 Guidelines for discharge of gaseous emissions
DG sets
DG sets at drill site as well as production station should conform with the norm
s notified
under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.
Elevated / ground flares
Cold venting of gases should never be resorted to under any circums
tances and all
gaseous emissions are to be flared.
All faring shall be done by elevated flares except where there is
any effect on crop
production in adjoining areas due to glaring. In such cases, one should adopt g
round
flaring with scientifically designed burners to reduce luminosity, heat,
smoke, etc.,
and also construct obstruction to make the flame obscure.
In case of elevated flaring the minimum stack height shall be 30 m
. the flare tip
should be scientifically designed with steam/air injection etc., to reduce smoke
.
For flaring sour gas the minimum stack height should be decided as below:
- (a) Calculate stack height by using the formula H = 14 Q 0.3
- Where, H is the height of stack in m and Q is the kg/ hr of SO
2
emitted.
- (b) Using the above H calculate the maximum GLC ofSO2 which should
not
exceed the CPCB limits.
- (c) In case the maximum GLC exceeds, stack height is to be increa
sed so as to
bring the GLC below the limits. However the minimum stack height shall not be
less than 30 m.
The maximum GLC caused by emission from various stacks shall be worked out and
in no case the maximum resultant GLC should exceed the CPCB
At the drill sites where oil-based muds are used,
d be channelized
and connected to elevated flares of minimum 30 m height
Ground flares
Ground flaring of all gases at surface flares pits
y as a last resort.
Following procedure is to be adopted to minimize effects of
limits.
oil vapours shoul
to be adopted onl
surface pit flaring.
The flare pit at GGS/ OCS and GCS should be made of RCC surrounde
d by a
permanent wall (made of refractory brick) of 5m height minimum, to re
duce the
radiation and glaring effects in adjoining areas.
Gas distribution system and planning of operation should be such tha
t flaring is
minimal.
Enclosed ground flare system should be used.
General
Ambient Air Quality around the drill site should be monitored at least once a we
ek for 3
months. In case the readings of various pollutants measured exceed the
limits, the
frequency of monitoring shall be reviewed and further investigations sh
ould be carried
out to find out the reasons and initiate mitigative measures.
The drilling exploration production industry must submit detail report to the go
vernment
the efforts already made and planned for the development of infrastruc
ture and
2009
September
3-66
prospective customers for maximizing utilization of associated gas withi
n a time frame
which may be fixed by Ministry of environment & forests (Government of India) an
d ? or
central or state Pollution Control Board.
3.4.2.3 Guideline for disposal of solid wastes
Disposal of Drill cuttings & Drilling Fluids for Onshore installations
Drill cuttings (DC) originating from on-shore or locations close to
shore line and
separated from water Base MUD (WBM) should be properly washed and unu
sable
drilling fluids (DF) such as WBM, Oil Base MUD (OBM), Synthetic Base
Mud
(SBM)) should be disposed
off in a well designed pit lined with im
pervious liner
located off-site or on-site. The disposal pit should be provided addit
ionally with
leachate collection system.
Design aspects of the impervious waste disposal pit, capping of disposal pit s
hould be
informed by the oil industry to SPCB at the time of obtaining consent.
Use of diesel base mud is prohibited. Only WBM should be used for
on-shore oil
drilling operations.
In case of any problem due to geological formation for drilling, lo
w toxicity OBM
having aromatic content < 1% should be used. If the operators intend
to use such
OBM to mitigate specific hole problem/SBM it should be intimated to MoEF/ SPCB.
The chemical additives used for the preparation of DF should have low toxicity
i.e. 96
hr LC50 > 30,000 mg/l as per mysid toxicity test conducted on locall
y available
sensitive sea species. The chemicals used (mainly organic constituents)
should be
biodegradable.
DC separated from OBM after washing should have oil content at < 1
% should be
used. If the operators intend to use such OBM to mitigate specific h
ole problem/
SBM it should be intimated to MoEF/SPCB.
The waste pit after it is filled up shall be covered with impervious liner, ov
er which, a
thick layer of native soil with proper top slope be provided
Low toxicity OBM should be made available at installation during drilling oper
ation.
Drilling wastewater including DC wash water should be collected in the disposa
l pit,
evaporated or treated and should comply with the notified standards fo
r onshore
disposal.
Barite used in preparation of DF shall not contain Hg> 1 mg/kg & Cd > 3 mg/kg.
Total material acquired for preparation of drill site must be restored after c
ompletion
of drilling operation leaving no waste material at site.
SPCB should
be informed
about the restoration work.
In case, environmentally acceptable methods for disposal of drill waste such as:
- injection to a formation through casing annulus, if conditions allow,
- land farming at suitable location
- bio-remediation
- incineration or
- solidification can be considered, in that case oil industry is requ
ired to submit
proposal to SPCB/ MoEF for approval
September
2009
4-1
4.
OPERATIONAL ASPECTS OF EIA
Prior environmental clearance process has been revised in the Notification issue
d on 14th
September, 2006 into following four major stages i.e. screening, scopin
g, public
consultation and appraisal.
Each stage has certain procedures to be
followed.
This
section deals with all the procedural and technical guidance for condu
cting making the
objective oriented EIA report, its review and decision making. Besides, the Not
ification
classified projects into Category A, which requires prior environmental
clearance from
MoEF and Category B from SEIAA/UTEIAA.
Consistency with Other Requirements
Clearance from other regulatory bodies is not a pre-requisite for ob
taining the prior
environmental clearance and all such clearances will be treated as par
allel statutory
requirements.
Consent for Establishment (CFE) and Prior Environmental Clearance are
two
different legal requirements, a project proponent is required to be ta
ken. Therefore,
these two activities can be initiated and proceeded with simultaneously.
If a project is covered by the provisions of CRZ and EIA Notificat
ions, then the
project proponent is required to take separate clearances from the con
cerned
authorities.
Rehabilitation and Resettlement issues need not be dealt under the E
IA Notification
as other statutory bodies deal with these issues. However, socio-economic studi
es be
considered while taking environmental decision
4.1 Coverage of Offshore and Onshore Oil and Gas Exploration,
Development & Production Industry under the Purview of Notification
All the new offshore and onshore oil and gas exploration, development
& production
industrial projects including expansion and modernization require prior
environmental
clearance from Central Government.
Based on pollution potential, these
projects are
classified in to Category A.
Note: Exploration surveys (not involving drilling) are exempted from th
e Notification
provided the concession areas have got previous clearance for physical surveys.
In case of Expansion or Modernization of the developmental Activity:
Any developmental activity, which was issued EIA clearance (existing
plant), when
undergoes expansion or modernization (change in process or technology)
with
increase in production capacity or any change in product mix beyond t
he list of
products cleared in the issued clearance is required to submit new application f
or EIA
clearance.
Any developmental activity, which is listed in Schedule of the EIA N
otification and
after expansion due to its total capacity, if falls under the purview of Categor
y A, then
such developmental activities requires clearance from MoEF.
Operational Aspects of EIA
2009
September
4-2
Figure 4-1: Prior Environmental Clearance Process for Activities
Falling Under Category A
4.1.1 Application for Prior Screening for Environmental Clearance
The project proponent, after identifying the site and carrying out a
pre-feasibility
study, is required to apply for the prior environmental clearance in
Form 1 given in
2009
September
4-3
Annexure II.
The proponent has to submit the filled in Form 1 alon
g with prefeasibility report and draft ToR for EIA studies to the concerned Aut
hority i.e.,
MoEF. Subsequent sections can be referred for the information on how to fill Fo
rm
1, contents of pre-feasibility report and sector-specific ToRs.
Prior environmental clearance is required before any construction work
, or
preparation of land is started on the identified site/project or activ
ity by the project
management, except for securing the land.
If the application is made for a specific developmental activity, which has an
inherent
area development component as a part of its project proposal and the
same project
also attract the construction and area development provisions under 8a and 8b of
the
Schedule, then the project will be seen as a developmental activity other than 8
a and
8b of the Schedule.
4.1.2 Siting Guidelines
These are the guidelines, stakeholders may consider while siting the d
evelopmental
projects, to minimize the associated possible environmental impacts.
W
hile in some
situations, completely sticking to these guidelines is difficult and un
warranted, therefore
these guidelines may be kept in the background, as far as possible,
while taking the
decisions.
Areas Preferably be Avoided
In siting industries, care should be taken to minimize the adverse impact of the
industries
on the immediate neighborhood as well as distant places. Some of the
natural life
sustaining systems and some specific land uses are sensitive to industrial impac
ts because
of the nature and extent of fragility. With a view to protect such sites, the in
dustries may
maintain the following distances as far as possible from the specific areas list
ed
Ecologically and/or otherwise sensitive areas (villages, etc.): Prefera
bly: 5 km;
depending on the geo-climatic conditions the requisite distance may be
decided
appropriately by the agency.
Coastal Areas: Preferably km away from high tide line.
Flood Plain of the Riverine System: Preferably km away from flood
plain or
modified flood plain affected by dam in the upstream or by flood control systems
.
Transport/Communication System preferably km away from highway and railway.
Major Settlements (3,00,000 population): Distance from major settlements is di
fficult
to maintain because of urban sprawl. At the time of siting of the i
ndustry if the
notified limit of any major settlement is found to be within 50 km., from the pr
oject
boundary, the spatial direction of growth of the settlement for at least a decad
e must
be assessed. Subsequently, the industry shall be sited at least 25 km
from the
projected growth boundary of the settlement.
Note:
Ecological and/or otherwise sensitive areas include (i) Religious and H

istoric Places; (ii)
Archaeological Monuments (e.g. identified zone around Taj Mahal); (iii)
Scenic Areas; (iv) Hill
Resorts; (v) Beach Resorts; (vi) Health Resorts; (vii) Coastal Areas r
ich in Corals, Mangroves,
Breeding Grounds of Specific Species; (viii) Estuaries rich in Mangrove
s, Breeding grounds of
Specific Species; (ix) Gulf Areas; (x) Biosphere Reserves; (xi) Nationa
l Parks and Sanctuaries;
(xii) Natural lakes, Swamps; (xiii) Seismic Zones; (xiv) Tribal Settlements; (xv
) Areas of Scientific
2009
September
4-4
and Geological Interest; (xvi) Defence Installations, specially those of
security importance and
sensitive to pollution; (xvii) Border Areas (International) and (xviii) Air Port
s.
Pre-requisite: State and Central Governments are required to identify s
uch areas on a priority
basis.
General Siting Factors
In any particular selected site, the following factors must also be recognized
.
No forest land shall be converted into non-forest activity for the
sustenance of the
industry (Ref: Forest Conversation Act, 1980).
No prime agricultural land shall be converted into industrial site.
Land acquired shall sufficiently large to provide space for appropria
te treatment of
waste water still left for treatment after maximum possible reuse and
recycle.
Reclaimed (treated) wastewater shall be used to raise green belt and
to create water
body for aesthetics, recreation, if possible. For industry having odors
problem, shall
have sufficiently thick green belt surrounding the battery limit of the industri
es.
The green belt between two adjoining large scale industries shall be one kilom
eter.
Enough space should be provided for storage of recyclable solid wastes so that
these
could be available for possible reuse.
Lay out of the industry that may come up in the area must conform to the lands
cape
of the area without affecting the scenic features of that place.
Associated township of the industry may be created at a space having physiogra
phic
barrier between the industry and the township.
Each industry is required to maintain three ambient air quality meas
uring stations
within 120 degree angle between stations
4.2 Scoping for EIA Studies
Scoping exercise is taken-up soon after the project contours are defin
ed. The primary
purpose of scoping is to identify concerns and issues which are impor
tant to project
decisions. Besides, scoping defines EIA study requirements and boundaries. The
results
of the scoping exercise form the basis for the rest of the EIA process.
Scoping refers to the process by which the EAC, including applications
for expansion
and/or modernization of existing projects, determine ToR for EIA studie
s addressing all
relevant environmental concerns for the preparation of an EIA Report f
or a particular
project.
Project proponent shall submit the application (Form 1, pre-feasibilit
y report and
proposed ToR for EIA Studies) to the MoEF. The MoEF consults the EAC to reply
to the proponent. The EAC reviews the application form, pre-feasibility
report and
proposed draft ToR by the proponent and make necessary additions/deletions to ma
ke
it a comprehensive ToR that suits the statutory requirements for conducting th
e EIA
studies.
- Precisely, the pre-feasibility report summarizes the project details
and also the
likely environmental concerns based on the secondary information, which will be
availed for filling the Form 1.
- From the pre-feasibility report and the Form 1, valued environmental componen
ts
(VECs) may be identified for a given project (the receiving environmen
t/social
2009
September
4-5
components, which are likely to get effected due to the project
operations/activities).
- Once the project details from the pre-feasibility report & Form 1; and VECs
are
identified, a matrix establishing the interactions which can lead to t
he
effects/impacts could be developed (Qualitative analysis).
- For each identified possible effect in the matrix, significance anal
ysis could be
conducted to identify the impacts, which needs to be further studied (quantitati
ve
analysis) in the subsequent EIA studies. All such points will become the part o
f
the draft ToR to be proposed by the project proponent along with the application
form.
- The information to be provided in pre-feasibility report, guidelines
for filling
Form 1 and guidelines for developing draft ToR is summarized in the subsequent
sections.
- Authority consults the respective EAC to reply to the proponent. Th
e EAC
reviews the application form, pre-feasibility report and proposed draft ToR by t
he
proponent and make necessary additions/deletions to make it a comprehen
sive
ToR that suits the statutory requirements for conducting the EIA studies.
A site visit by sub-committees of EAC will be planned, only if considered nece
ssary
by the EAC with the written approval of the Chairperson.
Project pr
oponent will
facilitate such site visits of the sub-committees.
EAC shall provide an opportunity to the project proponent for presen
tation and
discussions on the proposed project and related issues as well as the proposed T
oR for
EIA studies.
If the State Government desires to present their views
on any specific
project in the scoping stage, it can depute an officer for the same at the scopi
ng stage
to EAC, as an invitee but not as a member of EAC. However, non-appearance of th
e
project proponent before EAC at any stage will not be a ground for
rejection of the
application for the prior environmental clearance.
In case of a new or expansion project in an identified problem area by the CPC
B, the
MoEF may present their views, if any at the stage of scoping, to the EAC.
The final set of ToRs for EIA studies shall be conveyed to the proponent by th
e EAC
within sixty days of the receipt of Form 1 and Pre-feasibility report. If the f
inalized
ToR for EIA studies are not conveyed to the proponent within sixty d
ays of the
receipt of Form 1, the ToR for EIA studies suggested by the proponen
t shall be
deemed as the final and will be approved for the EIA studies.
The final ToR for EIA studies shall be displayed on the MoEF website.
Applications for prior environmental clearance may be rejected by the
concerned
Authority based on the recommendation of the EAC at this stage itself
.
In case of
such rejection, the decision together with reasons for the same shall be communi
cated
to the proponent in writing within sixty days of the receipt of the application.
The final EIA report and the other relevant documents submitted by
the applicant
shall be scrutinized by the MoEF strictly with reference to the approved ToR for
EIA
studies.
4.2.1 Pre-feasibility Report
The pre-feasibility report should include, but not limited to highlight the prop
osed project
information, keeping in view the environmental sensitivities of the sel
ected site,
technology options, efficiency and availability.
The information requir
ed in the preOperational Aspects of EIA
2009
September
4-6
feasibility report varies from case to case even in the same sector
depending upon the

local environmental setting within which the plant is located.
Howeve
r, the
environmental information which may be furnished in the pre-feasibility
report for
evolving ToR for EIA studies include:
Description of the project, including in particular:
- a description of the physical characteristics of the whole project and the la
nd-use
requirements during the construction and operational phases,
- a description of the main characteristics of the production processes, for in
stance,
nature and quantity of the materials used,
- an estimate, by type and quantity, of expected residues and emissions (water,
air
and soil pollution, noise, vibration, light, heat, radiation, etc.,) resulting f
rom the
operation of the proposed project.
An outline of the main alternatives studied by the developer and an indication
of the
main reasons for this choice, taking into account the environmental effects.
A description of the aspects of the environment likely to be significantly aff
ected by
the proposed project, including, in particular, population, fauna, flora, soil,
water, air,
climatic factors, material assets, including the architectural and archa
eological
heritage, landscape and the inter-relationship between the above factors.
A description of the likely significant effects of the proposed proj
ect on the
environment resulting from:
- the existence of the project,
- the use of natural resources Specific consumptions,
- the emission of pollutants, the creation of nuisances and the elimination of
waste,
and the description by the developer of the forecasting methods used to assess t
he
effects on the environment.
A description of the measures envisaged to prevent, reduce and where possible
offset
any significant adverse effects on the environment
A non-technical summary of the information provided under the above headings.
An indication of any difficulties (technical deficiencies or lack of
know-how)
encountered by the developer in compiling the required information.
Besides, depending on the scope defined in the pre-feasibility report some pre-f
easibility
reports are based on various studies, data collection, etc., to address in detai
l the concern
as technical and economical analysis and detailed feasibility level des
ign of equipment,
process optimization, economic, financial, social and environmental inves
tigations, cost
estimates with detailed bill of quantities (BOQ). The components identified her
e focuses
on the requirements of Scoping for EIA study.
Annexure III can be
referred for
preferable structure of the pre-feasibility report.
4.2.2 Guidance for filling information in Form 1
The information given in specifically designed pre-feasibility report fo

r this
developmental activity may also be availed for filling Form 1.
Form 1 is designed to help users identify the likely significant envi
ronmental effects of
proposed projects during scoping. There are two stages for providing informatio
n under
two columns:
2009
September
4-7
First - identifying the relevant project activities from the list gi
ven in column 2 of
Form 1. Start with the checklist of questions set out below and complete Column
3
by answering:
- Yes - if the activity is likely to occur during implementation of the project
;
- No - if it is not expected to occur;
- May be - if it is uncertain at this stage whether it will occur or not.
Second For each activity for which the answer in Column 3 is Yes the next step i
s
to refer to the fourth column which quantifies the volume of activity which coul
d be
judged as significant impact on the local environmental characteristics,
and identify
the areas that could be affected by that activity during construction
/operation /
decommissioning of the project.
The Form 1 requires information withi
n 15 km
around the project, whereas actual study area for EIA studies will be as prescri
bed by
EAC. Information will be needed about the surrounding VECs in order to complete
this Form 1.
4.2.3 Identification of Appropriate Valued Environmental Components
VECs are components of the natural resources and human world that are
considered
valuable and are likely to be affected by the project activities. Value may be a
ttributed for
economic, social, environmental, aesthetic or ethical reasons.
VECs re
present the
investigative focal point for further EIA process.
The indirect and/or
cumulative effects
can be concerned with indirect, additive or even synergistic effects d
ue to other projects
or activities or even induced developments on the same environmental c
omponents as
would be considered direct effects.
But such impacts tend to involve
larger scale VECs
such as within entire region, river basins or watersheds; and, broad
social and economic
VECs such as quality of life and the provincial economy. Once VECs are identifi
ed then
appropriate indicators are selected for impact assessments on the respective VEC
s.
4.2.4 Methods for Identification of Impacts

There are number of factors which will influence the approach adopted for the as
sessment
of direct, indirect, cumulative impacts, etc. for a particular project. The met
hod should be
practical and suitable for the project given the data, time and financial resour
ces available.
However, the method adopted should be able to provide a meaningful co
nclusion from
which it would be possible to develop, where necessary, mitigation mea
sures and
monitoring. Key points to consider when choosing the method(s) include:
Nature of the impact(s)
Availability and quality of data
Availability of resources (time, finance and staff)
The method chosen should not be complex, but should aim at presenting the resu
lts in a
way that can be easily understood by the developer, decision maker an
d the public.
A
comparative analysis of major impact identification methods is given in
the following
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1: Advantages and Disadvantages of Impact Identification Methods
Description Advantages Disadvantages
Checklists
Annotate the environmental
features that need to be
Simple to
understand and
Do not distinguish
between direct and
2009
4-8
addressed when identifying
the impacts of activities in
the project
use
Good for site
selection and
priority setting
Simple ranking
and weighting
indirect impacts
Do not link action
and impact
The process of
incorporating
values can be
controversial
Matrices
Grid like table that identify
the interaction between
September
project activities (along one

axis) and environmental
characteristics (along other
axis)
Entries are made in the cells
which highlights impact
severity in the form of
symbols or numbers or
descriptive comments
Link action to
impact
Good method
for displaying
EIA results
Difficult to
distinguish direct
and indirect
impacts
Significant
potential for
double-counting
of impacts
Networks
Illustrate cause effect
relationship of project
activities and environmental
characteristics
Useful in identifying
secondary impacts
Useful for establishing
impact hypothesis and other
structured science based
approaches to EIA
Link action to
impact
Useful in
simplified form
for checking for
second order
impacts
Handles direct
and indirect
impacts
Can become very
complex if used
beyond simplified
version
Overlays
Maps the impacts spatially
and display them pictorially
Useful for comparing site
and planning alternatives
for routing linear
developments
Can address cumulative
effects
Information incentive
Easy to
understand
Good to display
method
Good siting tool
Address only
direct impacts
Do not address
impact duration or
probability
GIS
Maps the impacts spatially
and display them pictorially
Useful for comparing site
and planning alternatives
for routing linear
developments
Can address cumulative
effects
Information incentive
Easy to
understand
Good to display
method
Good siting tool
Excellent for
impact
identification
and analysis
Do not address
impact duration or
probability
Heavy reliance on
knowledge and
data
Often complex
and expensive
Expert
System
Assist diagnosis, problem
solving and decision
making
Needs inputs from user by
answering systematically
developed questions to
identify impacts and
determine their mitigability
and significance
Excellent for
impact
identification
and analysis
Good for
experimenting
Heavy reliance on
knowledge and
data
Often complex
and expensive
2009
September
4-9
Information intensive, high
investment methods of
analysis
The project team made an attempt to construct an impact matrix considering major
project
activities (generic operations) and stage-specific likely impacts which is given
in Table 42.
While the impact matrix is each project-specific, Table 4-2 may facilitate the s
takeholders
in identifying a set of components and phase-specific project activities for det
ermination
of likely impacts.
However, the location-specific concerns may vary f
rom case to case,
therefore, the components even without likely impacts are also retained in the m
atrix for
the location-specific reference.

2009
4-10
Table 4-2: Matrix of Impacts
PHASE I PHASE II
September
Phase III Phase IV
Pre Commissioning Stage Construction / Establishment Operation and

Maintenance
Decommissioning
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
E
N
V
I
R
O
N
M
E
N
T
C
O
M
P
O
N
E
N
T
D
e
t
a
i
l
e
d
T
o
p
o
g
r
a
p
h
i
c
S
u
r
v
e
y
L
a
n
d
A
c
q
u
i
r
e
m
e
n
t
S
i
t
e
C
l
e
a
r
i
n
g
B
u
r
n
i
n
g
o
f
w
a
s
t
e
s
,
r
e
f
u
s
e
a
n
d
c
l
e
a
r
e
d
v
e
g
e
t
a
t
i
o
n
S
i
t
e
P
r
e
p
a
r
a
t
i
o
n
/
C
h
a
n
g
e
i
n
T
o
p
o
g
r
a
p
h
y
F
i
e
l
d
G
e
o
l
o
g
i
c
a
l
A
s
s
e
s
s
m
e
n
t
s
C
i
v
i
l
w
o
r
k
s
s
u
c
h
a
s
e
a
r
t
h
m
o
v
i
n
g
a
n
d
b
u
i
l
d
i
n
g
o
f
s
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
s
i
n
c
l
u
d
i
n
g
t
e
m
p
o
r
a
r
y
s
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
s
H
e
a
v
y
E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t
o
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
s
D
i
s
p
o
s
a
l
o
f
c
o
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
w
a
s
t
e
s
G
e
n
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
s
e
w
a
g
e
I
n
f
l
u
x
o
f
c
o
n
s
t
r
u
c
t
i
o
n
w
o
r
k
e
r
s
D
e
f
o
r
e
s
t
a
t
i
o
n
T
r
a
n
s
p
o
r
t
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
D
r
i
l
l
i
n
g
a
n
d
C
a
s
i
n
g
M
o
v
e
m
e
n
t
o
f
F
u
e
l
R
e
s
e
r
v
e
s
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
o
f
p
o
w
e
r
s
o
u
r
c
e
a
n
d
g
e
n
e
r
a
t
o
r
f
a
c
i
l
i
t
i
e
s
S
t
o
r
a
g
e
o
f
c
h
e
m
i
c
a
l
s
/
f
l
a
m
m
a
b
l
e
s
W
a
s
t
e
m
a
n
a
g
e
m
e
n
t
S
t
o
r
a
g
e
a
n
d
H
a
n
d
l
i
n
g
o
f
C
r
u
d
e
O
i
l
D
e
m
o
l
i
s
h
i
n
g
c
i
v
i
l
a
n
d
m
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l
s
t
r
u
c
t
u
r
e
s
D
i
s
p
o
s
a
l
o
f
d
e
m
o
l
i
s
h
e
d
m
a
t
e
r
i
a
l
C
a
p
p
i
n
g
o
f
w
e
l
l
h
e
a
d
s
/
d
r
i
l
l
s
Erosion Risks
Contamination
Soil Soil Quality
*
P
*
*
*
*
*
*
* *
*
H
Y
S
I
C
A
L
Resources Fuels/ Electricity
Parameters/
Factors
Project
Activities
2009
4-11
PHASE I PHASE II Phase III Phase IV
September

Maintenance
Decommissioning
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
Construction materialstone, aggregates
*
Land especially
undeveloped or
agricultural land
Interruption or Alteration
of River Beds
*
Alteration of Hydraulic
Regime
Alteration of surface runoff and interflow
*
Alteration of aquifers
*
*
Water Water quality

* *
Air Air quality
*
*
Noise Noise
Effect on grass & flowers
Effect on trees & shrubs
*
*
* *
* *
*
* *
* *
Effect on farmland
Endangered species
B
I
*
*
O
L
O
G
I
C
A
L
Terrestrial
Flora
Habitat removal

2009
4-12
September

Maintenance
Decommissioning
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
Contamination of habitats
*
* *
Aquatic biota
Reduction of aquatic
biota
*
Fragmentation of
terrestrial habitats
*
Disturbance of habitats
by noise or vibration
*
Terrestrial
Fauna Reduction of Biodiversity
*
*
Creation of new
economic activities
*
Commercial value of
properties
*
*
Conflict due to
negotiation and/
compensation payments
Generation of temporary
and permanent jobs
* * * *
Effect on crops
* *
S
O
C
I
*
*
A
L
Economy
Reduction of farmland
productivity
*
2009
4-13
September

Maintenance
Decommissioning
1
2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
25
Income for the state and
private sector
*
* *
* *
Training in new
technologies
*
* *
*
Education
Training in new skills to
workers
*
* * * *
*
*
Political Conflicts
* * * *
* *
Public Order
Unrest, Demonstrations
& Social conflicts
*
Infrastructure
and Services
Conflicts with projects of
urban, commercial or
Industrial development
* * * * *
*
*
Increase in Crime
Security and
Safety Accidents caused
* * *
Health Health
* *
Land use
*
Recreation
Aesthetics and human
interest
* * *
Cultural Cultural status
*
* *
* * *
* *
*
*

2009
September
4-14
Note:
1. The above table represents a model for likely impacts, which will
have to be arrived case-tocase basis considering VECs and significance analysis (Ref Section 2.9).
2. Project activities are shown as indicative for a given sector. Howeve
r, in Form 1 (application
for EIA Clearance), for any question for which answer is Yes, then the
corresponding activity
shall reflect in project activities. Similarly parameters/factors will also
be changed within a
component in order to reflect the target species of prime concern.
4.2.5 Testing the significance of impacts
Certain broad criteria given under should be kept in view while providing the in
formation
in column four of the Form 1
1. Will there be a large change in environmental conditions?
2. Will new features be out-of-scale with the existing environment?
3. Will the effect be unusual in the area or particularly complex?
4. Will the effect extend over a large area?
5. Will there be any potential for trans-frontier impact?
6. Will many people be affected?
7. Will many receptors of other types (fauna and flora, businesses, f
acilities) be
affected?
8. Will valuable or scarce features or resources be affected?
9. Is there a risk that environmental standards will be breached?
10. Is there a risk that protected sites, areas, features will be affected?
11. Is there a high probability of the effect occurring?
12. Will the effect continue for a long time?
13. Will the effect be permanent rather than temporary?
14. Will the impact be continuous rather than intermittent?
15. If it is intermittent will it be frequent rather than rare?
16. Will the impact be irreversible?
17. Will it be difficult to avoid, or reduce or repair or compensate for the ef
fect?
For each Yes answer in column 3, the nature of effects and reasons fo
r it should be
recorded in column 4. The questions are designed so that an Yes answer in column
3,
will generally point towards the need for analyzing for the significan
ce and requirement
for conducting impact assessment for the effect.
September
2009
4-15
4.2.6 Terms of reference for EIA studies
ToR for EIA studies in respect of the offshore and onshore oil and
gas exploration,
development and production industry may include, but not limited to the followin
g:
4.2.6.1 Offshore
1. Executive summary of the project giving a prima facie idea of the objectives
of the
proposal, use of resources, justification, etc.
In addition, it shoul
d provide a
compilation of EIA report, EMP and the post-project monitoring plan in brief.
Project description
2. Justification for selecting proposed capacity.
3. Geographic information of the site Latitude/Longitude, total area e
nvisaged for
setting up of project, seismic zone classification, etc.
4. Maps at appropriate scales with proper labels and legends to illus
trate the general
settings of project-related development sites as well as surrounding areas likel
y to be
environmentally affected.
5. Details on the implementation of the project in phases i.e., Seismic phase,
exploratory
drilling phase and development/exploitation.
6. Details on seismic equipments and vessel operations for seismic operations.
7. Details on support infrastructure, vessel and air traffic in the study area.
8. Details on geological, geophysical and seismic surveys.
9. Details on bathymetry such as nature and depth of seabed, etc.
10. Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its processes
and operations,
along with material and energy inputs and outputs (material, water and
energy
balance).
11. Details on storage of chemicals at the site and measures to prevent hazards
.
12. Details on solid waste management for drill cuttings, drilling mud
and oil sludge,
produced sand, radioactive materials, other hazardous materials, etc. in
cluding its
disposal options during all project phases.
13. Details on wastewater generation, treatment and utilization/discharge
for produced
water, cooling waters, other wastewaters, etc. during all project phases.
14. Details on estimation and computation of air emissions (such as n
itrogen oxides,
sulphur oxides, carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, VOCs, etc.) resulting fro
m flaring,
DG sets, combustion, etc. during all project phases.
15. Details on oil spills.
September
2009
4-16
16. Identify the Petroleum and Natural Gas Ministries regarding the fulfillment
of license
requirements.
17. Details on the stratigraphic structure, fracture patterns and seismic histo
ry (if any) of
the area.
18. Details on projected energy requirement for each phase of the development.
19. Details on change in shoreline due to installation of pipelines and related
facilities at
the shore.
20. Details on ports and harbors/possibility of expansion of Port faci
lities due to project
activities. (Relevant ToR points from TGM for Ports and Harbors may be referred.
)
21. Details on trans-boundary issues, if any.
Description of the environment

22. Baseline data including different components of environment viz. ai
r, noise, water
and biology from the study area as mentioned in this manual.
23. Details on climate, meteorology including wind patterns, temperature, rainf
all, waves,
tides, currents, cyclone, earthquakes, etc. in the study area.
24. Details on establishment of baseline on the air quality of the a
reas immediately
affected by the exploratory drilling and also particularly with referen
ce to hydrogen
sulphide and sulphur dioxide and background levels of hydrocarbons and VOCs.
25. Details on establishment of baseline on the water resources of th
e area affected or
potentially impacted by the activities in the various phases of the p
roject. This
baseline should include water quality assessment of available waters so
urces of the
project site and zone of influence. The baseline should potentially include par
ameters
such as: Total Nitrate, Salinity, DO, COD, BOD, pH, Sulphates, Hardnes
s,
Phosphates, Conductivity, Heavy metals (Total metals, mercury, lead, cop
per etc.),
TDS, Hydrocarbons and Arsenic.
26. Quantify noise and vibration levels to be expected from seismic a
ctivities and
potential exploratory drilling.
27. Details on bathymetry including sea depth, seawater quality, seaflo
or relief,
navigational information, digital terrain model, etc.
28. Details of the basic physical environment of the study area.
29. Studies on flora and fauna including the main habitat types with
list of species of
flora and fauna and their conservation value, giving particular attention to any
species
protected under law.
30. Fisheries study w.r.t. benthos and marine organic material and coastal fish
eries.
31. Details on the nature and volumes of liquid waste (including sewa
ge if applicable),
and wastewater and other sources of runoff to be generated by the project activi
ties.
September
2009
4-17
32. Details on the nature and volumes of solid wastes, including seismic progra
mme byproducts, drilling mud, drill cuttings etc., to be generated by the project acti
vities.
33. Identification of CRZ area: A CRZ map duly authenticated by one of the aut
horized
agencies demarcating LTL, HTL, CRZ area, location of the project and
associate
facilities w.r.t. CRZ, coastal features such as mangroves, if any.
T
he route of the
pipeline, etc., passing through CRZ, if any, should also be demarcated
. The
recommendations of the State Coastal Management Authority for the activities to

be
taken up in the CRZ. The CRZ map in 1:10000 scale in general cases and in 1:500
0
scale for specific observations.
34. If ecologically sensitive attributes fall with in 10 km from the
project boundary,
proponent shall describe the sensitivity (distance, area and significance) and p
ropose
the additional points based on significance for review and acceptance
by the EAC.
Ecological sensitive attributes include:
- Breeding grounds
- Core zone of biosphere reserve
- Mangrove area
- Areas with threatened (rare, vulnerable, endangered) flora/fauna
- Protected corals
35. Details on hazardous or toxic material or substance to be used d
uring either seismic
testing or potential exploratory drilling.
36. Capital quantity of dredging material, disposal and its impact on aquatic l
ife.
Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures
37. Details on potential impacts of seismic and exploratory drilling a
ctivities on water
quality within the study area.
38. Details on potential impacts of project activities on the air emi
ssions resulting from
39. Details on potential impacts on the water quality due to the act
ivities in the various
phases of the project.
40. Details on noise and vibration levels quantification that is expec
ted from seismic
activities and potential exploratory drilling and specify any potential impacts
of these
on the surrounding environment including human habitation.
41. Details on odor sources (such as hydrogen sulphide, mercaptants, etc.) and
mitigation
measures taken to control the odour.
42. Details on potential impacts of project activities on the aquatic
fauna and flora for
each phase of the project.
43. Details on impact of spills and discharge of crude oil in the surrounding a
reas.
44. Details on impacts of drilling waste such as drilling mud, additives (polym
ers, oxygen
scavengers, biocides, surfactants), lubricants, diesel oil, emulsifying a
gents,
flocculating agents, etc. and its treatment and disposal options to control the
impacts.
September
2009
4-18
45. Details on environmental impacts of the decommissioning of oil and gas inst
allations,
drill cuttings, etc.
46. Describe mitigation measures including an EMP to be implemented to

reduce or
offset the adverse impacts of seismic testing, potential exploratory dr
illing and
exportation. Also, include measures to be taken during decommissioning phase.
47. Prepare outline designs for any proposals and give costs for impl
ementing the
mitigation measures.
48. Identify the preferred option(s) for waste management/disposal metho
d based on
environmental grounds, including necessary infrastructure.
Specify any
residual
impacts of waste management, their significance, and any mitigation measures t
o be
undertaken.
49. Identify mitigation measures to reduce or limit the potential impa
ct on the
surrounding environment and zone of influence (humans and wildlife).
50. Details on occupational health and safety of employees and workers.
51. Details on oceanographic changes (such as induced currents, waves,
tidal currents,
water quality, etc.) due to infrastructure development for project activities.
52. Recommend precise mitigation measures based on the specific option selected
, for the
proper management of all types of traffic close to and within the project area.
These
mitigation measures must include recommendations for protection features
against
erosion, and other potential pollution to the environment as well as social and
human
impacts.
53. Describe the potential social, economic and cultural impacts of co
nducting the
proposed activity. Characterize the impacts in terms of type (beneficia
l or adverse),
magnitude (high, medium or low), direct/indirect, duration (short, mediu
m and long
term, sporadic), avoidance and reversibility.
54. Typical measures that could be considered for the mitigation of i
mpacts as given in
this manual may be referred.
55. Impact of the activities to be taken up in the CRZ area includi
ng jetty and
desalination plant etc., should be integrated into the EIA report; how
ever, action
should be taken to obtain separate clearance from the competent authority as may
be
applicable to such activities.
Analysis of Alternative resources and technologies
56. Evaluate options for the provision of suitable access for each of
the components of
the exploration phase.
57. Select preferred option for the provision for these components. Th
is may need to
examine construction materials (types, sources, volumes, transportation) and met
hods
in relation to their environmental impacts.
58. Evaluate alternative options for meeting project needs. For these
options, it may be
necessary to investigate:

September
2009
4-19
- fuel storage (where relevant)
- transportation (where relevant)
- health and safety
- significance of any pollution that may result from energy generation; and
- mitigation measures
59. Select the preferred option for energy generation. Again, this sho
uld be based on
environmental grounds, and should specify the residual impacts of gener
ation of the
preferred option, their significance and the mitigation measures, which
will be
undertaken.
60. Evaluate alternative options for the collection, treatment, recyclin
g (if appropriate),
and disposal of these wastes. Identify any chemicals planned for use in the trea
tment
or management of these wastes.
61. Details on improved technologies such as remote sensing and GIS, etc. in oi
l and gas
exploration.
Environmental Monitoring Program
62. Details on environmental monitoring program during surveying, drilli
ng and
exploration.
63. Details on use of advanced monitoring technologies such as remote
sensing, etc., if
any.
64. Identify and develop a water quality monitoring program able to detect any
change in
groundwater or surface water quality that could impact:
- Public health
- Forest, wetland and adjacent aquatic habitats; and
- Flora and Fauna (including endangered or threatened species) in project area
and
zone of influence.
65. Develop and Implement an air quality monitoring programme to monitor the r
elease
of toxic emission in particular SO
2
, CO and NO
2
and their potential impacts on Public
Health, wildlife health and environment.
66. Appropriate monitoring network has to be designed and proposed for
regulatory
compliance and to assess the residual impacts, if any.
Additional Studies
67. Details on existing socio-economic conditions with a brief overview
of the socioeconomic background to the study area, including population, employment and trav
el
patterns.
68. Identify patterns of land use within the corridor of the proposed
route, and record

these on a map with annotation.
69. Consult with relevant local stakeholders (village councils, local community
, and local
NGOs) within the direct project area, to identify their economical, environmenta
l and
social concerns about the proposal.
September
2009
4-20
70. Archaeology - Consult with the Archeology Department to conduct a
general
assessment of the area to determine any features of archaeological or
cultural
importance and provide recommendations for the protection of any features.
71. Public Interest - Report on the views and concerns of directly affected com
munities,
local NGOs and relevant government departments/agencies regarding the
development of the project.
72. Details on risk assessment including identification of hazards, pro
posed measures,
disaster management plan, contingency plan, emergency response plan, etc..
Environmental Management Plan
73. Outline of the overall management structure anticipated for the proposed ac
tivities.
74. Details on compliance verification of the emissions of the environmental co
mponents
(such as emissions limits, discharge limits, noise limits, odor, etc.) with the
national/
international standards.
75. Description of the pertinent regulations, standards and policies, a
t the local and
national levels governing environmental quality, health, safety and prot
ection of
sensitive areas.
These could include cultural resources, protection of
endangered or
threatened species, infrastructure development and land use control that may hav
e an
impact on the proposed development.
76. Specify options for refueling of vehicles and identify best practi
ce methods for
eliminating spills and maximizing health and safety.
77. Identify emergency preparation and applicable management measures fo
r the
proposed activities dealing with the following eventualities:
- Oil spills
- Hurricanes
- Floods
- Fires
- Blow out plan
- Hydrogen sulfide safety (including other types of gases)
- Employee training
78. Details on post project closure and monitoring programme.
4.2.6.2 Onshore
1. Executive summary of the project giving a prima facie idea of the objectives
of the
proposal, use of resources, justification, etc.

In addition, it shoul
d provide a
compilation of EIA report, EMP and the post-project plan in brief.
Project Description
2. Justification for selecting the proposed capacity.
September
2009
4-21
3. Geographic information of the site Latitude/Longitude, total area e
nvisaged for
setting up of project, seismic zone classification, topography, etc.
4. Land requirement for the project including its optimization, break
up of land
requirement and its availability.
5. Maps at appropriate scales with proper labels and legends to illus
trate the general
y to be
exploratory
drilling phase and development/exploitation.
7. Complete process flow diagram describing each unit, its processes a
nd operations,
along with material and energy inputs and outputs (material, water and
energy
balance).
8. Details on support infrastructure in the study area.
9. Details on geological, geophysical and seismic surveys.
10. Details on outline of the overall management structure anticipated
for the proposed
activities.
exploratory
drilling phase and development/exploitation
12. Details on solid waste management for drill cuttings, drilling mud
and oil sludge,
produced sand, radioactive materials, other hazardous materials, etc. in
cluding its
disposal options during all project phases.
13. Details on wastewater generation, treatment and utilization/discharge
for produced
water, cooling waters, other wastewaters, etc. during all project phases.
14. Details on estimation and computation of air emissions (such as n
itrogen oxides,
sulphur oxides, carbon monoxide, hydrocarbons, VOCs, etc.) resulting fro
m flaring,
DG sets, combustion, etc. during all project phases.
15. Identify the Petroleum and Natural Gas Ministries regarding the fulfillment
of license
requirements.
16. Details on the stratigraphic structure, fracture patterns and seismic histo
ry (if any) of
the area.
17. Details on projected energy requirement for each phase of the development.
Description of the Environment
18. Baseline data including different components of environment viz. ai
r, noise, water
and biology from the study area as mentioned in this manual.
19. Details on demography and socio-economic status in the study area.
September
2009
4-22
20. Details on establishment of baseline on the air quality of the a
reas immediately
affected by the exploratory drilling and also particularly with referen
ce to hydrogen
sulphide and sulphur dioxide and background levels of hydrocarbons (HC)
and
VOCs.
21. Details on establishment of baseline on the water resources of the area. Th
is baseline
should include water quality assessment of available waters sources of the proje
ct site
and zone of influence.
The baseline should potentially include parame
ters such as:
Total Nitrate, Salinity, DO, COD, BOD, pH, Sulphates, Hardness, Phospha
tes,
Conductivity, Heavy metals (Total metals, mercury, lead, copper etc.),
TDS,
Hydrocarbons and Arsenic.
22. Quantify noise and vibration levels to be expected from seismic a
ctivities and
potential exploratory drilling.
23. Details of the basic physical environment of the study are. This should inc
lude:
- Topography: including degree of slopes, drainage patterns around proj
ect site,
and flood hazard
- Map outlining the boundaries of area of influence in relation to p
rotected areas,
surrounding villages, roads, etc.
- Climate, Hydrology and Meteorology: including rainfall average per ye
ar,
prevailing wind patterns
- Geology: description of the characteristics of landform, land surface
including
exposed rocks, types of unconsolidated materials sediments, rivers, tributaries,
if
they can be determined by field mapping
- Soils: specific soil types ,soil fertility, agricultural value
24. Land use of the proposed study area as well as the project area
notified industrial
area, residential/ institutional/nearest village/ township/ locality/ hous
ing society,
grazing, mangroves, no development area, national parks, sanctuary, marches, sur
face
water bodies, roads, protected areas, agriculture, tourism, etc. based
on the satellite
imagery.
25. Maps at appropriate scales and with proper labels and legends to illustrate
the general
y to be
26. Air Quality - Details on baseline of air quality of the areas i
mmediately affected by
the exploratory drilling.
27. Physical description of surrounding water bodies including creeks and river
s.
28. Studies on flora and fauna including the main habitat types with
list of species of
flora and fauna and their conservation value, giving particular attention to any
species
protected under law
29. Details on baseline on the current presence of hydrocarbons and heavy metal
s in the
soils.
30. If any incompatible land use attributes fall with in 10 km from the project
boundary,
ropose
by the EAC.
Incompatible land use attributes include:
September
2009
4-23
- Public water supply areas from rivers/surface water bodies, from groundwater
- Scenic areas/tourism areas/hill resorts
- Religious places, pilgrim centers that attract over 10 lakh pilgrims a year
- Protected tribal settlements (notified tribal areas where industrial
activity is not
permitted)
- Monuments of national significance, World Heritage Sites
- Cyclone, Tsunami prone areas (based on last 25 years)
- Airport areas
- Any other feature as specified by the State or local government and other fea
tures
as locally applicable, including prime agricultural lands, pastures, mig
ratory
corridors etc.
31. If ecologically sensitive attributes fall with in 10 km from the
project boundary,
ropose
by the EAC.
Ecological sensitive attributes include:
- National parks
- Wild life sanctuaries Game reserve
- Tiger reserve/elephant reserve/turtle nesting ground
- Breeding grounds
- Core zone of biosphere reserve
- Habitat for migratory birds
- Mangrove area
- Areas with threatened (rare, vulnerable, endangered) flora/fauna
- Protected corals
- Wetlands
- Zoological gardens
- Gene Banks
- Reserved forests
- Protected forests
- Any other closed/protected area under the Wild Life (Protection) Act, 1972, a
ny
other area locally applicable.
32. If the location falls in a valley, specific issues connected to
the management of
natural resources shall be studied.
33. Determine the nature and volumes of liquid waste (including sewage
if applicable),
and wastewater and other sources of runoff to be generated by the entire project
.
34. Determine the nature and volumes of solid wastes, including seismic program
me byproducts, drilling mud, drill cuttings etc., to be generated by the entire proje
ct.
35. Quantify whether any of the solid waste are to be considered hazardous or n
ot.
36. Details on hazardous or toxic chemical material or substance to be used dur
ing either
seismic testing or potential exploratory drilling.
Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures
37. Describe and identify potential impacts on the terrestrial and aquatic faun
a and flora
of the study area for each phase. This would include, where applicabl
e, forest, river
corridors, wetlands, biological corridors, and protected areas.
September
2009
4-24
38. If clearing of vegetation is required, estimate the acreage.
39. Details on potential impacts of seismic and exploratory drilling a
ctivities on water
quality within the study area.
40. Details on potential impacts of project activities on the air emissions res
ulting out of
41. Details on potential impacts on the water quality due to the act
ivities in the various
phases of the project.
42. Details on noise and vibration levels quantification that is expec
ted from seismic
activities and potential exploratory drilling and specify any potential impacts
of these
on the surrounding environment including human habitation.
43. Details on odour sources (such as hydrogen sulfide, mercaptans etc
) and mitigation
measures taken to control the odour.
44. Details on impact of spills and discharge of crude oil in the surrounding a
reas.
45. Details on impacts of drilling waste such as drilling mud, additives (polym
ers, oxygen
scavengers, biocides, surfactants), lubricants, diesel oil, emulsifying a
gents,
flocculating agents, etc. and its treatment and disposal options to control the
impacts.
46. Details on environmental impacts of the decommissioning of oil and gas inst
allations,
drill cuttings, etc.
47. Describe mitigation measures including an EMP which is to be impl
emented to
reduce or offset the adverse impacts of seismic testing, potential exploratory d
rilling
and exportation. Also, include measures to be taken during decommissioning phase
.
48. Details on outline designs for any proposal and costs for implementing the
mitigation
measures.
49. Identify the preferred option(s) for waste management/disposal metho
d based on
environmental grounds, including necessary infrastructure.
Specify any
residual
impacts of waste management, their significance, and any mitigation measures t
o be
undertaken.
50. Identify mitigation measures to reduce or limit the potential impa
ct on the
surrounding environment and zone of influence (humans and wildlife).
51. Details on occupational health and safety of employees and workers.
52. Recommend precise mitigation measures based on the specific option selected
, for the
proper management of all types of traffic close to and within the project area.
These
mitigation measures must include recommendations for protection features
against
erosion, and other potential pollution to the environment as well as social and
human
impacts.
53. Describe the potential social, economic and cultural impacts of co
nducting the
proposed activity. Characterize the impacts in terms of type (beneficia
l or adverse),
magnitude (high, medium or low), direct/indirect, duration (short, mediu
m and long
term, sporadic), avoidance and reversibility.
September
2009
4-25
54. Typical measures that could be considered for the mitigation of i
mpacts as given in
this manual may be referred.
Analysis of alternative resources and technologies
55. Evaluate options for the provision of suitable access for each of
the components of
the exploration phase.
56. Select preferred option for the provision for exploration phase components.
This may
need to examine construction materials (types, sources, volumes, transpo
rtation) and
methods in relation to their environmental impacts.
57. Evaluate alternative options for meeting project needs. For these
options, it may be
necessary to investigate:
- fuel storage (where relevant)
transportation (where relevant)

health and safety
significance of any pollution that may result from energy generation; and
mitigation measures
58. Select the preferred option for energy generation. Again, this sho
uld be based on
environmental grounds, and should specify the residual impacts of gener
ation of the
preferred option, their significance and the mitigation measures, which
will be
undertaken.
59. Evaluate alternative options for the collection, treatment, recyclin
g (if appropriate),
and disposal of these wastes. Identify any chemicals planned for use in the trea
tment
or management of these wastes.
60. Details on improved technologies such as remote sensing and GIS, etc. in oi
l and gas
exploration.
Environmental Monitoring Program
61. Details on environmental monitoring program during surveying, drilli
ng and
exploration.
62. Details on use of advanced monitoring technologies such as remote
sensing, etc., if
any.
63. Identify and develop a water quality monitoring program able to detect any
change in
groundwater or surface water quality that could impact:
- Public health
- Forest, wetland and adjacent aquatic habitats; and
- Flora and Fauna (including endangered or threatened species) in project area
and
zone of influence.
64. Develop and Implement an air quality monitoring programme to monitor the r
elease
of toxic emission in particular SO
2
, CO and NO
2
and their potential impacts on Public
Health, wildlife health and environment.
September
2009
4-26
65. Appropriate monitoring network has to be designed and proposed for
regulatory
compliance and to assess the residual impacts, if any.
Additional Studies
66. Details on existing socio-economic conditions, giving a brief overv
iew of the socioeconomic background to the study area, including population, employment and trav
el
patterns.
67. Identify patterns of land use within the corridor of the proposed
route, and record
these on a map with annotation.

68. Consult with relevant local stakeholders (village councils, local community
, and local
NGOs) within the direct project area, to identify their economical, environmenta
l and
social concerns about the proposal.
69. Archaeology - Consult with the Archeology Department to conduct a
general
assessment of the area to determine any features of archaeological or
cultural
importance and provide recommendations for the protection of any features.
70. Public Interest - Report on the views and concerns of directly affected com
munities,
local NGOs and relevant government departments/agencies regarding the
development of the project.
71. Details on risk assessment including identification of hazards, pro
posed measures,
disaster management plan, contingency plan, emergency response plan, etc.
Environmental Management Plan
72. Outline of the overall management structure anticipated for the proposed ac
tivities.
73. Details on compliance verification of the emissions of the environmental co
mponents
(such as emissions limits, discharge limits, noise limits, odor, etc.) with the
national/
international standards.
74. Description of the pertinent regulations, standards and policies, a
t the local and
national levels governing environmental quality, health, safety and prot
ection of
sensitive areas.
These could include cultural resources, protection of
endangered or
threatened species, infrastructure development and land use control that may hav
e an
impact on the proposed development.
75. Specify options for refueling of vehicles and identify best practi
ce methods for
eliminating spills and maximizing health and safety.
76. Identify emergency preparation and applicable management measures fo
r the
proposed activities dealing with the following eventualities:
- Oil spills
- Hurricanes
- Floods
- Fires
- Blow out plan
- Hydrogen sulfide safety (including other types of gases)
2009
4-27
- Employee training
September
4.3 Environmental Impact Assessment

The approach for accomplishing EIA studies is shown in figure 4.2. Ea
ch stage is
discussed, in detail in subsequent sections.
Figure 4-2: Approach for EIA Study
4.3.1 EIA Team

The success of a multi-functional activity like an EIA primarily depen
ds on constitution
of a right team at the right time (preferable at the initial stages
of an EIA) in order to
assess the significant impacts (direct, indirect as well as cumulative impacts).
The professional Team identified for a specific EIA study should consist of qual
ified and
experienced professionals from various disciplines in order to address the criti
cal aspects
identified for the specific project.
Based on the nature and the en
vironmental setting,
following professionals may be identified for EIA studies.
2009
4-28
Environmental management specialist/Regulator
Air and noise quality expert
Occupational health
Geology/geo-hydrology
Ecologist
Transportation Specialist
Safety and health specialist
Social scientist
Crude Extraction and processing
Chemical Engineer
Marine Biologist/Engineer, etc
September
4.3.2 Baseline Quality of the Environment

EIA Notification 2006 typically specifies that an EIA Report should contain a de
scription
of the existing environment that would be or might be affected direct
ly or indirectly by
the proposed project.
Environmental Baseline Monitoring (EBM) is a ve
ry important
stage of EIA. On one hand EBM plays a very vital role in EIA and o
n the other hand it
provides feedback about the actual environmental impacts of a project. EBM duri
ng the
operational phase helps in judging the success of mitigation measures
in protecting the
environment.
Mitigation measures, in turn are used to ensure complian
ce with
environmental standards, and to facilitate any needed project design or
operational
changes.
The existing environment is broadly defined to include the natural, cu
ltural, socioeconomic systems and their interrelationships. The intention is not to describe
all baseline
conditions, but to focus the collection and description of baseline data on thos
e VECs that
are important and are likely to be affected by the proposed offshore and onshore
oil and
gas exploration project activities.
4.3.2.1 Objective of EBM in the EIA Context
The term baseline refers to conditions existing before development agains
t which
subsequent changes can be referenced. EBM studies are carried out to:
Identify environmental conditions which might influence project design
decisions
(e.g., site layout, structural or operational characteristics);
Identify sensitive issues or areas requiring mitigation or compensation;
Provide input data to analytical models used for predicting effects;
Provide baseline data against which the results of future monitoring programs
can be
compared.
At this stage of EIA process, the EBM is primarily discussed in the
context of first
purpose wherein the feedback from EBM programs may be used to:
Determine the available assimilative capacity of different environmental compo
nents
within the designated impact zone and whether more or less stringent
mitigation
measures are needed; and
Improve the predictive capability of EIAs.
September
2009
4-29
There are many institutional, scientific, quality control, and fiscal i
ssues that must be
addressed in the implementation of an environmental monitoring program.
Careful
consideration of these issues in the design and planning stages will
help avoid many of
the pitfalls associated with environmental monitoring programs.
4.3.2.2 Environmental Monitoring Network Design
Monitoring refers to the collection of data through a series of repetitive measu
rements of
environmental parameters (or, more generally, to a process of systemati
c observation).
The environmental quality monitoring programme design will be dependent
upon the
monitoring objectives specified for the selected area of interest. Types of moni
toring and
network design considerations are discussed in Annexure IV.
4.3.2.3 Baseline Data Generation
List of important physical environmental components and indicators of EBM are gi
ven in
Table 4-3.
Table 4-3: List of Important Physical Environment Components
and Indicators of EBM
Environmental Component Environmental Indicators
Climatic variables
- Rainfall patterns mean, mode, seasonality
- Temperature patterns
- Extreme events
- Climate change projections
- Prevailing wind - direction, speed, anomalies
- Stability conditions and mixing height
Geology
- Underlying rock type
- Surgical material
- Geologic structures (faults etc.)
- Geologic resources (minerals, etc.)

Topography
- Slope form
- Landform and terrain analysis
- Specific landform types
Coastal dynamics and morphology
- Wave patterns
- Currents
- Shoreline morphology near shore, foreshore
- Sediment characteristics and transport
Soil
- Type and characteristics
- Porosity and permeability
- Sub-soil permeability
- Run-off rate
- Effective depth (inches/centimeters)
- Inherent fertility
- Suitability for method of sewage disposal
Drainage
- Surface hydrology
- Drainage network
- Rainfall runoff relationships
2009
4-30
Environmental Component Environmental Indicators
- Hydrogeology
- Groundwater characteristics springs, etc.
Water quality
- Terrestrial - rivers, lakes, ponds, gullies
- Coastal
Air quality
- Ambient
- Respirable
- Airshed importance
- Odour levels
Noise
- Ambient
Hazardous waste
-
September
Guidance for assessment of baseline components and attributes describing

sampling
network, sampling frequency, method of measurement is given in Annexure V.
Infrastructure Requirements for EBM
In addition to devising a monitoring network design and monitoring pla
ns/program, it is
also necessary to ensure adequate resources in terms of staffing and
skills, equipment,
training, budget, etc., for its implementation. Besides assigning instit
utional
responsibility, reporting requirements, QA/QC plans and its enforcement
capability are
essential. A monitoring program that does not have an infrastructural support an
d QA/QC
component will have little chance of success.
Defining Data Statistics/Analyses Requirements
The data analyses to be conducted are dictated by the objectives of

the environmental
monitoring program. The statistical methods used to analyze the data should be d
escribed
in detail prior to data collection. This is important because repetiti
ve observations are
recorded in time and space. Besides, the statistical methods could also be chos
en so that
uncertainty or error estimates in the data can be quantified. For e.g
., statistical methods
useful in an environmental monitoring program include: 1) frequency dis
tribution
analysis; 2) analysis of variance; 3) analysis of covariance; 4) cluster analysi
s; 5) multiple
regression analysis; 6) time series analysis; 7) the application of statistical
models (ADBGreen, 1979).
Use of Secondary Data
The EBM program for EIA can at best address temporal and/or spatial variations l
imited
to a limited extent because of cost implications and time limitations. Therefor
e analysis
of all available information or data is essential to establish the regional prof
iles. So all the
relevant secondary data available for different environmental components
should be
collated and analyzed.
To facilitate stake-holders, IL&FS Ecosmart Ltd. made an attempt to co
mpile the list of
information required for EIA studies. Respective sources of secondary data are p
rovided
in Annexure VIA and Annexure VIB.
September
2009
4-31
Impact Prediction Tools
The scientific and technical credibility of an EIA relies on the abil
ity of the EIA
practitioners to estimate the nature, extent, and magnitude of change
in environmental
components that may result from project activities. Information about p
redicted changes
is needed for assigning impact significance, prescribing mitigation meas
ures, and
designing and developing EMPs and monitoring programs. The more accurat
e the
predictions, the more confident the EIA practitioner will be in prescr
ibing specific
measures to eliminate or minimize the adverse impacts of development project.
Choice of models/methods for impact predictions in respect of each of
air, noise, water,
land and biological environment are precisely tabulated in Annexure VII.
4.3.3 Significance of Impacts
Evaluating the significance of environmental effects is perhaps the mos
t critical
component of impact analysis. More than other components, however, the
interpretation
of significance is also a contentious process. The interpretation of s
ignificance bears
directly on the subsequent EIA process and also during Environmental C
learance on
project approvals and condition setting. At an early stage, it also enters into
screening and
scoping decisions on what level of assessment is required and which i
mpacts and issues
will be addressed.
Impact significance is also a key to choosing among alternatives. In s
um, the attribution
of significance continues throughout the EIA process, from scoping to
EIS review, in a
gradually narrowing cone of resolution in which one stage sets up the next. But at
this
stage it is the most important as better understanding and quantificat
ion of impact
significance is required.
One common approach is based on determination of the significance of predicted c
hanges
in the baseline environmental characteristics and compares these with r
eference to
regulatory standards, objective criteria and similar thresholds as eco-sensitivity
, cultural
/religious values. A better test proposed by the CEAA (1995) is to determine if r
esidual
environmental effects are adverse, significant, and likely (given under). But at
this stage,
the practice of formally evaluating significance of residual impacts, i
.e., after predicting
the nature and magnitude of impacts based on before-versus-after-project
comparisons,
and identifying measures to mitigate these effects is not being follow
ed in a systematic
way.
Step 1: Are the environmental effects adverse?
Criteria for determining if effects are adverse include:
effects on biota health
effects on rare or endangered species
reductions in species diversity
habitat loss
transformation of natural landscapes
effects on human health
effects on current use of lands and resources for traditional purpos
es by aboriginal
persons; and
foreclosure of future resource use or production
2009
4-32
September
Step 2: Are the adverse environmental effects significant?

Criteria for determining significance is to judge that the impacts:
are extensive over space or time
are intensive in concentration or proportion to assimilative capacity
exceed environmental standards or thresholds
do not comply with environmental policies, land use plans, sustainability stra
tegy
adversely and seriously affect ecologically sensitive areas
adversely and seriously affect heritage resources, other land uses, community
lifestyle
and/or indigenous peoples traditions and values
Step 3: Are the significant adverse environmental effects likely?
Criteria for determining likelihood include:
probability of occurrence, and
scientific uncertainty
4.4 Social Impact Assessment
Social impact assessment is the instrument used to analyze social issu
es and solicit
stakeholder views for the design of projects. Social assessment helps
make the project
responsive to social development concerns, including seeking to enhance
benefits for
poor and vulnerable people while minimizing or mitigating risk and adv
erse impacts. It
analyzes distributional impacts of intended project benefits on differen
t stakeholder
groups, and identifies differences in assets and capabilities to access the proj
ect benefits.
The scope and depth of the social assessment should be determined by the complex
ity and
importance of the issues studied, taking into account the skills and
resources available.
However, social impact assessment may include following:
Description of the Socio-economic, Cultural and Institutional Profile
Conduct a rapid review of available sources of information to describe
the socioeconomic, cultural and institutional interface in which the project operates.
Socio-economic and cultural profile: Describe the most significant socia
l, economic and
cultural features that differentiate social groups in the project area.
Describe their
different interests in the project, and their levels of influence. In
particular, explain any
particular effects the project may have on the poor and underprivilege
d. Identify any
known conflicts among groups that may affect project implementation.
Institutional profile: Describe the institutional environment; consider b
oth the presence
and function of public, private and civil society institutions relevant to the o
peration. Are
there important constraints within existing institutions e.g. disconnect
between
institutional responsibilities and the interests and behaviors of person
nel within those
institutions? Or are there opportunities to utilize the potential of existing in
stitutions, e.g.
private or civil society institutions, to strengthen implementation capacity
September
2009
4-33
Legislative and Regulatory Considerations
To review laws and regulations governing the projects implementation and the acce
ss of
poor and excluded groups to goods, services and opportunities provided by the pr
oject. In
addition, review the enabling environment for public participation and
development
planning.
Social analysis should build on strong aspects of the lega
l and regulatory
systems to facilitate program implementation and identify weak aspects
while
recommending alternative arrangements.
Key Social Issues
The social analysis provides the baseline information for designing the
social
development strategy.
The analysis should determine what the key soci
al and
Institutional issues are in relation to project objectives; identify th
e key stakeholder
groups in this context and determine how relationships between stakehol
der groups will
affect or be affected by the project; and identify expected social de
velopment outcomes
and actions proposed to achieve those outcomes.
Data Collection and Methodology
Describe the design and methodology for the social analysis. In this regard:
Build on existing data;
Clarify the units of analysis for the social assessment: intra-househ
old, household
level, as well as communities/settlements and other relevant social agg
regations on
which data is available or will be collected for analysis;
Choose appropriate data collection and analytical tools and methods,
employing
mixed methods wherever possible; mixed methods include a mix of quantitative and
qualitative methods.
Strategy to Achieve Social Development Outcomes
Identify the likely social development outcomes of the project and pro
pose a Social
development strategy, including recommendations for institutional arrangem
ents to
achieve them, based on the findings of the social assessment.
The s
ocial development
strategy could include measures:
that strengthen social inclusion by ensuring that both poor and excl
uded groups and
intended beneficiaries are included in the benefit stream and in access to oppor
tunities
created by the project
that empower stakeholders through their participation in the design a
nd
implementation of the project, their access to information, and their
increased voice
and accountability (i.e. a participation framework); and
that enhance security by minimizing and managing likely social risks and incre
asing
the resilience of intended beneficiaries and affected persons to socioeconomic s
hocks
Implications for Analysis of Alternatives
Review the proposed approaches for the project, and compare them in t
erms of their
relative impacts and social development outcomes. Consider what implicat
ions the
findings of the social assessment might have on those approaches. Shou

ld some new
components be added to the approach, or other components reconsidered or modifie
d?
September
2009
4-34
If the social analysis and consultation process indicate that alternati
ve approaches are
likely to have better development outcomes, such alternatives should be
described and
considered, along with the likely budgetary and administrative effects
these changes
might have.
Recommendations for Project Design and Implementation Arrangements
Provide guidance to project management and other stakeholders on how t
o integrate
social development issues into project design and implementation arrangements. A
s much
as possible, suggest specific action plans or implementation mechanisms
to address
relevant social issues and potential impacts. These can be developed a
s integrated or
separate action plans, for example, as Resettlement Action Plans, Indig
enous Peoples
Development Plans, Community Development Plans, etc.
Developing a Monitoring Plan
Through the social assessment process, a framework for monitoring and
evaluation
should be developed. To the extent possible, this should be done in consultatio
n with key
stakeholders, especially beneficiaries and affected people. The framework
shall identify
expected social development indicators, establish benchmarks, and design
systems and
mechanisms for measuring progress and results related to social development obje
ctives.
The framework shall identify organizational responsibilities in terms of
monitoring,
supervision, and evaluation procedures. Where possible, participatory mon
itoring
mechanisms shall be incorporated. The framework should
Establish a set of monitoring indicators to track the progress achie
ved. The
benchmarks and indicators should be limited in number, and should comb
ine both
quantitative and qualitative types of data. The indicators should include output
s to be
achieved by the social development strategy; indicators to monitor the
process of
stakeholder participation, implementation and institutional reform;
Establish indicators to monitor social risk and social development ou
tcomes; and
indicators to monitor impacts of the projects social development strateg
y. It is
important to suggest mechanisms through which lessons learned from monitoring an
d
stakeholder feedback can result in changes to improve the operation of
the project.
Indicators should be of such a nature that results and impacts can be disaggrega
ted by
gender and other relevant social groups;
Define transparent evaluation procedures. Depending on context, these ma
y include a
combination of methods, such as participant observation, key informant interview
s, focus
group discussions, census and socio-economic surveys, gender analysis, P
articipatory
Rural Appraisal (PRA), Participatory Poverty Assessment (PPA) methodologi
es, and
other tools. Such procedures should be tailored to the special conditions of the
project and
to the different groups living in the project area; Estimate resource
and budget
requirements for monitoring and evaluation activities, and a description
of other inputs
(such as institutional strengthening and capacity building) needed to carry it o
ut.
4.5 Risk Assessment
Industrial accidents results in great personal and financial loss. Managing thes
e accidental
risks in todays environment is the concern of every industry including
the proposed
industry, because either real or perceived incidents can quickly jeopar
dize the financial
viability of a business. Many facilities involve various manufacturing processes
that have
September
2009
4-35
the potential for accidents which may be catastrophic to the plant, w
ork force,
environment, or public.
The main objective of the risk assessment study is to propose a comprehensive bu
t simple
approach to carry out risk analysis and conducting feasibility studies
for industries and
planning and management of industrial prototype hazard analysis study in Indian
context.
Risk analysis and risk assessment should
provide details on Quantitat
ive Risk
Assessment (QRA) techniques used world-over to determine risk posed to
people who
work inside or live near hazardous facilities, and to aid in preparing effective
emergency
response plans by delineating a Disaster Management Plan (DMP) to hand
le onsite and
offsite emergencies. Hence, QRA is an invaluable method for making inf
ormed riskbased process safety and environmental impact planning decisions, as we
ll as being
fundamental to any facility-siting decision-making. QRA whether, site-spe
cific or riskspecific for any plant is complex and needs extensive study that invo
lves process
understanding, hazard identification, consequence modeling, probability da
ta,
vulnerability models/data, local weather and terrain conditions and local popula
tion data.
QRA may be carried out to serve the following objectives.
Identification of safety areas
Identification of hazard sources
Generation of accidental release scenarios for escape of hazardous materials f
rom the
facility
Identification of vulnerable units with recourse to hazard indices
Estimation of damage distances for the accidental release scenarios with reco
urse to
Maximum Credible Accident (MCA) analysis
Hazard and Operability studies (HAZOP) in order to identify potential failure
cases of
significant consequences
Estimation of probability of occurrences of hazardous event through f
ault tree
analysis and computation of reliability of various control paths
Assessment of risk on the basis of above evaluation against the ris
k acceptability
criteria relevant to the situation
Suggest risk mitigation measures based on engineering judgement, reliability a
nd risk
analysis approaches
Delineation / up-gradation of Disaster Management Plan (DMP).
Safety Reports: with external safety report/ occupational safety report.
The risk assessment (Figure 4-4) report may cover the following in terms of the
extent of
damage with resource to MCA analysis and delineation of risk mitigations measure
s with
an approach to DMP.
Hazard identification identification of hazardous activities, hazardous
materials,
past accident records, etc.
Hazard quantification consequence analysis to assess the impacts
Risk Presentation
Risk Mitigation Measures
Disaster Management Plans
2009
4-36
September
Figure 4-3: Risk Assessment Conceptual Framework

Predictive methods for estimating risk should cover all the design int
entions and
operating parameters to quantify risk in terms of probability of occur
rence of hazardous
events and magnitude of its consequence. Table 4-6 shows the predicted models f
or risk
assessment.
Table 4-4: Guidance for Accidental Risk Assessment
Name Application Remarks
EFFECT
WHAZAN
Consequence Analysis for
Visualization of accidental chemical
release scenarios & its consequence
Heat load, press wave &
toxic release exposure
neutral gas dispersion
EGADIS
Dense gas dispersion
HAZOP and Fault
Tree Assessment
For estimating top event probability
Failure frequency data
is required
Pathways reliability
and protective
system hazard
analysis
For estimating reliability of
equipments and protective systems
Markov models
Vulnerability
Exposure models
Estimation of population exposure
Uses probit equation for
population exposure
F-X and F-N curves
Individual / Societal risks
Graphical
Representation
r 2009
Septembe
4-37
Figure 4-4: Comprehensive Risk Assessment - At a Glance
September
2009
4-38
4.6 Mitigation Measures
The purpose of mitigation is to identify measures that safeguard the environment
and the
community affected by the proposal. Mitigation is both a creative and practical
phase of
the EIA process. It seeks to find the best ways and means of avoidi
ng, minimizing and
remedying impacts. Mitigation measures must be translated into action in the cor
rect way
and at the right time, if they are to be successful. This process i
s referred to as impact
management and takes place during project implementation. A written pla
n should be
prepared for this purpose, and includes a schedule of agreed actions.

Opportunities for
impact mitigation will occur throughout the project cycle.
4.6.1 Important Considerations for Mitigation Methods
The responsibility of project proponents to internalize the full environm
ental costs of
development proposals is now widely accepted under Pollutant Pay principl
e. In
addition, many proponents have found that good design and impact manag
ement can
result in significant savings applying the principles of cleaner production to i
mprove their
environmental performance.
The predicted adverse environmental as well as social impacts for wh
ich mitigation
measures are required should be identified and briefly summarized along
with cross
referencing them to the significance, prediction components of the EIA
report or
other documentation.
Each mitigation measure should be briefly described with reference to
the impact of
significances to which it relates and the conditions under which it i
s required (for
example, continuously or in the event of contingencies). These should also be cr
ossreferenced to the project design and operating procedures which elabora
te on the
technical aspects of implementing the various measures.
Cost and responsibilities for mitigation and monitoring should be cle
arly defined,
including arrangements for co-ordination between the various authorities respons
ible
for mitigation.
The proponent can use the EMP to develop environmental performance standards a
nd
requirements for the project site as well as supply chain. An EMP ca
n be
implemented through Environment Management Systems (EMS) for the operati
onal
phase of the project.
Prior to selecting mitigation plans it is appropriate to study the mitigation al
ternatives for
cost-effectivity, technical and socio-political feasibility. Such Mitigati
on measures could
include:
avoiding sensitive areas such as eco-sensitive area e.g. fish spawnin
g areas, dense
mangrove areas or areas known to contain rare or endangered species
adjusting work schedules to minimize disturbance
pollution control devices, such as scrubbers and electrostatic precipitators
2009
4-39
4.6.2 Hierarchy of Elements of Mitigation Plan
Figure 4-5: Elements of Mitigation
September
Good EIA practice requires a relevant technical understanding of the i

ssues and the
measures that work in the circumstances: The priority of selection of mitigation
measures
should be in the order:
Step One: Impact Avoidance
This step is most effective when applied at an early stage of projec
t planning. It can be
achieved by:
not undertaking certain projects or elements that could result in adverse impa
cts
avoiding areas that are environmentally sensitive; and
putting in place the preventative measures to stop adverse impacts from occurr
ing, for
example, release of water from a reservoir to maintain a fisheries regime.
Step Two: Impact Minimization
This step is usually taken during impact identification and prediction
to limit or reduce
the degree, extent, magnitude, or duration of adverse impacts. It can be achieve
d by:
scaling down or relocating the proposal;
redesigning elements of the project; and
taking supplementary measures to manage the impacts.
Step Three: Impact Compensation
This step is usually applied to remedy unavoidable residual adverse im
pacts. It can be
achieved by:
rehabilitation of the affected site or environment, for example, by
habitat
enhancement and restocking fish;
restoration of the affected site or environment to its previous stat
e or better, as
typically required for mine sites, forestry roads and seismic lines; and
replacement of the same resource values at another location, for example, by w
etland
engineering to provide an equivalent area to that lost to drainage or infill.

September
2009
4-40
Important Compensation Elements
Resettlement Plans: Special considerations apply to mitigation of proposals tha
t displace
or disrupt people. Certain types of projects, such as reservoirs and irrigation
schemes and
public works, are known to cause involuntary resettlement. This is a
contentious issue
because it involves far more than re-housing people; in addition, inco
me sources and
access to common property resources are likely to be lost. Almost cer
tainly, a
resettlement plan will be required to ensure that no one is worse of
f than before, which
may not be possible for indigenous people whose culture and lifestyle is tied to
a locality.
This plan must include the means for those displaced to reconstruct their econom
ies and
communities and should include an EIA of the receiving areas. Particular attenti
on should
be given to indigenous, minority and vulnerable groups who are at hig
her risk from
resettlement.
In-kind Compensation
When significant or net residual loss or damage to the environment is
likely, in kind
compensation is appropriate. As noted earlier, environmental rehabilitation, res
toration or
replacement have become standard practices for many proponents. Now, in
creasing
emphasis is given to a broader range of compensation measures to offs
et impacts and
assure the sustainability of development proposals. These include impact
compensation
trading, such as offsetting CO
2
emissions by planting forests to sequester carbon.
4.6.3 Typical Mitigation Measures
Table 4-5: Mitigation Measures for Construction Phase
Impacts Mitigation Steps
Erosion
Windscreens, Maintenance, And Installation Of Ground Cover
Installation Of Drainage Ditches
Runoff And Retention Ponds
Minimize Disturbances And Scarification Of The Surface.
Deforestation
Plant Or Create Similar Areas
Initiate A Tree Planning Program In Other Areas
Donate Land To Conservationalist Groups
Table 4-6: Mitigation Measures for Operation Phase
Impacts Mitigation steps
Dust pollution
Wetting of roadways to reduce traffic dust particles
Installation of windscreens to breakup the wind flow
Burning of refuse on days when meteorological
conditions provide for good mixing and dispersion
Noise pollution
Heavy duty muffler systems on heavy equipment
Limit certain activities
Water pollution and issues
Channeling and retention of water to reduce erosion and
situation
Collection and treatment of sewage and organic waste
Increased recycling and reuse of water
Use of biodegradable or otherwise readily treatable
additives
Cooling ponds, towers and canals to reduce temperatures
2009
4-41
Impacts Mitigation steps
of cooling water discharge
Neutralization and sedimentation of wastewater
September
Dewatering of sludges and appropriate disposal of solids

Use deep well injection below potable levels
Construct liners of ponds and solids waste disposal
Dilute water at point of discharge
Chemical discharges and
spills
Develop spill prevention plans
Develop traps and containment system and chemically
treat discharges on site
Thermal shock to aquatic
organisms
Use alternative heat dissipation design
Dilute thermal condition by discharging water into larger
receiving water body
Install mechanical diffusers
Cool water onsite in holding pond prior to discharge
Explore opportunities to use waste heat
Biological
Installation of systems to discourage nesting or perching
of birds in dangerous environments
Increased employee awareness to sensitive areas
Disruption of traffic
Develop traffic plan that minimizes road use by workers
Upgrade roads and intersections
Worker exposure to dust
Provide dust collector equipment
Maintain dust levels less than 10 mg/m
3
Monitor for free silica content
Provide dust masks when levels are exceeded
Worker exposure to toxic
gases leaking from the boilers
Maintain boilers properly
Monitor concentrations with levels not to exceed
SO
2
5 ppm
CO 5 ppm
NO
2
5 ppm
Worker exposure to excessive
noise
Maintain noise levels from below 90 dba
Provide ear protection if in excess
Induced secondary
development puts increased
demand on infrastructure
Provide infrastructure plan and financial support for
increased demands
Construct facilities to reduce demands
4.6.4 Mitigation Measures on Special Environmental Issues
A. Strategic Planning and Management Practices
Developing programmes to reduce overall emissions and waste generation.
Resolving problems from handling and disposal hazardous substances fro
m member
operations by following guidelines
Operating and handling raw materials and products in a manner that
protects the
environment and health and safety of employees while conserving natural
resources
and efficient usage of energy.
Promoting among employees and individual and collective sense of responsibilit
y for
the prevention of the environment and protection of health and safety of individ
uals.
Sharing practices, principles and technical assistance with others in similar
field.
September
2009
4-42
Management support for pollution prevention activities through actions,
communications, policies and resource commitments.
Developing and implementing a programme for improving prevention and
early
detection of impacts and accidents from the site operations.
Developing an inventory on significant releases to air, water and la
nd along with
sources and evaluation of their impacts.
Periodic review of pollutants and their impacts
Identifying the pollution prevention options and opportunities and dev
eloping
approaches for reducing the releases on health and environment.
Preferences in release reduction include source reduction, recycling a
nd reuse and
treatment.
B. Problems at Different Stages of the Process
Exploration
Petroleum which is a mineral and includes natural gas and related substances is
non-toxic
in nature. This is because it occurs naturally and is compatible with
the bio-sphere. As
petroleum is derived from fossilized bio-mass, it does not present env
ironmental
problems to living beings. However, environmental aspects are crucial t
o the petroleum
industry. Exploration, development, production and abandonment can cause
detrimental
problems.
Pollution of air, water and land challenges have to be ov
ercomed.
Considerable progress has been made by the petroleum industry to combat, minimiz
e and
eliminate these problems.
Seismic surveys are conducted to obtain multi-dimensional contours of t
he oil-field.
During exploration testing wells are drilled to obtain samples for geochemical a
nalysis.
Production
The following environmental problems are generally faced during drilling:
Noise in populated areas
Barite in the drilling mud could contaminate ground water
Problems caused by Sulphric acid used for well cleaning
Sacrificial agents like sulfonates could be absorbed by reservoir rocks
Methane hydrates could be formed in pipelines, if the pressure difference is l
arge
Cementing agents to avoid the interaction of drilling fluids on rocks

Damage control additives like NaCl, KCl etc.
Recovery
During primary recovery oil is forced out of the reservoir by gaseous
components like
Methane, Ethane, carbon Dioxide etc. Secondary recovery is achieved by
injection of
water as well as water flooding chemicals. Enhanced oil recovery ensur
es collection of
most o the oil and oil well is ready to be closed after this. Some of the prob
lems are:
Surfactant flooding
2009
4-43
Polymer flooding
Fire flooding
Steam flooding
Alkaline flooding
September
Transportation
Transportation of oil can be through the pipelines or tankers in the case of off
shore fields.
There are problems associated with transportation by pipelines, which are covere
d in the
section dealing with oil pipelines, but considering problems related with ships
it needs to
account for the major issue of oil spillages which occur at various places like
loading and
unloading terminals.
Abandonment
When oil wells are closed due to completion of economic life considerable volume
of oil
still remains in place. All the chemicals not completely consumed stil
l remain in the
reservoir. Problems during abandonment are as follows:
Production of Hydrogen sulfide by sulphate reducers
Subsurface mitigation of Methane and on surface severe oxidation by air.
Subsidence of spent oil field and subsequent earth tremors.
Oxidation of light petroleum to form viscous air
C. Monitoring Scheme
The term monitoring, in case of environmental pollution, has a number
of meanings. In
the general sense, it means, the repeated measurement of existing norms against
reference
points. This enables the changes over a period of time to be followe
d and deviation in
level of pollutants known. There is no universally accepted monitoring p
rogramme. It is
generally accepted that monitoring complies with the requirement of regulatory a
gencies.
The Hydrocarbon exploration activities do interact with the environment
and it becomes
necessary to limit the impact on environment and maintain the ecologic
al balance. The
drill site effluents contain not only drain water rig wash, drill cut
tings, pump lubricants,

but also waste from cement operations and drilling fluids. Presence of
caustic soda
increases sodium level in soil leading to hard solid crust. Soluble s
alts make water
absorption by plants difficult. Barite used in water based mud is a carrier of c
admium &
mercury.
In the case of Off-shore blocks the activities involved are geo-physic
al/geological
exploration, drilling of wells, production testing, processing of oil/gas and pr
oduced water
followed by transportation of oil/gas by pipelines/tankers. The monitori
ng programme
should take into account the operations of the oilfield in totality.
The foremost
requirement would be to obtain a research vessel for off-shore monitoring. It sh
ould have
an onboard scientific laboratory using internationally accepted standards
. The study
should include water samples, sediment and biological materials. The da
ta obtained
should be carefully analyzed for the understanding of spatial and temporal varia
tions and
compared with the natural background levels in and around the oil fie
ld operations.
Various sampling stations should be established. Data from sampling stations wit
hin 2 km
of the installation are considered immediate vicinity, while data from
stations located
from 2 to 20 km from the installation are considered as reference stations.
September
2009
4-44
Exploratory drilling is undertaken to establish the presence of hydrocarbons as
indicated
by seismic survey and interpretation of data. Exploratory drilling is
temporary and short
duration activity and includes site preparation, well foundation, rig building,
drilling and
eventually restoration of the well site. This activity takes approximately 3-4 m
onths under
normal conditions. Drilling rig is used for the well and involves rot
ation of drill bit,
attached to a long string of a drill pipe down the well. Mud is pu
mped through the drill
string, through the drill bit, which returns up the annulus between the drill st
ring and bore.
Drill mud is used to cool the drill bit while drilling, remove cutti
ngs from the well,
control formation pressures, suspend and release cuttings, seal permeabl
e formations,
maintain well-bore stability, minimize reservoir damage, cool and lubric
ate the bit etc.
The drill cuttings are separated from the mud in shale shaker and the fluid is r
e-circulated.
If the presence of hydrocarbons is detected during drilling, production testing
is normally
conducted. The production testing is carried out to ascertain the rese

rves and economic
viability.
D. Safety Issues
Till recently, safety issues in the upstream oil and gas sector were
regulated by the
Directorate General of Mines Safety in onshore areas under the Oil Mi
nes Regulations,
1984, with no statutory body for regulating safety in the offshore industry. But
following
the introduction of the Petroleum and Natural Gas (Safety in Offshore Operations
) Rules
in June, 2008, the Oil Industry Safety Directorate (OISD) has been de
legated the
responsibility of enforcing safety norms.
E. Environmental Protection Measures
The following Table provides a summary of environmental protection measures that
can
be applied in each of the principle steps of the exploration and production proc
ess. These
measures can be implemented to avoid potential environmental effects and interac
tions.
Table 4-7: Onshore Activities - Environmental Protection Measures
Activity Source of
Potential Impact
Environmental Protection Measures
Aerial survey Aircraft
Environmental assessment shall be carried out to identify the
sensitive areas.
Operations shall be properly scheduled during least sensitive
periods
Seismic
operations
(onshore)
Seismic
equipment
Shot-hole method should be considered in place of vibroseis
where preservation of vegetation cover is required and
where access is a concern. Ensure charge is small enough
and deep enough to avoid cratering. Consider aquifer
protection and proper plugging. Use offsets to avoid specify
sensitivities. Ensure misfired charges are disabled. Mobilize
clean up crew after operations.
Vibroseis-avoid excessive compaction on soft ground both
by access of vehicles and from baseplate. Use adequate
noise attenuation on engines. Carry spill clean-up material in
case of fuel and hydraulic fluid leaks. Ensure proper storage
of fuels.
September
2009
4-45
Base camps and
access
Local authorities and other stakeholders shall be consulted
regarding preferred location.
Site is so chosen, to encourage natural rehabilitation by
indigenous flora and also by avoiding removal of vegetation
and topsoil/preserve topsoil, and seed source for
decommissioning.
Select site to minimize effects on environment and local
communities/minimize clearing.
Use existing access if available.
Avoid or minimize road construction/minimize clearing and
disturbance/minimize footprint, use existing infrastructure.
Use hand cutting techniques/avoid use of heavy machinery
e.g. bulldozers/selectively use machinery.
Minimize size of camp/facilities consistent with operational,
health and safety requirements.
Take account of topography, natural drainage and site
runoff. Ensure adequate and proper drainage.
Ensure proper handling and storage of fuels and hazardous
materials (e.g. explosives).
Use helicopters within safety limits where minimization of
ground transport is required (e.g. access, clearing etc.)
Construct helipads to minimize disturbance consistent with
operational, health and safety requirements.
Block and control access.
Control workforce activities e.g. hunting, interaction with
local population.
Minimize waste, control waste disposal (solids, sewerage).
Prepare contingency plans for spillages, fire risk.
Minimize extraneous noise and light sources.
Line cutting
Hand-cut lines to minimize disturbance.
Minimize width compatible with operational, health and
safety requirements.
Do not cut trees of a diameter greater than local regulations
permit (or, in the absence of regulations, greater than 20
cm).
Minimize clearing of vegetation. Leave in place smaller
vegetation, topsoil, root stock, seeds, and endangered or
protected species and species used by local communities for
commercial or subsistence use (identified by environmental
assessment).
Decommissioning
and restoration
Consult with local authorities and other stakeholders,
particularly if any infrastructure is to remain.
Render access routes, campsites, seismic lines inaccessible.
Break-up compacted surfaces/replace topsoil, brash, seed
source, leaf litter etc.
Remove non-native materials.
Stabilize all slopes. If necessary re-vegetate to avoid
erosion.
Keep photographic record.
Review success of restoration at a later date.
2009
4-46
Site selection
Use environmental assessment to identify protected
areas/sensitivities. Schedule operations during least sensitive
periods.
Select least sensitive location within confines of bottom
target/drilling envelope. Consider directional drilling to
access targets beneath sensitive areas.
September
Siting to minimize impacts on water resources, conservation

interests, settlement, agriculture, sites of historical and
archaeological interest and landscape. Consider using site
that has been cleared/disturbed previously or of low
ecological value, or which may be more easily restore, e.g.
agricultural land.
Consult local authorities and other stakeholders regarding
preferred location for drilling sites, camps and
access/maximize use of existing infrastructure.
Select location to be as unobtrusive as possible, with
minimal visual intrusion.
Take account of topography, natural drainage and site runoff. Avoid areas prone to flooding.
Select site close to established good access.
Plan subsequent restoration requirements.
In remote locations, consider best use of transport
helirigs/slim-hole drilling/helicopter/water transportation,
consistent with operational, health and safety requirements.
Consider cluster drilling to minimize footprint.
Exploration and
appraisal
drilling
(onshore)
Access
Consult with local authorities regarding preferred routings.
Where possible use existing road/water infrastructure.
Plan routing to minimize subsequent disturbance to natural
resources and people.
Limit road width and footprint consistent with operational,
health and safety requirements.
Minimize vegetation loss and disturbance.
Limit erosion potential / avoid steep slope and drainage
courses/avoid cut and fill techniques/incorporate proper
drainage, culverting and bridging techniques.
Road construction should use local material, but minimize
cutting of timber.
Block and control access/prevent unauthorized use.
2009
4-47
Site preparation
Minimize cleared area and size of site/maximize perimeter
to area ration to aid natural revegetation.
Use hand cutting to clear vegetation initially where
necessary be selective in using machinery.
Conserve root stock and topsoil, store for later rehabilitation.
Limit leveling activity.
Do not burn brush and uprooted materials.
Where vegetation and soil are removed ensure proper
separation and storage/collect seed, rootstock, brash for
subsequent revegetation.
Incorporate drainage and minimize disturbance to natural
drainage patters. Engineer slopes and drainage to minimize
erosion. Design for storm conditions. Ensure offsite natural
run-off does not wash over site/use perimeter drainage
ditches.
Seal bund and ensure proper drainage of machinery area,
September
fuel and chemical storage, and mud mixing areas.

Provide base material compatible with local ground
conditions. Hard core should be laid on geotextile
membrane. Avoid concreting site.
Protect water courses from contamination and siltation.
Protect groundwater from drill stem penetration and shallow
aquifers from possible site contamination.
Where water courses and aquifers are deemed sensitive,
consider a fully sealed site, avoid use of mud pits,
preferentially use steel tanks, but if used must be lined. Pits
if used must be lined.
Mud and burn pits, if used, must have adequate contingency
capacity especially in areas of high rainfall, and must be
fully lined and bunded.
Camp and
operations
Water supply: - carefully consider water supply sources
(ground water, surface or marine). In areas of water shortage
consider water separation/recycling package in mud system.
If marine sources are used care must be taken with regard to
disposal.
Aqueous discharges: - exploration sites rarely incorporate
sophisticated effluent treatment systems, therefore treat
contaminated water as liquid waste.
Treat surface drainage water in an interceptor with hay filter
or similar.
Utilize local sewerage disposal facilities where available.
For small, isolated sites, soak away/septic field system can
be utilized, biodegradable solids may be buried, liquid
discharges should be controlled to ensure that local water
resources, both surface and ground water, are not
contaminated.
Containerize spent oils and lubes for proper disposal or
recycling.
Any produced water from well test operations must be
properly disposed of. Ensure disposal options are addressed
in planning phase and requirements are met.
Solid wastes: - where approved disposal sites are available
and suitable these should be used for all offsite waste
disposal. On-site disposal may be considered for inert
materials. Ensure proper documentation and manifesting.
Ensure adequate consultation with local authorities
regarding nature, type and volumes of wastes arising and
September
2009
4-48
capability and capacity of local resources.
Do not discard litter and debris around sites. All wastes to be
containerized on-site.
In isolated/remote areas, with no local disposal facilities,
puterscible, not-toxic waste may be buried at a depth of 1m
or more during decommissioning. Ensure local water
resources are not at risk from contamination.
In isolated/remote areas, with no local disposal facilities,
non-toxic dry and liquid wastes may be burnt, giving due
consideration to atmospheric effects. If necessary portable
incinerators can be used to provide a cleaner burn.
Containerize contaminated soils which cannot be treated in
situ and remove offsite for treatment.

Consider bulk supply of materials to minimize use of oil
(OBM) and synthetic muds to where required for operational
reasons. Mud make-up and mud and cuttings disposal
options must be addressed during planning phase, ensure all
requirements are met. Consider downhole disposal of OBM
wastes otherwise treat as hazardous waste.
Requirements of oil spill and emergency plans must be met
before operations commence.
Hazardous materials usage, storage and disposal
requirements must meet planning requirements.
Atmospheric emission/noise/light: - Ensure requirements
from planning phase are met to minimize effects from
engine exhausts and extraneous noise and light. Ensure any
H
2
S problems are addressed. Ensure well test procedures are
followed. Any burn pits utilized for well test operations
must be line. If possible produced oil should be stored for
subsequent use.
Noise levels at the site boundary should meet local or
company specified. Ensure all machinery and equipment are
properly cladded.
Light sources should be properly shaded and directed onto
site area.
Socio-economic/cultural. Ensure all requirements addressed
in planning phase are fully met.
Initiate consultation and liaison with local authorities. Use
local expertise.
Workforce should keep within defined boundary and to the
agreed access routes.
Control workforce activities, e.g. hunting, interaction with
local population. Purchase food from recognized local
suppliers, not directly from local people without evaluating
implications.
Decommissioning
and restoration
Restoration plan must be followed and site restored to its
original condition.
Remove all debris and contaminated soils.
Reform contours to natural surroundings.
Restore natural drainage patterns.
Break-up base material/re-spread topsoil and brash,
vegetation, leaf litter and organic material. Use specialized
techniques where sensitivities dictate, e.g. brushwood
barriers, seeding, turf, etc.,
Mud pits, where used, should be de-watered and filled in to
1m cover. In fill burn and wasted pits to 1m.
Block access routes, or if required, hand over to local
2009
4-49
authorities.
Document and monitor site recovery.
Development
and production
(onshore)
Access
September
Requirement for permanent long-term access routes appropriate design and engineering considerations required,
in particular consideration of long-term disturbance from
vehicle traffic volume and density in terms of environmental
infrastructure and local population.
All aspects identified for exploration drilling should be
applied to permanent access routes.
Consultation with local authorities is required.
Site preparation
Long-term occupation of sites and permanent structures and
infrastructure-appropriate design and engineering
considerations required, in particular consideration of longterm disturbance and effect on environment, infrastructure
and local population.
applied to permanent sites.
Consultation with local authorities is required.
Site selection procedures must avoid long-term disturbance
and impact on local environment and infrastructure.
Consider locating all facilities at single site to minimize
footprint.
Consider maximizing use of satellite/cluster drilling sites,
horizontal wells, and extended reach drilling in sensitive
areas.
Use consolidated, impermeable base to all facilities with
permanent inbuilt drainage systems.
Segregate drainage systems for offsite and noncontaminated/ clean site areas and oily drainage system for
process areas.
Consider construction and drilling activities and impacts
separately from operational activities. Construction and
drilling will utilize intensive methods and will be longer
term compared to exploration construction and drilling
requirements.
Flowlines and pipeline routing will require consideration in
terms of disturbance and effects (bury/surface).
Site selection and preparation planning should include
consideration of eventual decommissioning and restoration.
Operations
Assess implications of well treatment and workover,
process, storage, power generation and other support and
accommodation facilities in terms of long-term disturbance
and impact.
Assess implications of development on local infrastructure
in particular water supply, power supply, waste disposal and
socioeconomic considerations-housing, education, welfare,
medical, employment/economy etc.
Install proper waste treatment facilities, particularly if local
infrastructure cannot support requirements. In particular,
treatment of waste waters-wash water, process water,
drainage, sewage, produced water. Reinjection of produced
water is a preferred option.
Assess treatment of waste gases and emission limits,
particularly where gas flaring is necessary. Avoid gas
venting
Solid wastes, particularly toxic and hazardous substances,
will require full assessment in terms of treatment and
September
2009
4-50
disposal options. If local facilities unavailable, proper
incineration facilities may be required and a full assessment
of implications will be necessary.
Prepare a detailed waste management plan.
Install oil sumps, interceptors and oily water treatment
system.
Provide contained storage areas for produced oil, chemicals
and hazardous materials, including treatment of tank
sludges.
Prepare detailed contingency plans, personnel training and
regular exercise of response.
Establish consultation and local liaison activities.
Monitor waste streams in order to meet compliance
requirements.
Decommissioning
and aftercare
Develop full decommissioning, restoration and aftercare
plan in consultation with local authorities.
Hand over any facilities and infrastructure to local
authorities with proper instructions for use, maintenance and
include proper training procedures.
Remove, if appropriate, all permanent structures,
foundations and bases, roads etc.
Restore the site to its original condition, leveled and
contoured for drainage and erosion control and prepared for
revegetation.
If replanting is undertaken, select indigenous species
compatible with the surrounding habitat.
Successful reinstatement will require proper planning and
implementation and should not be viewed as an afterthought
or a short-term commitment.
Record and monitor site recovery.
Table 4-8: Offshore Environmental Protection Measures
Activity Source of
Potential Impacts
Environmental Protection Measures
Seismic
operations
(offshore)
Seismic equipment
Use environmental assessment to identify protected and
local sensitivities. Schedule operations during least
sensitive period.
Vessel operations
Consult local authorities and other stakeholder regarding
survey programme, permitting and notifications.
Remain on planned survey track to avoid unwanted
interaction.
Dispose all waste materials and oily water properly to meet
local, national and international regulations (Refer to
MARPOL).
Apply proper procedures for handling and maintenance of
cable equipment particularly cable oil.
All towed equipment must be highly visible.
Make adequate allowance for deviation of towed
equipment when turning.
Prepare contingency plans for lost equipment and oil
spillage.
Attach active acoustic location devices to auxiliary
equipment to aid location and recovery.
September
2009
4-51
Label all towed equipment.
Store and handle explosives according to operators
procedures and local regulations.
Consider using guard boat in busy areas.
Report all unplanned interactions with other resource users
or marine life to the authorities.
Use local expertise to support operations e.g. spotting
marine mammals, wildlife etc.
Exploration and
appraisal drilling
(offshore)
Site selection
Use environmental assessment to identify protected areas
and sensitivities. Schedule operations during least sensitive
periods.
Consult with local authorities regarding site selection and
support infrastructure-ports, vessel and air traffic.
Select least sensitive location within confines of bottom
target/drilling envelope. Consider directional drilling to
access targets beneath sensitive areas. Consider cluster well
drilling.
Local conditions must be fully assessed-wave, wind and
currents.
In coastal areas, select site and equipment to minimize
disturbance, noise, light and visual intrusion.
Access
Exercise strict control on access and all vessel and rig
activity.
In coastal areas where sensitivities dictate use vessels in
preference to helicopters.
Operations
Consult with local authorities regarding emissions,
discharges and solid waste disposal/notifications in regard
to other resource users.
Requirements specified in planning process must be met
including supply vessel operations.
Aqueous discharges. Oily water from deck washing,
drainage systems, bilges etc. should be treated prior to
discharge to meet local, national and international consents.
Sewerage must be properly treated prior to discharge to
meet local and international standards. Treatment must be
adequate to prevent discoloration and visible floating
matter.
Biodegradable kitchen wastes require grinding prior to
discharge, if permitted under local regulations.
Most spills and leakage occur during transfer operations ensure adequate preventative measures are taken and that
spill contingency plan requirements are in place.
Store oils and chemicals properly in contained, drained
areas. Limit quantities stored to a minimum level required
for operational purposes. Ensure proper control
documentation and manifesting and disposal. Do not
dispose of waste chemicals overboard.

Produced water from well tests must meet local regulations
or company specified standards prior to discharge.
Preferentially separate and store oil from well test
operations. If burnt, ensure burner efficiency is adequate to
prevent oil fallout onto sea surface.
Solid wastes. Ensure requirements specified in the planning
process are met with regard to waste treatment and
disposal.
Collect all domestic waste and compact for onshore
disposal. Ensure proper documentation and manifesting.
September
2009
4-52
Ensure onshore receiving and disposal meet local
requirements.
Consider waste segregation at source for different waste
types-organic, inorganic industrial wastes etc.
No debris or waste to be discarded overboard from rig or
supply vessels.
Waste containers must be closed to prevent loss overboard.
Spent oils and lubes should be containerized and returned
to shore.
Consider bulk supply of materials to minimize packaging
wastes.
Muds and cuttings. Preferentially use low toxicity waterbased drilling muds. Minimize use of oil-based muds
(OBM).
Mud make-up and mud and cuttings disposal requirements
addressed in the planning process must be met.
Do not dispose of whole OBM to sea. Any oily cuttings
discharged must meet local regulations or company
specified standards.
Consider downhole disposal of OBM wastes.
Atmospheric emission/noise/light. Ensure requirements
addressed in the planning phase are met with regard to
emissions, noise and light.
Well test burners must be efficient, maintained and
effectively burn gas and oil.
H2S emissions must be effectively controlled.
Decommissioning
and restoration
All debris must be removed from seabed.
Decommissioning of onshore support facilities must meet
planning requirements.
Development
and production
(offshore)
Site selection and
access
Long-term occupation of sites, including supply and
support base, will require detailed assessment of
environmental implications, particularly where resource
use conflicts arise and commercially important species may
be affected.
Consult with local authorities.
Consider site and route selection for flowlines and

pipelines.
Operations
Evaluate construction and drilling activities and impacts
separately from operational activities.
Maximize use of central processing facility and use of
satellite and cluster wells to minimize footprint.
Consult with local authorities.
Assess full implications of well treatment and workover,
process, storage, power generation and other support and
accommodation facilities in terms of long-term disturbance
and impact.
Evaluate implications of development on local
infrastructure, in particular, infrastructure related to
onshore service functions-port and harbour operations,
resource use conflicts, waste treatment and disposal, socioeconomic implications, employment, local services and
supply, support infrastructure for employee and family
accommodation ete.
September
2009
4-53
Incorporate oily water treatment system for both produced
water and contaminated water treatment to meet local,
national and international discharge limits.
Include sewerage treatment system, particularly if close to
shore, to meet local requirements.
Assess treatment of waste gases and emission limits,
particularly where gas is flared. Avoid gas venting.
Treatment and disposal of solid, toxic and hazardous
wastes onshore will require proper planning, particularly if
local infrastructure is limited in capacity and capability. A
detailed waste management plan will be required.
Prepare detailed contingency plans, personnel training and
regular exercise of response, taking into consideration
storage and export systems.
Establish consultation and local liaison activities.
Monitor waste streams in order to meet compliance
requirements.
Decommissioning
and rehabilitation
Develop a full decommissioning and rehabilitation plan in
consultation with local authorities.
Any facilities and infrastructure handed over to local
authorities must include proper instructions for use,
maintenance and include proper training procedures.
Decommissioning of offshore structures is subject to
international and national laws, and should be dealt with on
a case by ease basis with local authorities.
Record and monitor site as required after appropriate
decommissioning activities.
2009
4-54
September
4.7 Environmental Management Plan

A typical EMP shall be composed of the following:
1. summary of the potential impacts of the proposal ;
2. description of the recommended mitigation measures ;
3. statement of their compliance with relevant standards ;
4. allocation of resources and responsibilities for plan implementation ;
5. schedule of the actions to be taken ;
6. programme for surveillance, monitoring and auditing ; and
7. contingency plan when impacts are greater than expected
Each of the above components are precisely discussed below:
Summary of impacts: The predicted adverse environmental and social impacts for w
hich
mitigation measures are identified in the earlier sections to be brief
ly summarized with
cross referencing to the corresponding sections in the EIA report.
Description of mitigation measures: Each mitigation measure should be briefly de
scribed
with reference to the impact to which it relates and the conditions
under which it is
required. These should be accompanied by, or referenced to, project design and
operating
procedures which elaborate on the technical aspects of implementing the
various
measures.
Description of monitoring programme: Environmental monitoring refers to
compliance
monitoring and residual impact monitoring. Compliance monitoring refers to meet
ing the
industry-specific statutory compliance requirements (Ref. Applicable National re
gulations
as detailed in Chapter 3).
Residual impact monitoring refers to monitoring of identified sensitive
locations with
adequate number of samples and frequency. The monitoring programme shou
ld clearly
indicate the linkages between impacts identified in the EIA report, me
asurement
indicators, detection limits (where appropriate), and definition of thre
sholds that will
signal the need for corrective actions.
Institutional arrangements: Responsibilities for mitigation and monitoring
should be
clearly defined, including arrangements for co-ordination between the va
rious actors
responsible for mitigation. Details should be provided w.r.t the deploy
ment of staff
(detailed organogram), monitoring network design, parameters to be monito
red, analysis
methods, associated equipments etc.
Implementation schedule and reporting procedures: The timing, frequency and dura
tion of
mitigation measure should be specified in an implementation schedule, s
howing links
with overall project implementation. Procedures to provide information o
n the progress
and results of mitigation and monitoring measures should also be clearly specifi
ed.
Cost estimates and sources of funds: These should be specified for bo
th the initial
investment and recurring expenses for implementing all measures contained in the
EMP,
integrated into the total project costs, and factored into loan negotiation.
September
2009
4-55
The EMP should contain commitments that are binding on the proponent
in different
phases of project implementation i.e. pre-construction or site clearance
, construction,
operation, decommissioning.
4.8 Reporting
Structure of the EIA report is given in the Table 4.7. Each task prescribed in
ToR shall be
incorporated appropriately in the contents in addition to the described in the t
able.
Table 4-9: Structure of EIA Report
S.NO EIA STRUCTURE CONTENTS
1. Introduction
Purpose of the report
Identification of project & project proponent
Brief description of nature, size, location of the project
and its importance to the country, region
Scope of the study details of regulatory scoping
carried out (As per the ToR for EIA studies)
2. Project Description
Condensed description of those aspects of the project
(based on project feasibility study), likely to cause
environmental effects. Details should be provided to
give clear picture of the following:
Type of project
Need for the project
Location (maps showing general location, specific
location, project boundary & project site layout)
Size or magnitude of operation (incl. Associated
activities required by or for the project)
Proposed schedule for approval and implementation
Technology and process description
Project description including drawings showing project
layout, components of project etc. Schematic
representations of the feasibility drawings which give
information important for EIA purpose
Description of mitigation measures incorporated into
the project to meet environmental standards,
environmental operating conditions, or other EIA
requirements (as required by the scope)
Assessment of New & untested technology for the risk
of technological failure
3. Description of the
Environment
Study area, period, components & methodology
Establishment of baseline for VECs as identified in the
scope
Base maps of all environmental components
4. Anticipated
Environmental Impacts
& Mitigation Measures
Details of Investigated Environmental impacts due to
project location, possible accidents, project design,

project construction, regular operations, final
decommissioning or rehabilitation of a completed
project
Measures for minimizing and / or offsetting adverse
impacts identified
Irreversible and Irretrievable commitments of
environmental components
Assessment of significance of impacts (Criteria for
2009
4-56
determining significance, Assigning significance)
Mitigation measures
5. Analysis of Alternatives
(Technology & Site)
Incase, the scoping exercise results in need for
alternatives:
Description of each alternative
Summary of adverse impacts of each alternative
Mitigation measures proposed for each alternative and
selection of alternative
6. Environmental
Monitoring Program
Technical aspects of monitoring the effectiveness of
mitigation measures (incl. Measurement methodologies,
frequency, location, data analysis, reporting schedules,
emergency procedures, detailed budget & procurement
schedules)
7. Additional Studies
Public Consultation
Risk assessment
Social Impact Assessment, R&R Action Plans
8. Project Benefits
Improvements in the physical infrastructure
Improvements in the social infrastructure
Employment potential skilled; semi-skilled and
unskilled
Other tangible benefits
9. Environmental Cost
Benefit Analysis
If recommended at the Scoping stage
10. EMP
Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring
that the measures of mitigation are implemented and
their effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA
11. Summary & Conclusion
(This will constitute the
summary of the EIA
Report)
Overall justification for implementation of the project
Explanation of how, adverse effects have been
mitigated
12. Disclosure of
Consultants engaged
The names of the Consultants engaged with their brief
resume and nature of Consultancy rendered
September
4.9 Public Consultation

Public consultation refers to the process by which the concerns of lo
cal affected people
and others who have plausible stake in the environmental impacts of t
he project or
activity are ascertained.
Public consultation is not a decision taking process, but is a process to coll
ect views
of the people having plausible stake.
If the SPCB/Public agency cond
ucting public
hearing is not convinced with the plausible stake, then such expressed views nee
d not
be considered.
Public consultation involves two components, one is public hearing, and other
one is
inviting written responses/objections through Internet/by post, etc., by
placing the
summary of EIA report on the web site.
In case of offshore oil and gas exploration, production and developm
ent beyond 10
km from village boundaries, goathans and ecologically sensitive areas such as ma
rine
national parks, sanctuaries, etc. may be exempted from the physical pu
blic hearing
September
2009
4-57
but public consultation shall be applicable in the form of displaying their docu
ments
in websites, seek responses and giving clarification/revisions as decided by the
EAC.
Public consultation involves two components, one is public hearing, and other
one is
inviting written responses/objections through Internet/by post, etc., by
placing the
summary of EIA report on the web site.
Public hearing shall be carried out at the site or in its close p
roximity, district-wise,
for ascertaining concerns of local affected people.
Project proponent shall make a request through a simple letter to t
he
MemberSecretary of the SPCB or UTPCC to arrange public hearing.
Project proponent shall enclose with the letter of request, at least 10 hard c
opies and
10 soft copies of the draft EIA report including the summary EIA rep
ort in English
and local language prepared as per the approved scope of work, to th
e concerned
Authority.
Simultaneously, project proponent shall arrange to send, one hard copy and one
soft
copy, of the above draft EIA report along with the summary EIA repor
t to the
following Authorities within whose jurisdiction the project will be located:
- District magistrate(s)
- Zilla parishad and municipal corporation
- District industries office
- Concerned regional office of the MoEF/SPCB
Above mentioned Authorities shall arrange to widely publicize the dra

ft EIA report
within their respective jurisdictions. They shall also make draft EIA
report for
inspection electronically or otherwise to the public during normal hours till th
e public
hearing is over.
Concerned regulatory Authority (MoEF) shall display the summary of EIA report
on
its website and also make full draft EIA report available for referen
ce at a notified
place during normal office hours at their head office.
SPCB or UTPCC concerned shall make arrangements for giving publicity
about the
project within the State/UT and make available the summary of draft EI
A report for
inspection in select offices, public libraries. They shall also additio
nally make
available a copy of the draft
EIA report to the above five autho
rities/offices as
mentioned.
The MemberSecretary of the concerned SPCB or UTPCC shall finalize the
date,
time and exact venue for the conduct of public hearing within seven days of the
date
of the receipt of the draft EIA report from the project proponent an
d advertise the
same in one major National Daily and one Regional vernacular Daily.
A minimum notice period of 30 (thirty) days shall be provided to t
he public for
furnishing their responses.
No postponement of the date, time, venue of the public hearing shall be undert
aken,
unless some untoward emergency situation occurs and only then on the
recommendation of the concerned District Magistrate the postponement sha
ll be
notified to the public through the same National and Regional vernacular dailies
and
also prominently displayed at all the identified offices by the concer
ned SPCB or
UTPCC.
In the above exceptional circumstances fresh date, time and venue fo
r the
public
consultation shall be decided by the MemberSecretary of the concerned S
PCB or
September
2009
4-58
UTPCC only in consultation with the District Magistrate and notified a
fresh as per
the procedure.
The District Magistrate or his or her representative not below the
rank of an
Additional District Magistrate assisted by a representative of SPCB or UTPCC, sh
all
supervise and preside over the entire public hearing process.
The SPCB or UTPCC shall arrange to video film the entire proceeding
s. A copy of
the videotape or a CD shall be enclosed with the public hearing proc
eedings while
forwarding it to the Regulatory Authority concerned.
The attendance of all those who are present at the venue shall be noted and an
nexed
with the final proceedings
There shall be no quorum required for attendance for starting the proceedings
Every person present at the venue shall be granted the opportunity
to seek
information or clarifications on the project from the Applicant. The s
ummary of the
public hearing proceedings accurately reflecting all the views and concerns expr
essed
shall be recorded by the representative of the SPCB or UTPCC and read over to
the
audience at the end of the proceedings explaining the contents in the
vernacular
language and the agreed minutes shall be signed by the District Magis
trate or his or
her representative on the same day and forwarded to the SPCB/UTPCC concerned.
A statement of the issues raised by the public and the comments of
the proponent
shall also be prepared in the local language and in English and anne
xed to the
proceedings.
The proceedings of the public hearing shall be conspicuously displayed
at the office
of the Panchayats within whose jurisdiction the project is located, of
fice of the
concerned Zilla Parishad, District Magistrate, and the SPCB or UTPCC. The SPCB o
r
UTPCC shall also display the proceedings on its website for general i
nformation.
Comments, if any, on the proceedings, may be sent directly to the co
ncerned
regulatory authorities and the Applicant concerned.
The public hearing shall be completed within a period of 45 (forty
five) days from
date of receipt of the request letter from the Applicant. Therefore t
he SPCB or
UTPCC concerned shall send the public hearing proceedings to the conce
rned
regulatory authority within 8(eight) days of the completion of the public hearin
g. The
proponent may also directly forward a copy of the approved public hea
ring
proceedings to the regulatory authority concerned along with the final
EIA report or
supplementary report to the draft EIA report prepared after the public
hearing and
public consultations.
Upon receipt of the same, the Authority will place executive summary
of the report
on the website to invite responses from other concerned persons having
a plausible
stake in the environmental aspects of the project or activity.
If SPCB/UTPCC is unable to conduct the public hearing in the prescr
ibed time, the
Central Government at the request of the project proponent can engage
a public
agency for conducting the public hearing process within a further period of 45 d
ays.
The respective governments shall pay the appropriate fee to the public
agency for
conducting public hearing.
A public agency means a non-profit making institution/ body such as
technical/academic institutions, government bodies not subordinate to the
concerned
Authority.
September
2009
4-59
If SPCB/Public Agency authorized for conducting public hearing informs
the
Authority, stating that it is not possible to conduct the public hear
ing in a manner,
which will enable the views of the concerned local persons to be fre
ely expressed,
then Authority may consider such report to take a decision that in s
uch particular
case, public consultation may not have the component of public hearing.
Often restricting the public hearing to the specific district may no
t serve the entire
purpose, therefore, NGOs who are local and registered under the Societies Act in
the
adjacent districts may also be allowed to participate in public hearin
g, if they so
desire.
Confidential information including non-disclosable or legally privileged
information
involving intellectual property right, source specified in the applicati
on shall not be
placed on the website.
The Authority shall make available on a written request from any co
ncerned person
the draft EIA report for inspection at a notified place during normal
office hours till
the date of the public hearing.
While mandatory requirements will have to be adhered to, utmost atte
ntion shall be
given to the issues raised in the public hearing for determining the
modifications
needed in the project proposal and the EMP to address such issues.
Final EIA report after making needed amendments, as aforesaid, shall
be submitted
by the applicant to the concerned Authority for prior environmental cl
earance.
Alternatively, a supplementary report to draft EIA and EMP addressing
all concerns
expressed during the public consultation may be submitted.
4.10 Appraisal
Appraisal means the detailed scrutiny by the EAC of the application a
nd the other
documents like the final EIA report, outcome of the public consultation includin
g public
hearing proceedings submitted by the applicant for grant of environmental cleara
nce.
The appraisal shall be made by EAC concerned to the Central Government.

Project proponent either personally or through consultant can make a presentat
ion to
the EAC for the purpose of appraising the features of the project proposal and a
lso to
clarify the issues raised by the members of the EAC.
On completion of these proceedings EAC shall make categorical recommendations
to
the respective Authority, either for grant of prior environmental clear
ance on
stipulated terms & conditions, if any, or rejection of the application with reas
ons.
In case EAC needs to visit the site or obtain further information before being
able to
make categorical recommendations, EAC may inform the project proponent
accordingly. In such an event, it should be ensured that the process of environ
mental
clearance is not unduly delayed to go beyond the prescribed timeframe.
Upon the scrutiny of the final report, if EAC opines that ToR finalized at the
scoping
stage has not been covered by the proponent, then the project proponent may be a
sked
to provide such information. If such information is declined by the project pro
ponent
or is unlikely to be provided early enough so as to complete the en
vironmental
appraisal within prescribed time of 60 days, the EAC may recommend for rejection
of
the proposal with the same reason.
Appraisal shall be strictly in terms of the ToR finalized at the s
coping stage and the
concerns expressed during public consultation.
September
2009
4-60
This process of appraisal shall be completed within 60 days from th
e receipt of the
updated EIA report and EMP report, after completing public consultation.
The EIA report will be typically examined for following:
- Project site description supported by topographic maps & photographs detailed
description of topography, land use and activities at the proposed project site
and
its surroundings (buffer zone) supported by photographic evidence.
- Clarity in description of drainage pattern, location of eco sensitiv
e areas,
vegetation characteristics, wildlife status - highlighting significant environme
ntal
attributes such as feeding, breeding and nesting grounds of wildlife s
pecies,
migratory corridor, wetland, erosion and neighboring issues.
- Description of the project site how well the interfaces between th
e project
related activities and the environment have been identified for the en
tire project
cycle i.e. construction, operation and decommissioning at the end of t
he project
life.
- How complete and authentic are the baseline data pertaining to flor
a and fauna
and socio economic aspects?
- Citing of proper references, with regard to the source(s) of baselin
e data as well
as the name of the investigators/ investigating agency responsible for
collecting
the primary data.
- How consistent are the various values of environmental parameters w.
r.t. each
other?
- Is a reasonable assessment of the environmental and social impact m
ade for the
identified environmental issues including project affected people?
- To what extent the proposed environmental plan will mitigate the environmenta
l
impact and at what estimated cost, shown separately for construction,
operation
and closure stages and also separately in terms of capital and recurring expense
s
along with details of agencies that will be responsible for the imple
mentation of
environmental plan/ conservation plan.
- How well the concerns expressed/highlighted during the Public hearing
have
been addressed and incorporated in the EMP giving item wise financial
provisions and commitments (in quantified terms)?
- How far the proposed environmental monitoring plan will effectively evaluate
the
performance of the EMP? Are details for environmental monitoring plan
provided in the same manner as the EMP?
- Identification of hazard and quantification of risk assessment and w
hether
appropriate mitigation plan has been included in the EMP?
- Does the proposal include a well formulated time bound green belt development
plan for mitigating environmental problems such as fugitive emission of
dust,
gaseous pollutants, noise, odour etc.
- Does EIA makes a serious attempt to guide the project proponent for minimizin
g
the requirement of natural resources including land, water energy and
other non
renewable resources?
- How well the EIA statement has been organized and presented so that the issue
s,
their impact and environmental management strategies emerge clearly from it and
how well organized was the power point presentation made before the E
xpert
Committee?
September
2009
4-61
- Is the information presented in the EIA adequately and appropriately
supported
by maps, imageries and photographs highlighting site features and environmental
attributes?
4.11 Decision-making
The Chairperson reads the sense of the Committee and finalizes the draft minut
es of the
meeting, which are circulated by the Secretary to all the core member
s and sectoral
experts invited to the meeting. Based on the response from the members, the minu
tes are
finalized and signed by the Chairperson.
This process for finalizatio
n of the minutes
should be so organized that the time prescribed for various stages is not exceed
ed.
Approval / Rejection / Reconsideration
The Authority shall consider the recommendations of concerned appraisal Committe
e and
convey its decision within 45 days of the receipt of recommendations.
If the Authority disagrees with the recommendations of the Appraisal
Committee,
then reasons shall be communicated to concerned Appraisal Committee and applican
t
with in 45 days from the receipt of the recommendations. The Appraisal Committe
e
concerned shall consider the observations of the Authority and furnish
its views on
the observations within further period of 60 days. The Authority shall take a d
ecision
with in the next 30 days based on the views of appraisal Committee.
If the decision of the Authority is not conveyed within the time,
then the proponent
may proceed as if the environmental clearance sought has been granted or denied
by
the regulatory authority in terms of the final recommendation of the
concerned
appraisal Committee. For this purpose, the decision of the Appraisal Committee w
ill
be public document, once the period specified above for taking the de
cision by the
Authority is over.
Incase of the Category B projects, application shall be received by
the
MemberSecretary of the SEIAA and clearance shall also be issued by the
same
SEIAA.
If Approved
The MoEF will issue an Environmental Clearance for the project.
The project proponent should make sure that the award of Environmental Clearan
ce is
properly publicized in at least two local newspapers of the district or state wh
ere the
proposed project is located.
For instance, the executive summary of
the
Environmental Clearance may be published in the newspaper along with t
he
information about the location (website/office where it is displayed for public)
where
the detailed Environmental Clearance is made available. The MoEF shall also pla
ce
the environmental clearance in the public domain on Government Portal.
Further
copies of the environmental clearance shall be endorsed to the Heads of local bo
dies,
Panchayats and Municipal bodies in addition to the relevant offices of
the
Government.
The Environmental Clearance will be valid from the start date to ac
tual
commencement of the production of the developmental activity.
September
2009
4-62
4.12 Post Clearance Monitoring Protocol
The MoEF, Government of India will monitor and take appropriate action
under the EP
Act, 1986.
The project proponent must submit half-yearly compliance reports in res
pect of the
stipulated prior environmental clearance terms and conditions in hard a
nd soft copies to
the regulatory authority concerned, on 1st June and 1st December of each calenda
r year.
All such compliance reports submitted by the project management shall
be public
documents. Copies of the same shall be given to any person on applic
ation to the
concerned regulatory authority. The latest such compliance report shall also be
displayed
on the web site of the concerned regulatory authority.
The State Pollution Control Board shall incorporate EIA clearance conditions int
o consent
conditions in respect of Category A and Category B projects and in parallel moni
tor and
enforce the same.
Stakeholders Roles and Responsibilities
September
2009
5-1
5.
STAKEHOLDERS ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
Prior environmental clearance process involves many stakeholders i.e., C
entral
Government, State Government, EAC, Public Agency, SPCB, the project proponents a
nd
the public.
The roles and responsibilities of the organizations involved in different stag
es of prior
environmental clearance are given in Table 5-1.
Organization-specific functions are listed in Table 5-2.
In this Chapter, constitution, composition, functions, etc., of the Aut
horities and the
Committees are discussed in detail.
Table 5-1: Roles and Responsibilities of Stakeholders Involved in Prior
Environmental Clearance
Stage MoEF EAC Project
Proponent
EIA
Consultant
SPCB/
Public
Agency
Public and
Interest
Group
Screening Receives
application
and takes
advise of EAC
Advises the
MoEF
Submits
application
(Form 1) and
provide
necessary
information
Advises and
assists the
proponent by
providing
technical
information
Scoping Approves the
ToR and
communicates
the same to
the project
proponent and
places the
same in the
web-site
Reviews ToR
and visits the
proposed site,
if required and
recommends
the ToR to the
MoEF
Submits the
draft ToR to
EAC and
facilitates the
visit of the
sub-committee
members to
the project site
Prepares ToR
EIA
Report &
Public
Hearing
Reviews and
forwards
copies of the
EIA report to
SPCB /public
agency for
conducting
public hearing
Places the
summary of
EIA report in
the web-site
Submits
detailed EIA
report as per
the finalized
ToR
Facilitates the
public hearing
by arranging
presentation
on the project,
EIA and EMP
takes note of
objections and
Prepares the
EIA report
Presents and
appraises the
likely impacts
and pollution
control
measures
proposed in
the public
hearing
Reviews
EIA report
and
conducts
public
hearing in
the manner
prescribed
Submits
proceedings
and views of
SPCB, as
well, to the
Participates
in public
hearings
and offers
comments
and
observation
s.
Comments
can be sent
directly to
MoEF
through
2009
5-2
Stage MoEF EAC Project
Proponent
EIA
Consultant
SPCB/
Public
Agency
Public and
Interest
Group
Conveys
objections to
the project
proponent for
update, if any
updates the
EMP
accordingly
Authority
and the
project
proponent as
well
Internet in
response to
the
summary
placed in
the website
Appraisal
and
Clearance
Receives
updated EIA
Takes advise
of EAC, and
takes decision
(Clearance
with required
conditions or
reexamination/r
ejection
Critically
examines the
reports,
presentation of
the proponent
and appraises
MoEF
(recommendati
ons are
forwarded to
MoEF)
Submits up-
September
dated EIA,
EMP reports to
MoEF.
Presents the
overall EIA
and EMP
including
public
concerns to
EAC
Provides
technical
advise to the
project
proponent
and if
necessary
presents the
proposed
measures for
mitigation of
likely impacts
(terms and
conditions of
clearance)
Post
Clearance
Monitoring
Implements
environmental
protection
measures
prescribed and
submits
periodic
monitoring
results
Conducts
periodic
monitoring
Incorporates
the
clearance
conditions
into
appropriate
consent
conditions
and ensures
implementat
ion
Table 5-2: Organization-specific Functions
Organization Functions
Central
Government
Constitutes the EAC

Receives application from the project proponent
Communicates the ToR finalized by the EAC to the project proponent
Receives EIA report from the project proponent and soft copy of sum
mary of the report
for placing in the website
Summary of EIA report will be placed in website. Forwards the received respons
es to the
project proponent
Engages other public agency for conducting public hearing in case where the SP
CB does
not respond within time
Receives updated EIA report from project proponent incorporating the
considerations
from the proceedings of public hearing and responses received through other medi
a
Forwards updated EIA report to the EAC for appraisal
Either accepts the recommendations of EAC or asks for reconsideration of speci
fic issues
for review by the EAC.
Takes the final decision acceptance/rejection of the project proposal and comm
unicates
September
2009
5-3
Organization Functions
the same to the project proponent
EAC
Reviews Form 1 and its attachments
Visits site(s), if necessary
Finalizes ToR and recommend to the Central Government, which in turn
communicates
the finalized ToR to the project proponent if not exempted by the Notification
Reviews EIA report, proceedings and appraises their views to the Central gover
nment
If the Central Government has any specific views, then the EAC revi
ews again for
appraisal
SPCB
Receives request from project proponent and conducts public hearing i
n the manner
prescribed.
Conveys proceedings to MoEF and project proponent
Public
Agency
Receives request from the respective Governments to conduct public hearing
Conducts public hearing in the manner prescribed.
Conveys proceedings to the MoEF and the Project proponent
5.1 EAC
EAC is an independent Committee to review each developmental activity
and offer its
recommendations for consideration of the Central Government.
A. Constitution
EAC shall be constituted by the Central Government comprising a maxi
mum of 15
members including a Chairperson and Secretary.
The Central Government will notify committee.
The Chairperson and the non-official member shall have a fixed term of three y
ears,
from the date of Notification by the Central Government.
The Chairperson shall be an eminent environmental expert with underst
anding on
environmental aspects and environmental impacts.
B. Composition
Secretary to EAC shall invite sectoral professionals/experts with the
approval of the
Chairperson.
The Secretary of each EAC shall be an officer of the level equivalent to or ab
ove the
level of Director, the MoEF, GoI.
The suggested model recommended for appraisal committees is a composi
tion of
Core expert members and joined by sectoral experts. This means, core group expe
rt
members will be common to all the developmental projects in a group,
whereas the
sectoral experts join the core group when specific sectoral project is being app
raised.
The desired composition of state or central appraisal committee for this secto
r include
following:
- Environmental management specialist/ environmental regulator
- Air and Noise quality expert
- Occupational health
- Geology/geo-hydrology
- Ecologist
- Transportation specialist
2009
5-4
- Safety and health specialist
- Social scientist
- Crude Extraction and processing
- Chemical Engineer
- Marine Biologist/Engineer, etc.
September
C. Decision-making
The Chairperson reads the recommendations of the Committee and finalize
s the draft
minutes of the meeting, which are circulated by the Secretary to all the core me
mbers and
sectoral experts invited to the meeting.
Based on the response from
the members, the
minutes are finalized and signed by the Chairperson. This process for finalizat
ion of the
minutes should be so organized that the time prescribed for various s
tages is not
exceeded.
D. Operational issues
Secretary may deal with all correspondence, formulate agenda and prep
are agenda
notes. Chairperson and other members may act only for the meetings.
Chairperson of EAC shall be one among the core group having conside
rable
professional experience with proven credentials.
EAC shall meet at least once every month or more frequently, if so needed, to
review
project proposals and to offer recommendations for the consideration of
the
Authority.
EAC members may inspect the site at various stages i.e., during scr
eening, scoping
and appraisal, as per the need felt and decided by the Chairperson of the Commit
tee.
The MoEF through the Secretary of the Committee may pay/reimburse th
e
participation expenses, honorarium etc., to the Chairperson and members.
i. Tenure of EAC
The tenure of Authority/Committee(s) shall be for a fixed period of t
hree years.
At the
end of the three years period, the Authority and the committees need to be re-co
nstituted.
However, staggered appointment dates may be adopted to maintain continu
ity of
members at a given point of time.
ii. Qualifying criteria for nomination of a member to EAC
While recommending nominations and while notifying the members of the Authority
and
Expert Committees, it shall be ensured that all the members meet the
following three
criteria:
Professional qualification
Relevant experience/Experience interfacing with environmental management
Absence of conflict of interest
a) Professional qualification
The person should have at least
- 5 years of formal University training in the concerned discipline l
eading to a
MA/MSc Degree, or
September
2009
5-5
- in case of Engineering/Technology/Architecture disciplines, 4 years fo
rmal
training in a professional training course together with prescribed pra
ctical
training in the field leading to a B.Tech/B.E./B.Arch. Degree, or
- Other professional degree (e.g. Law) involving a total of 5 years
of formal
University training and prescribed practical training, or
- Prescribed apprenticeship/articleship and pass examinations conducted b
y the
concerned professional association (e.g. MBA/IAS/IFS).
In selecting the individual professionals, experience gained by them in
their respective
fields will be taken note of.
b) Relevant experience
Experience shall be related to professional qualification acquired by the pers
on and be
related to one or more of the expertise mentioned for the members of the Core gr
oup
or the Sectoral Experts. Such experience should be a minimum of 15 years.
When the experience mentioned in the foregoing sub-paragraph interface

s with
environmental issues, problems and their management, the requirement for the len
gth
of the experience can be reduced to a minimum of 10 years.
c) Absence of conflict of interest
For the deliberations of the EAC to be independent and unbiased, all
possibilities of
potential conflict of interests have to be eliminated.
Therefore, ser
ving government
officers; persons engaged in industry and their associations; persons a
ssociated with the
formulation of development projects requiring environmental clearance, an
d persons
associated with environmental activism shall not be considered for membership of
EAC.
iii. Age
Below 70 years for the members and below 72 years for the Chairperso
n of the EAC.
The applicability of the age is at the time of the Notification of
the EAC by the Central
Government.
Summary regarding the eligibility criteria for Chairperson and Members
of the EAC is
given in Table 5-4.
Table 5-3: EAC: Eligibility Criteria for Chairperson/ Members / Secretary
Requirement S.
No.
Attribute Core
Members/Sectoral
Expert members
Secretary Chairperson
1 Professional
qualification as per
the Notification
Compulsory Compulsory Compulsory
2
Experience
(Fulfilling any
one of a, b, c)
a Professional
Qualification + 15
years of experience in
one of the expertise
area mentioned in the
Appendix VI
Professional
Qualification + 15 years
of experience in one of
the expertise area
mentioned in the
Appendix VI
Professional
Qualification + 15
Appendix VI

2009
5-6
Requirement S.
No.
Attribute Core
Members/Sectoral
Expert members
Secretary Chairperson
b Professional
Qualification +PhD+10
Appendix VI
Professional
one of the expertise area
mentioned in the
Appendix VI
Professional
area mentioned in
Appendix VI
c Professional
Qualification +10 years
the expertise area
mentioned in the
Appendix VI + 5 years
interface with
environmental issues,
problems and their
management
Professional
Qualification +10 years
the expertise area
mentioned in the
Appendix VI + 5 years
interface with
environmental issues,
problems and their
management
------------3
Test of independence
(conflict of interest)
and minimum grade
of the Secretary of the
Committees
Shall not be a serving
September
government officer
Shall not be a person
engaged in industry
and their associations
associated with
environmental activism
In case of EAC, not less
than a Director from the
MoEF, Government of
India
Shall not be a serving
government officer
engaged in industry and
their associations
associated with
environmental activism
4 Age Below 67 years at the
time of Notification of
the Committee
As per state Government
Service Rules
Below 72 Years at the
time of the Notification
of the Committee
5 Membership in Core
committees
Only one other than
this nomination is
permitted
Shall not be a member in
other SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
6 Membership of
Sectoral Experts
Only three other than
this nomination is
permitted
Shall not be a member in
other SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
Shall not be a member
in any other
SEIAA/EAC/SEAC
7 Tenure of earlier
appointment
(continuous)
Only one term before
this in continuity is
permitted
Not applicable Only one term before
this in continuity is
permitted
8 Eminent
environmental
expertise with
understanding on
environmental aspects
and impacts
Desirable Not applicable Compulsory
Notes:
September
2009
5-7
1. Core members are the members in EAC/SEAC, who are common for all
the types of
developmental activities, whereas, sectoral expert members will join for the spe
cific developmental
sectors. Core members may be limited to about 12.
2. Sectoral expert members: Sectoral Expert members are the members who join the
EAC/SEAC,
when corresponding sector is being reviewed/appraised. At a given sect
oral review, a maximum
of three sectoral expert members may join. Therefore the total number of expert
members in EAC
does not exceed 15.
3. A member after continuous membership in two terms (six years) shal
l not be considered for
further continuation.
His/her nomination may be reconsidered after a
gap of one term (three
years), if other criteria meet.
4. Chairperson/Member (core or sectoral expert) once notified may not
be removed prior to the
tenure of 3 years with out cause and proper enquiry. A member after
continuous membership in
two terms (6 years) shall not be considered for further continuation.
The same profile may be
considered for nomination after a gap three years, i.e., one term if other crite
ria are meeting.
Other conditions
Sectoral experts/invitees (not being a member in a Committee) can have members
hip
in not more than four states.
An expert member of a Committee shall not have membership continuous
ly in the
same committee for more than two terms i.e., six years. They can be nominated a
fter
a gap of three years, i.e., one term.
When a member of Committee has been associated with any development
project,
which comes for environmental clearance, he/she may not participate in
the
deliberations and the decisions in respect to that particular project.
At least four members shall be present in each meeting to fulfill the quorum
If a member does not consecutively attend six meetings, without prio
r intimation to
the Committee his/her membership may be terminated by the Notifying Au
thority.
Prior information for absence due to academic pursuits, career developm
ent and
national/state-endorsed programmes may be considered as genuine grounds
for
retention of membership.
Annexure I
A Compilation of Legal Instruments
Sl.
No.
Legal Instrument
(Type, Reference,
Year)
Responsible Ministries or
Bodies
Chemical Use
Categories/
Pollutants
Objective of Legislation Relevant Articles/Provisions
1 Air (Prevention and
Control of
Pollution) Act, 1981
amended 1987
Central Pollution Control
Board and State Pollution
Control Boards
Air pollutants from
chemical industries
The prevention, control and
abatement of air pollution
Section 2: Definitions
Section 21: Consent from State Boards
Section 22: Not to allow emissions exceeding
prescribed limits
Section 24: Power of Entry and Inspection
Section 25: Power to Obtain Information
Section 26: Power to Take Samples
Section 37-43: Penalties and Procedures
2 Air (Prevention and
Control of
Pollution) (Union
Territories) Rules,
1983
Control Boards
Air pollutants from
chemical industries
The prevention, control and

abatement of air pollution
Rule 2: Definitions
Rule 9: Consent Applications
3 Water (Prevention
and Control of
Pollution) Act, 1974
amended 1988
Control Boards
Water Pollutants
from water
polluting industries
The prevention and control
of water pollution and also
maintaining or restoring the
wholesomeness of water
Section 20: Power to Obtain Information
Section 21: Power to Take Samples
Section 24: Prohibition on Disposal
Section 25: Restriction on New Outlet and New
Discharge
Section 26: Provision regarding existing discharge
of sewage or trade effluent
Section 27: Refusal or withdrawal of consent by
state boards
4 Water (Prevention
and Control of
Pollution) Rules,
1975
Control Boards
Water Pollutants
from water
polluting industries
The prevention and control
of water pollution and also
maintaining or restoring the
wholesomeness of water
Rule 2: Definitions
Rule 30: Power to take samples
Rule 32: Consent Applications
ii
5 The Environment
(Protection) Act,
1986, amended
1991
Ministry of Environment and
Forests, Central Pollution
Control Board and State
Pollution Control Boards
All types of
environmental
pollutants
Protection and Improvement
of the Environment
Section 7: Not to allow emission or discharge of
environmental pollutants in excess of prescribed
standards
Section 8: Handing of Hazardous Substances
Section 11: Power to take samples
6 Environmental
(Protection) Rules,
1986 (Amendments
in 1999, 2001, 2002,
2002, 2002, 2003,
2004)
Ministry of Environment and
Forests, Central Pollution
Control Board and State
Pollution Control Boards
All types of
Environmental
Pollutants
Protection and Improvement
of the Environment
Rule 2: Definitions
Rule 3: Standards for emission or discharge of
environmental pollutants
Rule 5: Prohibition and restriction on the location
of industries and the carrying on process and
operations in different areas
Rule 13: Prohibition and restriction on the
handling of hazardous substances in different areas
Rule 14: Submission of environmental statement
7 Hazardous Waste
(Management and
Handling) Rules,
1989 amended 2000
and 2003
MoEF, CPCB, SPCB, DGFT,
Port Authority and Customs
Authority
Hazardous Wastes
generated from
industries using
hazardous
chemicals
Management & Handling of
hazardous wastes in line with
the Basel convention
Rule 2: Application
Rule 3: Definitions
Rule 4: Responsibility of the occupier and operator
of a facility for handling of wastes
Rule 4A: Duties of the occupier and operator of a
facility
Rule 4B: Duties of the authority
Rule 5: Grant of authorization for handling
hazardous wastes
Rule 6: Power to suspend or cancel authorization

Rule 7: Packaging, labeling and transport of
hazardous wastes
Rule 8: Disposal sites
Rule 9: Record and returns
Rule 10: Accident reporting and follow up
Rule 11: Import and export of hazardous waste for
dumping and disposal
Rule 12: Import and export of hazardous waste for
recycling and reuse
Rule 13: Import of hazardous wastes
Rule 14: Export of hazardous waste
iii
Rule 15: Illegal traffic
Rule 16: Liability of the occupier, transporter and
operator of a facility
Rule 19: Procedure for registration and renewal of
registration of recyclers and re-refiners
Rule 20: Responsibility of waste generator
8 Manufacture
Storage and Import
of Hazardous
Chemicals Rules,
1989 amended 2000
Ministry of Environment &
Forests, Chief Controller of
Imports and Exports, CPCB,
SPCB, Chief Inspector of
Factories, Chief Inspector of
Dock Safety, Chief Inspector
of Mines, AERB, Chief
Controller of Explosives,
District Collector or District
Emergency Authority, CEES
under DRDO
Hazardous
Chemicals - Toxic,
Explosive,
Flammable,
Reactive
Regulate the manufacture,
storage and import of
Hazardous Chemicals
Rule 2: Definitions
Rule 4: responsibility of the Occupier
Rule 5: Notification of Major Accidents
Rule 7-8: Approval and notification of site and
updating
Rule 10-11: Safety Reports and Safety Audit
reports and updating
Rule 13: Preparation of Onsite Emergency Plan
Rule 14: Preparation of Offsite Emergency Plan
Rule 15: Information to persons likely to get
affected
Rule 16: Proprietary Information
Rule 17: Material Safety Data Sheets
Rule 18: Import of Hazardous Chemicals
9 Chemical Accidents
(Emergency
Planning,
Preparedness and
Response) Rules,
1996
CCG, SCG, DCG, LCG and
MAH Units
Hazardous
Chemicals - Toxic,
Explosive,
Flammable,
Reactive
Emergency Planning
Preparedness and Response
to chemical accidents
Rule 2: Definitions
Rule 5: Functions of CCG
Rule 7: Functions of SCG
Rule 9: Functions of DCG
Rule 10: Functions of LCG
10 Ozone Depleting
Substances
(Regulation and
Control) Rules,
2000
MoEF Ozone Depleting
Substances
Regulate the production,
import, use, sale, purchase
and phase-out of the ODS
Rule 2: Definitions
Rule 3: Regulation of production and consumption
of ozone depleting substances
Rule 4: Prohibition on export to or import from
countries not specified in Schedule VI
Rule 5: Ozone depleting substances are to be
exported to or imported from countries specified in
Schedule VI under a license
Rule 6: Regulation of the sale of ozone depleting
substances
Rule 7: Regulation on the purchase of ozone
iv
depleting substances
Rule 8: Regulation on the use of ozone depleting
substance
Rule 9: Prohibition on new investments with
ozone depleting substances
Rule 10: Regulation of import, export and sale of
products made with or containing ozone depleting
substances
Rule 11: Regulation on reclamation and
destruction of ozone depleting substances
Rule 12: Regulation on manufacture, import and
export of compressors
Rule 13: Procedure for registration, cancellation of
registration and appeal against such orders
Rule 14: Monitoring and reporting requirements
11 EIA Notification,
1994
MoEF, SPCB Chemicals/pollutan
ts expected to be
generated from
industrial activities
Requirement of
environmental clearance
before establishment of or
modernization / expansion of
certain type of industries/
projects.
Rule 2: Requirements and procedure for seeking
environmental clearance of projects
12 Public Liability
Insurance Act, 1991
amended 1992
Forests, District Collector
Hazardous
Substances
To provide immediate relief
to persons affected by
accident involving hazardous
substances
Section 3: Liability to give relief in certain cases
on principle of no fault
Section 4: Duty of owner to take out insurance
policy
Section 7A: Establishment of Environmental
Relief Fund
Section 14-18: Penalties and Offences
13 Public Liability
Insurance Rules,
1991 amended 1993
Forests, District Collector
Hazardous
Substances
To provide immediate relief
to persons affected by
accident involving hazardous
substances and also for
Establishing an
Environmental Relief fund
Rule 2: Definitions
Rule 6: Establishment of administration of fund
Rule 10: Extent of liability
Rule 11: Contribution of the owner to
environmental relief fund
14 Factories Act, 1948 Ministry of Labour, Chemicals as Control of workplace
Section 2: Interpretation
v
DGFASLI and Directorate of
Industrial Safety and
Health/Factories Inspectorate
specified in the
Table
environment, and providing

for good health and safety of
workers
Section 6: Approval, licensing and registration of
factories
Section 7A: General duties of the occupier
Section 7B: General duties of manufacturers etc.,
as regards articles and substances for use in
factories
Section 12: Disposal of wastes and effluents
Section 14: Dust and fume
Section 36: Precautions against dangerous fumes,
gases, etc.
Section 37: Explosion or inflammable dust, gas,
etc.
Chapter IVA: Provisions relating to Hazardous
processes
Section 87: Dangerous operations
Section 87A: Power to prohibit employment on
account of serious hazard
Section 88: Notice of certain accident
Section 88A: Notice of certain dangerous
occurrences
Chapter X: Penalties and procedures
15 The Petroleum Act,
1934
Ministry of Petroleum and
Natural Gas
Petroleum (Class
A, B and C - as
defined in the
rules)
Regulate the import,
transport, storage,
production, refining and
blending of petroleum
Section 3: Import, transport and storage of
petroleum
Section 5: Production, refining and blending of
petroleum
Section 6: Receptacles of dangerous petroleum to
show a warning
Section 23-28 Penalties and Procedure
16 The Petroleum
Rules, 2002
Ministry of Petroleum and
Natural Gas, Ministry of
Shipping (for notification of
authorized ports for import),
Forests or SPCB (for
clearance of establishment of
loading/unloading facilities at
Petroleum (Class
A, B and C - as
defined in the
rules)
transport, storage,
production, refining and

blending of petroleum
Rule 2: Definition
Chapter I part II: General Provision
Chapter II: Importation of Petroleum
Chapter III: Transport of Petroleum
Chapter VII: Licenses
vi
ports) Chief Controller of
Explosives, district authority,
Commissioner of Customs,
Port Conservator, State
Maritime Board (Import)
17 The Explosives Act,
1884
Ministry of Commerce and
Industry (Department of
Explosives)
Explosive
substances as
defined under the
Act
To regulate the manufacture,
possession, use, sale,
transport, export and import
of explosives with a view to
prevent accidents
Section 4: Definition
Section 6: Power for Central government to
prohibit the manufacture, possession or
importation of especially dangerous explosives
Section 6B: Grant of Licenses
18 The Explosive
Rules, 1983
Industry and Chief Controller
of Explosives, port
conservator, customs
collector, railway
administration
Explosive
substances as
defined under the
Act
To regulate the manufacture,
possession, use, sale,
transport, export and import
of explosives with a view to
prevent accidents
Rule 2: Definition
Chapter II: General Provisions
Chapter III: Import and Export
Chapter IV: Transport
Chapter V: Manufacture of explosives
Chapter VI: Possession sale and use
Chapter VII: Licenses
19 The Gas Cylinder
Rules, 2004

of Explosives, port
collector, DGCA, DC, DM,
Police (sub inspector to
commissioner)
Gases (Toxic, non
toxic and non
flammable, non
toxic and
flammable,
Dissolved
Acetylene Gas,
Non toxic and
flammable
liquefiable gas
other than LPG,
LPG
Regulate the import, storage,
handling and transportation
of gas cylinders with a view
to prevent accidents
Rule 2: Definition
Chapter II: General Provisions
Chapter III: Importation of Cylinder
Chapter IV: Transport of Cylinder
Chapter VII: Filling and Possession
20 The Static and
Mobile Pressure
Vessels (Unfired)
Rules, 1981
of Explosives, port
collector, DGCA, DC, DM,
Police (sub inspector to
commissioner)
Gases (Toxic, non
toxic and non
flammable, non
toxic and
flammable,
Dissolved
Acetylene Gas,
manufacture, design,
installation, transportation,
handling, use and testing of
mobile and static pressure
vessels (unfired) with a view
to prevent accidents
Rule 2: Definition
Chapter III: Storage
Chapter IV: Transport
Chapter V: Licenses
vii
Non toxic and

flammable
liquefiable gas
other than LPG,
LPG
21 The Motor Vehicle
Act, 1988
Ministry of Shipping, Road
Transport and Highways
Hazardous and
Dangerous Goods
To consolidate and amend
the law relating to motor
vehicles
Section 2: Definition
Chapter II: Licensing of drivers of motor vehicle
Chapter VII: Construction equipment and
maintenance of motor vehicles
22 The Central Motor
Vehicle Rules, 1989
Hazardous and
Dangerous Goods
To consolidate and amend
the law relating to motor
vehicles including to regulate
the transportation of
dangerous goods with a view
to prevent loss of life or
damage to the environment
Rule 2: Definition
Rule 9: Educational qualification for drivers of
goods carriages carrying dangerous or hazardous
goods
Rule 129: Transportation of goods of dangerous or
hazardous nature to human life
Rule 129A: Spark arrestors
Rule 130: Manner of display of class labels
Rule 131: Responsibility of the consignor for safe
transport of dangerous or hazardous goods
Rule 132: Responsibility of the transporter or
owner of goods carriage
Rule 133: Responsibility of the driver
Rule 134: Emergency Information Panel
Rule 135: Driver to be instructed
Rule 136: Driver to report to the police station
about accident
Rule 137: Class labels
23 The Custom Act,
1962
CBEC, Ministry of Finance Hazardous Goods To prevent entry of illegal
hazardous goods or banned
goods including hazardous or
banned chemicals
Section 2: definitions
Section 11: Power to Prohibit Importation or
Exportation of Goods
24 The Merchant
Shipping Act, 1958
amended in 2002
and 2003
All packaged cargo
including
Dangerous and
hazardous goods as
defined in the rules
For safe handling and
transportation of cargo
including dangerous goods to
prevent accident
Section 331: Carriage of Dangerous Goods
viii
25 Merchant Shipping
(carriage of Cargo)
Rules 1995
All packaged cargo
including
Dangerous and
hazardous goods as
defined in the rules
For safe handling and
transportation of cargo
including dangerous goods to
prevent accident
26 The Indian Port Act,
1908
All Chemicals handling and
storage
For control of activities on
ports including safety of
shipping and conservation of
ports
Chapter IV: Rules for the safety of shipping and
the conservation of ports
Chapter VII: Provisions with respect to penalties
27 The Dock Workers,
(Safety, Health and
Welfare) Act, 1986
Ministry of Labour,
Dock Safety
All Chemicals
termed as
dangerous goods
Safety of Dock workers
including handling of
dangerous goods
28 The Dock Workers,

(Safety, Health and
Welfare) Rules,
1990
Ministry of Labour,
Dock Safety
All Chemicals
termed as
dangerous goods
Safety of Dock workers
including handling of
dangerous goods
Annexure II
Form 1 (Application Form for Obtaining EIA Clearance )
19
FORM 1
(I)
Basic Information
Name of the Project:
Location / site alternatives under consideration:
Size of the Project: *
Expected cost of the project:
Contact Information:
Screening Category:
Capacity corresponding to sectoral activity (such as production capacit
y for
manufacturing, mining lease area and production capacity for mineral
production, area for mineral exploration, length for linear transport
infrastructure, generation capacity for power generation etc.,)
(II) Activity
1. Construction, operation or decommissioning of the Project involving
actions,
which will cause physical changes in the locality (topography, land use, changes
in water bodies, etc.)
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No
Details thereof (with
approximate quantities /rates,
wherever possible) with source
of information data
1.1 Permanent or temporary change in land use,
land cover or topography including increase
in
intensity of land use (with respect to
local
land use plan)
1.2 Clearance of existing land, vegetation and
buildings?
1.3 Creation of new land uses?
1.4 Pre-construction investigations e.g. bore
houses, soil testing?
1.5 Construction works?
20
1.6 Demolition works?

1.7 Temporary sites used for construction works
or
housing of construction workers?
1.8 Above ground buildings, structures or
earthworks including linear structures, cut
and
fill or excavations
1.9 Underground works including mining or
tunneling?
1.10 Reclamation works?
1.11 Dredging?
1.12 Offshore structures?
1.13 Production and manufacturing processes?
1.14 Facilities for storage of goods or materials?
1.15 Facilities for treatment or disposal of solid
waste or liquid effluents?
1.16 Facilities for long term housing of
operational
workers?
1.17 New road, rail or sea traffic during
construction or operation?
1.18 New road, rail, air waterborne or other
transport infrastructure including new or
altered routes and stations, ports, airports etc?
1.19 Closure or diversion of existing transport
routes or infrastructure leading to changes in
traffic
movements?
1.20 New or diverted transmission lines or
pipelines?
1.21 Impoundment, damming, culverting,
realignment or other changes to the
hydrology of watercourses or aquifers?
1.22 Stream crossings?
1.23 Abstraction or transfers of water form ground
or surface waters?
1.24 Changes in water bodies or the land surface
affecting drainage or run-off?
21
1.25 Transport of personnel or materials for
construction, operation or decommissioning?
1.26 Long-term dismantling or decommissioning
or restoration works?
1.27 Ongoing activity during decommissioning
which could have an impact on the
environment?
1.28 Influx of people to an area in either
temporarily or permanently?
1.29 Introduction of alien species?
1.30 Loss of native species or genetic diversity?
1.31 Any other actions?
2.
Use of Natural resources for construction or operation of the Pr
oject (such as land,
water, materials or energy, especially any resources which are non-rene
wable or in
short supply):
S.No. Information/checklist confirmation Yes/No
approximate quantities /rates,
wherever possible) with source

of information data
2.1 Land especially undeveloped or agricultural
land (ha)
2.2 Water (expected source & competing users)
unit: KLD
2.3 Minerals (MT)
2.4
Construction material stone, aggregates,
and / soil (expected source MT)
2.5 Forests and timber (source MT)
2.6 Energy including electricity and fuels
(source, competing users) Unit: fuel (MT),
energy (MW)
2.7 Any other natural resources (use appropriate
standard units)
22
3.
Use, storage, transport, handling or production of substances
or mater
ials,
which could be harmful to human health or the environment or raise
concerns about actual or perceived risks to human health.
approximate
quantities/rates, wherever
possible) with source of
information data
3.1 Use of substances or materials, which are
hazardous (as per MSIHC rules) to human health or
the environment (flora, fauna, and
water supplies)
3.2 Changes in occurrence of disease or affect disease
vectors (e.g. insect or water borne diseases)
3.3 Affect the welfare of people e.g. by changing living
conditions?
3.4 Vulnerable groups of people who could be affected
by the project e.g. hospital patients, children, the
elderly etc.,
3.5 Any other causes
4. Production of solid wastes during construction or operation or
decommissioning (MT/month)
approximate
information data
4.1 Spoil, overburden or mine wastes
4.2 Municipal waste (domestic and or commercial
wastes)
4.3 Hazardous wastes (as per Hazardous Waste
Management Rules)
23
4.4 Other industrial process wastes
4.5 Surplus product
4.6 Sewage sludge or other sludge from effluent
treatment
4.7 Construction or demolition wastes
4.8 Redundant machinery or equipment
4.9 Contaminated soils or other materials
4.10 Agricultural wastes

4.11 Other solid wastes
5. Release of pollutants or any hazardous, toxic or noxious substances
to air
(Kg/hr)
approximate
information data
5.1 Emissions from combustion of fossil fuels from
stationary or mobile sources
5.2 Emissions from production processes
5.3 Emissions from materials handling including
storage or transport
5.4 Emissions from construction activities including
plant and equipment
5.5 Dust or odours from handling of materials
including construction materials, sewage and
waste
24
5.6
Emissions from incineration of waste
5.7 Emissions from burning of waste in open air (e.g.
slash materials, construction debris)
5.8 Emissions from any other sources
6. Generation of Noise and Vibration, and Emissions of Light and Heat:
S.No. Information/Checklist confirmation
Yes/No Details thereof (with
approximate
information data with
source of information
data
6.1 From operation of equipment e.g. engines,
ventilation plant, crushers
6.2 From industrial or similar processes
6.3 From construction or demolition
6.4 From blasting or piling
6.5 From construction or operational traffic
6.6 From lighting or cooling systems
6.7 From any other sources
25
7. Risks of contamination of land or water from releases of
poll
utants into the
ground or into sewers, surface waters, groundwater, coastal waters or the sea:
approximate
information data
7.1 From handling, storage, use or spillage of
hazardous materials
7.2 From discharge of sewage or other effluents to
water or the land (expected mode and place of
discharge)
7.3 By deposition of pollutants emitted to air into the
land or into water

7.4 From any other sources
7.5 Is there a risk of long term build up of pollutants in
the environment from these
sources?
8. Risk of accidents during construction or operation of the Project,
which could
affect human health or the environment
approximate
information data
8.1 From explosions, spillages, fires etc from storage,
handling, use or production of hazardous
substances
8.2 From any other causes
8.3 Could the project be affected by natural disasters
causing environmental damage (e.g.
floods,
earthquakes, landslides, cloudburst etc)?
26
9. Factors which should be considered (such as consequential developmen
t) which
could lead to environmental effects or the potential for cumulative im
pacts
with
other existing or planned activities in the locality
S. No. Information/Checklist confirmation Yes/No
approximate
information data
9.1 Lead to development of supporting.
lities, ancillary development or development
stimulated by the project which could have
impact on the environment e.g.:
Supporting infrastructure (roads, power supply,
waste or waste water treatment, etc.)
housing development
extractive industries
supply industries
other
9.2 Lead to after-use of the site, which could havean
impact on the environment
9.3 Set a precedent for later developments
9.4 Have cumulative effects due to proximity to other
existing or planned projects with similar
effects
(III) Environmental Sensitivity
S.No. Areas Name/
Identity
Aerial distance (within 15
km.)
Proposed project location
boundary
1 Areas protected under international conventions,
national or local legislation for their ecological,
landscape, cultural or other related value
27
2 Areas which are important or sensitive for
ecological reasons - Wetlands, watercourses or

other water bodies, coastal zone, biospheres,
mountains, forests
3 Areas used by protected, important or sensitive
species of flora or fauna for breeding, nesting,
foraging, resting, over wintering, migration
4 Inland, coastal, marine or underground waters
5 State, National boundaries
6 Routes or facilities used by the public for access
to recreation or other tourist, pilgrim areas
7 Defence installations
8 Densely populated or built-up area
9 Areas occupied by sensitive man-made land uses
(hospitals, schools, places of worship, community
facilities)
10 Areas containing important, high quality or scarce
resources
(ground water resources, surface resources,
forestry, agriculture, fisheries, tourism, minerals)
11 Areas already subjected to pollution or
environmental damage. (those where existing legal
environmental standards
are exceeded)
12 Areas susceptible to natural hazard which could
cause the project to present environmental
problems
(earthquakes, subsidence, landslides, erosion,
flooding
or extreme or adverse climatic conditions)
(IV). Proposed Terms of Reference for EIA studies
Annexure III
Pre-Feasibility Report
ii
Offshore Facilities
Project Details
General
Location Details
Longitude & Latitude
Nearest major towns and industries
Approach to Site
Road: Existing Highway/roads distance from site
Distance from nearest airport (existing/proposed)
Ecologically sensitive areas
Secondary information on bathymetry studies
Transportation arrangements
New facilities needed
Source of construction water and potable water
Source of construction power & start up power
Source of availability of construction material like sand, brick, sto
ne chips,
borrow earth etc.
Location & vicinity plan identifying the areas proposed for plant
-
Techno-economic Feasibility Aspects

Area availability & its development
General Layout
Access to the site for transportation of equipments, construction mac
hinery,
material etc.
Water availability for consumptive use
Fuel availability and its transportation
Environmental aspects
Ultimate plant capacity, which could be set up
Technical Profile of the Project
Technical parameters of the plant & equipment.
Meteorological data like temperature, humidity, rainfall, tides, curren
ts, wind
pressure & wind direction.
Seismological studies of project specific design seismic parameters.
Project implementation schedule showing various activities.
Justification of the Project
Current Demand Scenario of the product
Alternatives to meet the demand
Post Project scenario on residual demand
Site Selection
iii
Options considered for sites
Basis of site selection and analysis
Support infrastructure availability at selected site
Scope of Geo-technical / Geo-Physical studies
Future Prospects
Ascertain the costs and benefits of the proposed project for project life
De-rated capacities and efficiencies
Technical and logistic constraints/ requirements of project sustainability
Project Design/Technology
Analysis of various possible configurations for each technology or a combinati
on
of the technologies from available sources
Details of Socio-economic Consequences
Importance of the proposed product for Quality-of-Life
Corporate Responsibilities & Status of Compliance
Employments and infrastructure added in the district of locations
Status of land availability, current and post project land use variation
R&R status compliance requirements and broad approach
The above listing is not exhaustive.
Thus the proponent may provide
additional
necessary information, felt appropriate, to include in the pre-feasibili
ty study report
in support of selecting the site for the proposed developmental activi

ties.
The EAC
during scrutiny, may specifically ask for any additional information/ data requi
red to
substantiate the requirement to prescribe the ToR for EIA studies. However, it
is to
make clear that all the required further information by EAC shall be
mentioned in
one single letter, within the prescribed time.
iv
Onshore Facilities
Environmental Aspects
Location Details
- State/District/Village
- Longitude & Latitude
- Nearest major towns and industries
- Approach to Site
- Rail: Nearest Rail Head & Distance
- Road: Existing Highway/roads distance from site
- Distance from nearest airport (existing/proposed)
- Distance from nearest waterways
- Constraints if any to approach site particularly for construction ma
terials,
plants and equipments etc.
Details of ecologically sensitive areas like tropical forests, biosphe
re reserves,
national park, sanctuaries, important lakes, endangered species of flora
& fauna
and distance from site, etc.
Places of archaeological importance, river, streams, Estuary, sea, hills/mount
ains,
historical, cultural, religious or tourist importance, defence installation, etc
.
Land Availability
- Extent of land available for plant, township
- Land use pattern (agricultural, barren, forest etc.,)
- Incase of agricultural land, whether irrigated/non irrigated, number of crops
- Land ownership (Govt. Pvt., tribal, non-tribal etc.,)
- Prevailing land cost details
- Estimation of population affected, Homestead Oustees, Land Ownership, etc.
Project Details
General
Topography of the area
Permanent features
In case site is in flood prone area include details of the site
Soil conditions, soil investigations, etc.
Drainage patterns
Source of consumptive water and surplus water availability
Location in relation to River/Canal/Dam, water availability and quality
Approved water allocation quota (drinking, irrigation and industrial u
se) and
surplus availability
Inter-state issues, if any
Feasible ways of bringing water to site indicating constraints if any.
Transportation arrangements
New facilities needed
v
Source of availability of construction material like sand, brick, sto
ne chips,
borrow earth etc.
Proximity to infrastructure facilities (such as hospitals, schools, re
sidential
accommodation) available nearby
Location & vicinity plan identifying the areas proposed for plant, c
olony &
disposal
Techno-economic Feasibility Aspects
Land availability & its development
General Layout
Access to the site for transportation of equipments, construction mac
hinery,
material etc.
Water availability for cooling & consumptive use
Fuel availability and its transportation
Environmental and forest aspects
Ultimate plant capacity which could be set up
Technical Profile of the Project
Technical parameters of the plant & equipments.
Meteorological data like temperature, humidity, rainfall, wind pressure
& wind
direction.
Seismological studies of project specific design seismic parameters.
Project implementation schedule showing various activities.
Justification of the Project
Current Demand Scenario of the product
Alternatives to meet the demand
Post Project scenario on Residual Demand
Site Selection
Options considered for sites
Basis of site selection and analysis
Support infrastructure availability at selected site
Scope of geotechnical studies
Future Prospects
Ascertain the costs and benefits of the proposed project for project life
De-rated capacities and efficiencies
Technical and logistic constraints/ requirements of project sustainability
Project Design/Technology
Analysis of various possible configurations for each technology or a combinati
on
of these technologies from available manufactures
Details of Socio-economic Consequences
vi
Importance of the proposed product for Quality-of-Life

Corporate Responsibilities & Status of Compliance
Employments and infrastructure added in the district of locations
Status of land availability, current and post project land use variation
The above listing is not exhaustive.
Thus the proponent may provide
additional
necessary information, felt appropriate, to include in the pre-feasibili
ty study report
in support of selecting the site for the proposed developmental activi
ties.
The EAC
during scrutiny, may specifically ask for any additional information/ data requi
red to
substantiate the requirement to prescribe the ToR for EIA studies. However, it
is to
make clear that all the required further information by EAC shall be
mentioned in
one single letter, within the prescribed time.
Annexure IV
Types of Monitoring and Network Design Considerations
i
TYPES OF MONITORING AND NETWORK DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
A. Types of Monitoring
Monitoring refers to the collection of data using a series of repetit
ive measurements of
environmental parameters (or, more generally, to a process of systemati
c observation).
The environmental quality monitoring programme design will be dependent
upon the
monitoring objectives specified for the selected area of interest. The
main types of EIA
monitoring activities are:
Baseline monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters during the
preproject period for the purpose of determining the range of variation of the syst
em and
establishing reference points against which changes can be measured.
This leads to
the assessment of the possible (additional available) assimilative capac
ity of the
environmental components in pre-project period w.r.t. the standard or target lev
el.
Effects monitoring is the measurement of environmental parameters duri
ng project
construction and implementation to detect changes which are attributable
to the
project to provide the necessary information to:
verify the accuracy of EIA predictions; and
determine the effectiveness of measures to mitigate adverse effects of
projects on
the environment.
Feedback from environmental effect monitoring programs may be used to improve

the predictive capability of EIAs and also determine whether more or less string
ent
mitigation measures are needed
Compliance monitoring is the periodic sampling or continuous measureme
nt of
environmental parameters to ensure that regulatory requirements and stan
dards are
being met.
Compliance and effects monitoring occurs during the project construction, operat
ion, and
abandonment stages. The resources and institutional setup should be av
ailable for the
monitoring at these stages. All largescale construction projects will
require some
construction stage monitoring. To control the environmental hazards of
construction as
specified in the EIA, a monitoring program should be established to e
nsure that each
mitigation measure is effectively implemented. There are numerous potent
ial areas for
monitoring during operations.
The scope of monitoring topics discussed in this chapter is limited to Baseline
and Effects
monitoring. In addition, this chapter will also discuss the Compliance monitori
ng during
the construction phase. Postproject monitoring requirements are discussed in t
he EMP.
Before any field monitoring tasks are undertaken there are many instit
utional, scientific,
and fiscal issues that must be addressed in the implementation of an
environmental
monitoring program. Careful consideration of these issues in the design
and planning
stages will help avoid many of the pitfalls associated with environmen
tal monitoring
programs. Although these issues are important but the discussions here are confi
ned to the
monitoring network design component.
ii
B. Network Design
Analysis of Significant Environmental Issues
At the outset of planning for an environmental monitoring network, the EIA manag
er may
not know exactly what should be monitored, when monitoring should begi
n, where it
should monitor, which techniques should be employed, and who should ta
ke
responsibility for its conduct. Because there are usually a number of
objective decisions
associated with network design to be made, it is important to start
with an analysis of
environmental issues. The scoping phase of an EIA is designed to iden
tify and focus on
the major issues. Scoping should provide a valuable source of informat
ion on the
concerns that need to be addressed by the monitoring network design.
These are project
specific as well as specific to the environmental setting of the location where

the project
is proposed to be located
Hence, the network designs are associated with questions like:
What are the expected outputs of the monitoring activity?
Which problems do we need to address to? etc.
Defining the output will influence the design of the network and opti
mize the resources
used for monitoring. It will also ensure that the network is specially designed
to optimize
the information on the problems at hand
What to Monitor?
The question of what to monitor is associated with the identification of VECs.
VECs are generally defined as environmental attributes or components of
the
environment that are valued by society as identified during the scopin
g stage of the
project.
They are determined on the basis of perceived public concer
ns.
For example,
changes to water quality and quantity could have implications on fish by affecti
ng habitat,
food supply, oxygen, and contaminant uptake. Similarly, employment and business
, and
economies are both VECs that serve as pathways.
The choice of VECs is also related to the perceived significant impac
t of the project
implementation on important environmental components. In general, the significa
nce or
importance of environmental components is judged based on:
legal protection provided (for example, rare and endangered species)
political or public concerns (for example, resource use conflicts and
sustainable
development)
scientific judgment (for example, ecological importance); or
commercial or economic importance
However, in addition to their economic, social, political or ecological
significance, the
chosen VEC should also have unambiguous operational ease, be accessible to pred
iction
and measurement; and
be susceptible to hazard. Once the VECs are de
fined, the VECs
may be directly measured (for example, extent of habitat for an endangered speci
es). In
cases where it is impossible or impractical to directly measure the V
ECs, the chosen
measurement endpoints or environmental indicators must correspond to, or be pred
ictive
of assessment endpoints.
The chosen environmental indicators must be: 1) measurable; 2) appropriate to t
he scale
of disturbance/ contamination; 3) appropriate to the impact mechanism;
4) appropriate
iii
and proportional
to temporal dynamics; 5) diagnostic; and 6) standard
ized; as well as
have: 1) a low natural variability; 2) a broad applicability; and 3) an existing
data series.
Where, How and How Many Times to Monitor?
These are the other components of Monitoring Network Design. These questions are
best
answered based on local field conditions, capacity and resources availa
ble, prevailing
legal and regulatory priorities, etc.
For this screening or reconnais
sance Surveys of the
study area also necessary. This may also include some simple inexpensive measure
ments
and assimilative/dispersion modeling. The data will give some informatio
n on the
prevailing special and temporal variations, and the general background air pollu
tion in the
area. The number of monitoring stations and the indicators to be measured at eac
h station
in the final permanent network may then be decided upon based on the
results of the
screening study as well as on the knowledge of the sources of the proposed devel
opment
and prevailing local environmental/meteorological conditions. The best po
ssible
definition of the air pollution problem, together with the analysis of
the resources:
personnel, budget and equipment available, represent the basis for the
decision on the
following questions:
What spatial density (number) of sampling stations is required? How
many samples
are needed and during what period (sampling (averaging) time and frequency)?
Where should the stations be located?
What kind of equipment should be used?
What additional background information is needed?
meteorology
topography
population density
emission sources and emission rates
effects and impacts
How will the data be made available/communicated?
C. Site Selection
This normally means that for designing a monitoring programme in an (study) area
which
might have an impact, several monitoring stations are needed for chara
cterizing the
baseline conditions of the impacted area.
When considering the locati
on of individual
samplers, it is essential that the data collected are representative for the loc
ation and type
of area without the undue influence from the immediate surroundings. I
n any
measurement point in the study area the total ambient concentration is the repre
sentative
of:
natural background concentration
regional background
impact of existing large regional sources such as Industrial emissions
To obtain the information about the importance of these different cont
ributions it is
therefore necessary to locate monitoring stations so that they are rep
resentative for
different impacts. In addition to the ambient pollution data, one woul

d often need other
data governing the variations such as meteorological data for air pollution, to
identify and
quantify the sources contributing to the measurements. When considering the loca
tion of
individual samplers, it is essential that the data collected are repre
sentative for the
location and type of area without undue influence from the immediate surrounding
s.
Annexure V
Guidance for Assessment of Baseline Components and Attributes
i
GUIDANCE FOR ASSESSMENT OF BASELINE COMPONENTS AND ATTRIBUTES*
Sampling Remarks Attributes
Network Frequency
Measurement Method
A. Air (Onshore and Offshore)
Meteorological
Wind speed
Wind direction
Dry bulb temperature
Wet bulb temperature
Relative humidity
Rainfall
Solar radiation
Cloud cover
Minimum 1 site in
the project impact
area requirements
Other additional
site(s) are require
depending upon the
model applied or
site sensitivities
Min: 1 hrly
observations from
continuous records
Mechanical / automatic
weather station
Rain gauge
As per IMD
As per IMD
IS 5182 Part 120 Sit
specific primary data is
essential
Secondary data from
IMD, New Delhi for the
nearest IMD station
Pollutants
SPM
RSPM
SO
2
NO
2
Asbestos
(parameters are given in ToR for
EIA based on nature of project,
raw material & process
technology, location
nature/activities within of air
10 to 15 locations in
the project impact
area
24 hrly twice a week
8 hrly twice a week
24 hrly twice a week
Gravimetric (High
Volume)
Gravimetric (High
Volume with
Cyclone)
EPA Modified
West & Gaeke
method
Arsenite Modified
Jacob &
Hochheiser
NDIR technique
Methyleneblue
Nesslers Method
Infra Red analyzer
Specific Ion meter
Monitoring Network
Minimum 2 locations
in upwind side, more
sites in downwind side
/ impact zone
All the sensitive
receptors need to be
covered
Measurement
Methods
As per CPCB
standards for NAQM,
1994
ii
Network Frequency
Measurement Method
B. Noise (Onshore and Offshore)
Hourly equivalent noise levels Same as for Air
Pollution along with
others Identified in
study area
At lest one day
continuous in each
season on a working
and nonworking day

Instrument : Sensitive
Noise level meter
(preferably recording
type)
Min: IS: 4954 1968 as
adopted by CPCB
Hourly equivalent noise levels Inplant (1.5 m from
machinery or high
emission processes)
Same as above for day
and night
Instrument : Noise level
meter
CPCB / OSHA
Hourly equivalent noise levels Highways (within
500 metres from the
road edge)
Same as above for day
and night
Instrument : Noise level
meter
CPCB / IS : 49541968
Peak particle velocity 150 200m from
blast site
Based on hourly
observations
PPV meter
C. Land Environment (Onshore)
Soil
Particle size distribution
Texture
pH
Electrical conductivity
Caution exchange capacity
Alkali metals
Sodium Absorption Ratio
(SAR)
Permeability
Porosity
One surface sample
from each landfill
and/or hazardous
waste site (if
applicable) and
prime villages, (soil
samples be collected
as per BIS
specifications) in the
study area
Seasonwise Collected and analyzed as
per soil analysis reference
book, M.I.Jackson and
soil analysis reference
book by C.A. Black
The purpose of impact
assessment on soil
(land environment) is
to assess the
significant impacts due
to leaching of wastes
or accidental releases
and contaminating
iii
Network Frequency
Measurement Method
Land Use/Landscape
Location code
Total project area
Topography
Drainage (natural)
Cultivated, forest
plantations, water bodies,
roads and settlements
At least 20 points
along with plant
boundary and
general major land
use categories in the
study area. `
Drainage once in the
study period and land
use categories from
secondary data (local
maps) and satellite
imageries
Global positioning
system
Toposheets
Satellite Imageries
(1:25,000)
Satellite Imageries
(1:25,000)
Drainage within the
plant area and
surrounding is very
important for storm
water impacts.
From land use maps
sensitive receptors
(forests, parks,
mangroves etc.) can be
identified
D. Solid Waste (Onshore and Offshore)
Quantity
Based on waste generated
from per unit production
Per capita contribution
Collection, transport and
disposal system
Process Waste
Quality (oily, chemical,
biological)
For green field
unites it is based on
secondary data base
of earlier plants.
Process wise or activity
wise for respective raw
material used. Domestic
waste depends upon the
season also
Guidelines
IS 9569 : 1980
IS 10447 : 1983
IS 12625 : 1989
IS 12647 : 1989
IS 12662 (PTI) 1989
General segregation into
biological/organic/inert/haz
ardous
Loss on heating
pH
EC
Calorific value, metals etc.
Grab and Composite
samples
material used. Domestic
waste depends upon the
season also
Analysis
IS 9334 : 1979
IS 9235 : 1979
IS 10158 : 1982
iv
Network Frequency
Measurement Method
Quality
Permeability And porosity
Moisture pH
Electrical conductivity
Loss on ignition
Total nitrogen
Caution exchange capacity
Particle size distribution
Heavy metal
Ansonia
Grab and Composite
samples. Recyclable
components have to
analyzed for the
recycling
requirements
material used.
Analysis
IS 9334 : 1979
IS 9235 : 1979
IS 10158 : 1982
Impacts of hazardous
waste should be
performed critically
depending on the
waste characteristics
and place of discharge.
For land disposal the
guidelines should be
followed and impacts
of accidental releases
should be assessed
E. Biological Environment (Onshore and Offshore)
Aquatic
Primary productivity
Aquatic weeds
Enumeration of
phytoplankton, zooplankton
and benthos
Fisheries
Diversity indices
Trophic levels
Rare and endangered
species
Sanctuaries / closed areas /
Coastal regulation zone
(CRZ)
Terrestrial
Considering
probable impact,
sampling points and
number of samples
to be decided on
established
guidelines on
ecological studies
based on site eco
environment setting
within 10/25 km
radius from the
proposed site
Samples to collect
from upstream and
downstream of
Season changes are very
important
Standards techniques
(APHA et. Al. 1995, Rau
and Wooten 1980) to be
followed for sampling and
measurement
Seasonal sampling for
aquatic biota
One season for
terrestrial biota, in
addition to vegetation
studies during
monsoon season
Preliminary
assessment
Microscopic analysis
of plankton and
meiobenthos, studies
of macrofauna, aquatic
vegetation and
application of indices,
v
Network Frequency
Measurement Method
Vegetation species, list,
economic importance,
forest produce, medicinal
value
Importance value index
(IVI) of trees
Wild animals
discharge point,
nearby tributaries at
down stream, and
also from dug wells
close to activity site
viz. Shannon,
similarity, dominance
IVI, etc
Point quarter plotless
method (random
sampling) for
terrestrial vegetation
survey.
Avifauna
Rare and endangered
species
Sanctuaries / National park
/ Biosphere reserve
For forest studies,
chronic as well as
shortterm impacts
should be analyzed
warranting data on
micro climate
conditions
Secondary data to
collect from
Government offices,
NGOs, published
literature
Plankton net
Sediment dredge
Depth sampler
Microscope
Field binocular
F. Socioeconomic (Onshore and Offshore)
Demographic structure
Infrastructure resource base
Economic resource base
Health status: Morbidity
pattern
Cultural and aesthetic
attributes
Socioeconomic
survey is based on
proportionate,
stratified and
random sampling
method
Different impacts
occurs during
construction and
operational phases of
the project
Primary data collection
through R&R surveys (if
require) or community
survey are based on
personal interviews and
questionnaire
Secondary data from
census records,
statistical hard books,
toposheets, health
records and relevant
official records
available with Govt.
agencies
* Project Specific
Annexure VI
Sources of Secondary Data Collection
Annexure VIA: Potential Sources of Data For EIA

Information
Air Environment
1. Meteorology Temperature, Rainfall, Humidity,
Inversion, Seasonal Wind rose pattern (16 point
compass scale), cloud cover, wind speed, wind
direction, stability, mixing depth
2. Ambient Air Quality 24 hourly concentration of
SPM, RPM, SO2, NOx, CO
Water Environment
3. Surface water water sources, water flow (lean
season), water quality, water usage, Downstream
water users
Command area development plan
Catchment treatment plan
4. Ground Water groundwater recharge
rate/withdrawal rate, ground water potential

groundwater levels (pre monsoon, post monsoon),
ground water quality, changes observed in quality
and quantity of ground water in last 15 years
5. Coastal waters water quality, tide and current data,
bathymetry
Biological Environment
6. Description of Biological Environment inventory
of flora and fauna in 7 km radius, endemic species,
endangered species, Aquatic Fauna, Forest land,
forest type and density of vegetation, biosphere,
national parks, wild life sanctuaries, tiger reserve,
elephant reserve, turtle nesting ground, core zone
of biosphere reserve, habitat of migratory birds,
routes of migratory birds
Land Environment
7. Geographical InformationLatitude, Longitude,
Elevation ( above MSL)
Source
Indian Meteorology Department, Pune
Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB),
State Pollution Control Board (SPCB),
Municipal Corporations
Ministry of Environment and Forests (MoEF)
State Department of Environment (DoEN)
Central Water Commission (CWC),
Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB),
State Pollution Control Board (SPCB), Central Water
and Power Research Institute (CWPRS), Pune
State Irrigation Department
Hydel Power generation organizations such as
NHPC, State SEBs
Central Ground Water Board (CGWB)
Central Ground Water Authority (CGWA)
State Ground Water Board (SGWB)
National Water Development Authority (NWDA)
Department of Ocean Development, New Delhi
State Maritime Boards
Naval Hydrographers Office, Dehradun
Port Authorities
National Institute of Oceanography (NIO), Goa
District Gazetteers
National Remote Sensing Agency (NRSA),
Hyderabad
Forest Survey of India, Dehradun
Wildlife Institute of India
World Wildlife Fund
Zoological Survey of India
Botanical Survey of India
Bombay Natural History Society, (BNHS), Mumbai
State Forest Departments
State Fisheries Department

State Agriculture Departments
State Agriculture Universities
Toposheets of Survey of India, Pune
Hyderabad
Space Application Centre (SAC), Ahmedabad
REPORT ON SECONDARY DATA COLLECTION FOR ENVIRONMENTAL INFORMATION CENTRE
1
Information
8. Nature of Terrain, topography map indicating
contours (1:2500 scale)
9. Hydrogeology Hydrogeological report (in case of

ground water is used/area is drought
prone/wastewater is likely to discharged on land)
Geomorphological analysis (topography and
drainage pattern)
Geological analysis (Geological
Formations/Disturbances geological and structural
maps, geomorphological contour maps, structural
features, including lineaments, fractures, faults and
joints)
Hydrogeological analysis (disposition of permeable
formations, surfaceground water links, hydraulic
parameter determination etc)
Analysis of the natural soil and water to assess
pollutant absorption capacity
10. Nature of Soil, permeability, erodibility
classification of the land
11. Landuse in the project area and 10 km radius of the

periphery of the project
12. Coastal Regulation Zones CRZMP, CRZ
classification, Demarcation of HTL and LTL
Agencies authorized for approval of demarcation of HTL and LTL

Source
Survey of India Toposheets
Hyderabad
State Remote Sensing Centre,
Space Application Centre (SAC), Ahmedabad
NRSA, Hyderbad
Geological Survey of India
State Geology Departments
State Irrigation Department
Department of Wasteland Development, Ministry of
Rural Areas
National Water Development Authority (NWDA)
Agriculture Universities
State Agriculture Department
Indian Council for Agriculture Research
State Soil Conservation Departments
National Bureau of Soil Survey and Landuse Planning
Central Arid Zone Research Institute (CAZRI),
Jodhpur
All India Soil and Landuse Survey; Delhi
Hyderabad
Town and County Planning Organisation
State Urban Planning Department
Regional Planning Authorities (existing and proposed
plans)
Village Revenue Map District Collectorate
Directorate of Economics and StatisticsState
Government
Space Application Centre, Ahmedabad
Urban Development Department
State Department of Environment
State Pollution Control Board
Space Application Centre*
Centre for Earth Sciences Studies,
Thiruvanthapuram*
Institute of Remote Sensing, Anna University
Chennai*
Naval Hydrographers Office, Dehradun*
National Institute of Oceanography, Goa*
National Institute of Ocean Technology, Chennai
Centre for Earth Science Studies
2
Information
Social
13. Socioeconomic population, number of houses
and present occupation pattern within 7 km from
the periphery of the project
14. Monuments and heritage sites
Natural Disasters
15. Seismic data (Mining Projects) zone no, no of
earthquakes and scale, impacts on life, property
existing mines
16. Landslide prone zone, geomorphological
conditions, degree of susceptibility to mass
movement, major landslide history (frequency of
occurrence/decade), area affected, population
affected
17. Flood/cyclone/droughts frequency of occurrence
per decade, area affected, population affected
Industrial
18. Industrial Estates/Clusters, Growth Centres
19. Physical and Chemical properties of raw material

and chemicals (Industrial projects); fuel quality
20. Occupational Health and Industrial Hygiene
major occupational health and safety hazards,
health and safety requirements, accident histories
21. Pollutant release inventories (Existing pollution

sources in area within 10 km radius)
22. Water requirement (process, cooling water, DM

water, Dust suppression, drinking, green belt, fire
service)
Source
Census Department
District Gazetteers State Government
District Statistics District Collectorate
International Institute of Population Sciences,
Mumbai (limited data)
Central Statistical Organisation
District Gazetteer
Archeological Survey of India,
INTACH
District Collectorate
Central and State Tourism Department
State Tribal and Social Welfare Department
Indian Meteorology Department, Pune
Geological Survey of India
Space Application Centre
Natural Disaster Management Division in
Department of Agriculture and Cooperation
Indian Meteorological Department
State Industrial Corporation
Industrial Associations
State Pollution Control Boards
Confederation Indian Industries (CII)
FICCI
Material and Safety Data Sheets
ENVIS database of Industrial Toxicological Research
Centre, Lucknow
Indian Institute Petroleum
Central Labour Institute, Mumbai
Directorate of Industrial Safety
ENVIS Database of Industrial Toxicological Research
Centre, Lucknow
National Institute of Occupational Health,
Ahmedabad
Project proponents which have received EC and have
commenced operations
EIA Reports
National and International Benchmarks

3
Annexure VIB: Summary of Available Data with Potential Data Sources for EIA
Agency
1. Archaeological Survey of India
Department of Culture
Government of India
Janpath, New Delhi 110011

[email protected]
2. Botanical Survey Of India
P8, Brabourne Road Calcutta
700001
Tel#033 2424922
Fax#033 2429330
Email: [email protected]. .
RO Coimbatore, Pune, Jodhpur,
Dehradun, Allahabad, Gantok,
Itanagar, Port Blair
3. Bureau of Indian Standards
Manak Bhawan, 9 Bahadur Shah
Zafar Marg, New Delhi 110 002
Tel#3230131, 3233375, 3239402 (10
lines)
Fax : 91 11 3234062, 3239399,
3239382
Email [email protected]
4. Central Water Commission (CWC)
Sewa Bhawan, R.K.Puram
New Delhi 110066
[email protected]
RO Bangalore, Bhopal,
Bhubaneshwar, Chandigarh,
Coimbatore/Chennai, Delhi,
Hyderabad, Lucknow, Nagpur,
Patna, Shillong, Siliguri and
Vadodara
5. Central Ground Water Board

(HO) N.H.IV, New CGO
Complex,
Faridabad 121001
RO Guwahati, Chandigarh,
Ahemadabad, Trivandrum,
Calcutta, Bhopal, Lucknow,
Banglore, Nagpur, Jammu,
Bhubneshwar, Raipur, Jaipur,
Chennai, Hyderabad, Patna
16
Based on web search and literature review
Information Available
Inventory of monuments and sites of national importance Listing and
documentation of monuments according to world heritage, pre
historic, proto historic and secular, religious places and forts
Photodiversity documentation of flora at National, State and District
level and flora of protected areas, hotspots, fragile ecosystems, sacre
d
groves etc
Identification of threatened species including endemics, their
mapping, population studies
Database related to medicinal plants, rare and threatened plant species

Red data book of Indian plants (Vol 1,2, and 3)
Manual for roadside and avenue plantation in India
Bureau of Indian Standards Committees on Earthquake Engineering
and Wind Engineering have a Seismic Zoning Map and the Wind
Velocity Map including cyclonic winds for the country
Central Data Bank Collection, collation and Publishing of

Hydrological, Hydrometeorological, Sediment and Water Quality
data.
Basin wise Master Plans
Flood atlas for India
Flood Management and Development and Operation of Flood
Forecasting System CWC operate a network of forecasting stations
Over 6000 forecasts are issued every year with about 95% of the
forecasts within the permissible limit.
Water Year Books, Sediment Year Books and Water Quality Year
Books.
Also actively involved in monitoring of 84 identified projects through
National, State and Project level Environmental Committees for
ensuring implementation of environmental safeguards
surveys, exploration, monitoring of ground water development
4
6. Central Pollution Control Board

Parivesh Bhawan, CBDcumOffice
Complex
East Arjun Nagar, DELHI 110 032
INDIA
Email : [email protected]
7. Central Arid Zone Research
Institute, Jodhpur
Regional Centre at Bhuj in Gujarat
8. Central Inland Capture Fisheries

Research Institute, Barrackpore
743101,
Tel#0335600177
Fax#0335600388
9. Central Institute of Brackish Water

Aquaculture
141, Marshalls Road, Egmore ,
Chennai 600 008,
Tel# 0448554866, 8554891,
Director (Per) 8554851
Fax#8554851,
10. Central Marine Fisheries Research
Institute (CMFRI), Cochin
11. Central Water and Power Research

Station, Pune
Tel#020439180114; 4392511;
4392825
Fax #0204392004,4390189
12. Central Institute of Road Transport,
Bhosari, Pune
411 026, India.
Tel : +91 (20) 7125177, 7125292,
7125493, 7125494
National Air Quality Monitoring Programme

National River Water Quality Monitoring Programme Global
Environment Monitoring , MINARS
Zoning Atlas Programme
Information on 17 polluting category industries (inventory, category
wise distribution, compliance, implementation of pollution control
programmes
AGRIS database on all aspects of agriculture from 1975 to date
Also have cell on Agriculture Research Information System;
Working on ENVIS project on desertification
Repository of information on the state of natural resources and
desertification processes and their control
The spectrum of activities involves researches on basic resource
inventories; monitoring of desertification, rehabilitation and
management of degraded lands and other areas
Data Base on
Ecology and fisheries of major river systems of India.
Biological features of commercially important riverine and estuarine
fish species.
Production functions and their interactions in floodplain wetlands.
Activities Environmental Impact Assessment for Resource
Management ; Fisheries Resource surveys

Repository of information on brackish water fishery resources with
systematic database of coastal fishery resources for ARIS
Agricultural Research Information System (ARIS) database covers
State wise data on soil and water quality parameters, land use pattern,
production and productivity trends,
Social, economic and environmental impacts of aquaculture farming,
Guidelines and effluent standards for aquaculture farming
Assessing and monitoring of exploited and unexploited fish stocks in
Indian EEZ
Monitoring the health of the coastal ecosystems, particularly the
endangered ecosystems in relation to artisanal fishing, mechanised
fishing and marine pollution
The institute has been collecting data on the catch and effort and
biological characteristics for nearly half a century based on
scientifically developed sampling scheme, covering all the maritime
States of the country
The voluminous data available with the institute is managed by the
National Marine Living Resources Data Centre (NMLRDC)
Numerical and Physical models for hydrodynamic simulations
Repository of data on all aspects of performance of STUs and a host

of other related road transport parameters
5
13. Department of Ocean Development
14. Environment Protection Training

and Research Institute
Gachibowli, Hyderabad 500 019,
India Phone: +91403001241,
3001242, 3000489
Fax: +9140 3000361
Email: [email protected]
Assessment of environment parameters and marine living resources

(primary and secondary) in Indian EEZ (Nodal Agency NIO Kochi)
Stock assessment, biology and resource mapping of deep sea shrimps,
lobsters and fishes in Indian EEZ (Nodal agencyFisheries Survey of
India)
Investigations of toxical algal blooms and benthic productivity in
Indian EEZ
(Nodal agency Cochin University of Science and
technology)
Coastal Ocean Monitoring and Prediction System (COMAP)
monitoring and modelling of marine pollution along entire Indian

coast and islands. Parameters monitored are temp, salinity, DO, pH,
SS, BOD, inorganic phosphate, nitrate, nitrite, ammonia, total
phosphorus, total nitrite, total organic carbon, petroleum
hydrocarbons, pathogenic vibros, pathogenic E.coli, shigella,
salmonella, heavy metals (Cd, Hg, Pb) and pesticide residues (DDT,
BHC, Endosulfan). Monitoring is carried out along the ecologically
sensitive zones and urban areas (NIO Mumbai Apex coordinating
agency).
Sea Level Measurement Programe (SELMAM) sea level measurement
at selected stations (Porbandar, Bombay, Goa, Cochin, Tuticorin,
Madras, Machilipatnam, Visakhapatnam, Paradeep, Calcutta and
Kavaratti (Lakshadweep Island)) along Indian coast and islands using
modern tide gauges
Detailed coastal maps through Survey of India showing contour at 1/2
a metre interval in the scale of 1:25000. (Nellore Machhalipatnam work
already over)
Marine Data Centre (MDC) IMD for Ocean surface meteorology,
GSI for marine geology, SOI for tide levels, Naval Hydrographic
Office for bathymetry, NIO Goa for physical chemical and biological
oceanography, NIO Mumbai for marine pollution, CMFRI for
coastal fisheries, Institute of Ocean Management Madras for coastal
geomorphology
DOD has setup Indian National Centre for Ocean Information
Services (INCOIS) at Hyderabad for generation and dissemination of
ocean data products (near real time data products such as sea surface
temperature, potential fishing zones, upwelling zones, maps, eddies,
chlorophyll, suspended sediment load etc). MDC will be integrated
with INCOIS
Integrated Coastal and Marine Area Management (ICMAM)
programme GIS based information system for management of 11
critical habitats namely Pichavaram, Karwar, Gulf of Mannar, Gulf of
Khambat, Gulf of Kutch, Malvan, Cochin, Coringa mangroves,
Gahirmata, Sunderbans and Kadamat (Lakshadeep)
Wetland maps for Tamil Nadu and Kerala showing the locations of
lagoons, backwaters, estuaries, mudflats etc (1:50000 scale)
Coral Reef Maps for Gulf of Kachch, Gulf of Mannar, Andaman and
Nicobar and Lakshadeep Islands (1:50,000 scale) indicating the
condition of corals, density etc
Environment Information Centre has appointed EPTRI as the
Distributed Information Centre for the Eastern Ghats region of India.
EIC Collaborates with the Stockholm Environment Institute Sweden
Database on Economics of Industrial Pollution Prevention in India
Database of Large and Medium Scale Industries of Andhra Pradesh
Environmental Status of the Hyderabad Urban Agglomeration
Study on water pollution-health linkages for a few Districts of A.P

6
15. Forest Survey of India (FSI)

Kaulagarh Road, P.O., IPE
Dehradun - 248 195
Tel# 0135-756139, 755037, 754507
Fax # 91-135-759104
E-Mail : [email protected]
[email protected]
RO- Banglore, Calcutta, Nagpur
and Shimla
16. Geological Survey of India

27 Jawaharlal Nehru Road, Calcutta
700 016, India Telephone +91-332496941 FAX 91-33-2496956
[email protected]
17. Indian Council of Agriculture
Research,
Krishi Bhawan, New Delhi,
Tel#011-338206
ICAR complex, Goa Agro
metrology
Central Arid Zone Research
Institute Agro forestry
Central Soil salinity Research
Institute,
Indian Institute of Soil Science
Central Soil and Water
Conservation Research and
Training Institute
National Bureau of Soil Survey
and Landuse Planning
18. Indian Bureau of Mines

Indira Bhawan, Civil Lines Nagpur
Ph no 0712533 631,
Fax 0712533 041
Environment Quality Mapping

Macro level studies for six districts in the
Micro level studies for two study zones
pollutant load and scoping for new industrial
Zonation of the IDA, Parwada which helped
State of Andhra Pradesh

presenting the permissible
categories
APIIC to promote the
land for industrial development

Disaster management plan for Visakhapatnam Industrial Bowl Area
State of Forest Report (Biannual)
National Forest Vegetation Map (Biannual exercise) (on 1: 1 million
scale)
Thematic mapping on 1:50,000 scale depicting the forest type, species
composition, crown density of forest cover and other landuse National
Basic Forest Inventory System
Inventory survey of non forest area
Forest inventory report providing details of area estimates,
topographic description, health of forest, ownership pattern,
estimation of volume and other growth parameters such as height and
diameter in different types of forest, estimation of growth,
regeneration and mortality of important species, volume equation and
wood consumption of the area studied
Environmental hazards zonation mapping in mineral sector
Codification of base line information of geoenvironmental
appreciation of any terrain and related EIA and EMP studies
Lineament and geomorphological map of India on 1:20,000 scale.
Photointerpreted geological and structural maps of terrains with
limited field checks.
A total of 80,000 profiles at 10 kms grid across the country were
analyzed to characterize the soils of India.
Detailed soil maps of the Country (1:7 million), State (1:250,000) and
districts map (1:50,000) depicting extent of degradation (1:4.4 millions)
have been prepared.
Thematic maps depicting soil depth, texture drainage, calcareousness,
salinity, pH, slope and erosion have been published
Agroclimate characterization of the country based on moisture,
thermal and sunshine regimes
Agroecological zones (20) and subzones (60) for the country were
delineated based on physiography, soils, climate, Length of Growing
Period and Available Water Content, and mapped on 1:4.4 million
scale.
Digitization of physiography and soil resource base on 1:50,000 scale
for 14 States have been completed.
.Soil fertility maps of N,P,K,S and Zn have also been developed
Water quality guidelines for irrigation and naturally occurring
saline/sodic water
Calibration and verification of ground water models for predicting
water logging and salinity hazards in irrigation commands
National mineral inventory for 61 minerals and mineral maps
Studies on environmental protection and pollution control in regard
to the mining and mineral beneficiation operations
Collection, processing and storage of data on mines, minerals and
mineralbased industries, collection and maintenance of world mineral
intelligence, foreign mineral legislation and other related matters
7
19. Indian Meteorology Department

Shivaji nagar, Pune 41100
RO Mumbai, Chennai, Calcutta,
New Delhi, Nagpur, Guwahati
20. INTACH
Natural Heritage, 71 Lodi Estate, New
Delhi110 003
Tel. 91114645482, 4632267/9,
4631818, 4692774, 4641304 Fax : 91
114611290
21. Industrial Toxicology Research
Centre
Post Box No. 80, Mahatma Gandhi
Marg, Lucknow226001,
Phone: +91522
221856,213618,228227; Fax : +91
522 228227
Email: [email protected]
22. Indian Institute of Forest
Management
Post Box No. 357, Nehru Nagar
Bhopal 462 003
Phone # 0755575716, 573799,
765125, 767851
Fax # 0755572878
23. Indian Institute of Petroleum
Mohkampur , Dehradun, India,
248005
0135 660113 to 116
0135 671986
24. Ministry of Environment and
Forest
25. Mumbai Metropolitan Regional

Development Authority
Meteorological data
Background air quality monitoring network under Global
Atmospheric Watch Programme (operates 10 stations)
Seismicity map, seismic zoning map; seismic occurrences and cyclone
hazard monitoring; list of major earthquakes
Climatological Atlas of India , Rainfall Atlas of India and
Agroclimatic Atlas of India
Monthly bulletin of Climate Diagnostic Bulletin of India
Environmental Meteorological Unit of IMD at Delhi to provide
specific services to MoEF
Listing and documentation of heritage sites identified by
municipalities and local bodies (Listing excludes sites and buildings
under the purview of the Archaeological Survey of India and the State
Departments of Archaeology)
Activities include health survey on occupational diseases in industrial

workers, air and water quality monitoring studies, ecotoxicological
impact assessment, toxicity of chemicals, human health risk
assessment
Five databases on CDROM in the area of environmental toxicology
viz: TOXLINE, CHEMBANK, POISINDEX, POLTOX and
PESTBANK. The Toxicology Information Centre provides
information on toxic chemicals including household chemicals
ENVIS centre and created a fullfledged computerized database
(DABTOC) on toxicity profiles of about 450 chemicals
Consultancy and research on joint forest management (Ford
Foundation, SIDA, GTZ, FAO etc)
Fuel quality characterisation

Emission factors
Survey of natural resources

National river conservation directorate
Environmental research programme for eastern and western ghats
National natural resource management system
Wetlands conservation programme survey, demarcation, mapping
landscape planning, hydrology for 20 identified wetlands National
wasteland identification programme
Mumbai Urban Transport Project
Mumbai Urban Development Project
Mumbai Urban Rehabilitation Project
Information on MMR; statistics on councils and corporations Regional
Information Centre Basic data on population, employment, industries
and other sectors are regularly collected and processed
8
26. Municipal Corporation of Greater

Mumbai
27. Ministry of Urban Development
Disaster Mitigation and
Vulnerability Atlas of India
Building Materials & Technology
Promotion Council
GWing,Nirman Bhavan, New
Delhi110011
Tel: 91113019367
Fax: 91113010145
EMail: [email protected]
28. Natural
Disaster Management
Division in Department of
Agriculture and Cooperation
29. National Bureau Of Soil Survey &
Land Use Planning
P.O. Box No. 426, Shankar Nagar
P.O., Nagpur440010
Tel#91712534664,532438,534545
Fax#:91712522534
RO Nagpur, New Delhi, Banglore,
Calcutta, Jorhat, Udaipur
30. National Institute of Ocean

Technology,
VelacherryTambaram main road
Narayanapuram
Chennai, Tamil Nadu
Tel#91442460063 / 2460064/
2460066/ 2460067
Fax#91442460645
31. National Institute of Oceanography,

Goa
RO Mumbai, Kochi
Air Quality Data for Mumbai Municipal Area

Water quality of lakes used for water supply to Mumbai
Identification of hazard prone area
Vulnerability Atlas showing areas vulnerable to natural disasters
Landuse zoning and design guidelines for improving hazard resistant
construction of buildings and housing
State wise hazard maps (on cyclone, floods and earthquakes)
Weekly situation reports on recent disasters, reports on droughts,

floods, cyclones and earthquakes
NBSS&LUP Library has been identified as sub centre of ARIC
(ICAR) for input to AGRIS covering soil science literature generated
in India
Research in weathering and soil formation, soil morphology, soil
mineralogy, physicochemical characterisation, pedogenesis, and landscape
climatesoil relationship.
Soil Series of India The soils are classified as per Soil Taxonomy. The
described soil series now belong to 17 States of the country.
Landuse planning watershed management, land evaluation criteria, crop
efficiency zoning
Soil Information system is developed statewise at 1:250,000 scale.
Presently the soil maps of all the States are digitized, processed and
designed for final output both digital and hardcopy. The thematic layers
and interpreted layers of land evaluation (land capability, land
irrigability and crop suitability), AgroEcological Zones and soil
degradation themes are prepared.
Districts level information system is developed for about 15 districts at 1:
50, 000 scale. The soil information will be at soil series level in this system.
Soil resource inventory of States, districts watersheds (1:250,000;
1:50,000; 1:10,000/8000)
Waste load allocation in selected estuaries (Tapi estuary and Ennore
creek) is one the components under the Integrated Coastal and Marine
Area Management (ICMAM) programme of the Department of
Ocean Development ICMAM is conducted with an IDA based credit
to the Government of India under the Environmental Capacity
Building project of MoEF (waste assimilation capacity of Ennore
creek is over)
Physical oceanographic component of Coastal & Ocean monitoring
Predictive System (COMAPS) a long term monitoring program under
the Department of Ocean Development
Identification of suitable locations for disposal of dredge spoil using
mathematical models & environmental criteria
EIA Manual and EIA guidelines for port and harbour projects
Coastal Ocean Monitoring and Predictions(COMAP)Monitoring of
coastal waters for physicochemical and biological parameters
including petroleum hydrocarbons, trace metals, heavy metals, and
biomass of primary (phytoplankton) and secondary (zooplankton,
microbial and benthic organisms)
Marine Biodiversity of selected ecosystem along the West Coast of
India
9
32. National Botanical Research

Institute,
Post Box No 436 Rana Pratap Marg
Lucknow 226001,
Tel: (+91) 522 27103135 Fax: (+91)
522 282849, 282881
Lucknow
33. National Geophysical Research
Institute, Uppal Road, Hyderabad
Telephone:0091407171124,
FAX:0091407171564
34. National Environmental
Engineering Research Institute,
Nagpur
RO Mumbai, Delhi, Chennai,
Calcutta, Ahmedabad, Cochin,
Hyderabad, Kanpur
35. National Hydrology Institute,
Roorkee
RO
Belgaum (Hard Rock Regional
Centre), Jammu (Western
Himalayan Regional Centre),
Guwahati (North Eastern Regional
Centre), Kakinada (Deltaic Regional
Centre), Patna (Ganga Plains North
Regional Centre), and Sagar (Ganga
Plains South)
36. National Institute Of Urban Affairs,
India Habitat Centre, New Delhi
37. National Institute of Occupational
Health
Meghaninagar, Ahmedabad
RO Banglore, Calcutta
38. NRSA Data Centre
Department of Space, Balanagar,
Hyderabad 500 037
Ph 0403078560
3078664
[email protected]
39. Rajiv Gandhi National Drinking
Water Mission
40. Space Application Centre
Value Added Services Cell (VASC)
Remote Sensing Application Area
Ahmedabad 380 053

079676 1188
Dust filtering potential of common avenue trees and roadside shrubs

has been determined, besides studies have also been conducted on
heavymetals accumulation potential of aquatic plants supposedly
useful as indicators of heavy metal pollution in water bodies and
capable of reducing the toxic metals from water bodies.
Assessment of biodiversity of various regions of India
Exploration, assessment and management of ground water resources
including ground water modelling and pollution studies
National Air Quality Monitoring (NAQM) for CPCB
Database on cleaner technologies of industrial productions
Basin studies, hydrometeorological network improvement,

hydrological year book, hydrological modelling, regional flood
formulae, reservoir sedimentation studies, environmental hydrology,
watershed development studies, tank studies, and drought studies.
Urban Statistics Handbook

epidemiological studies and surveillance of hazardous occupations
including air pollution, noise pollution, agricultural hazards, industrial
hazards in organised sectors as well as small scale industries,
carcinogenesis, pesticide toxicology, etc
WHO collaborative centre for occupational health for South East Asia
region and the lead institute for the international programme on
chemical safety under IPCS (WHO)
Satellite data products (raw data, partially processed (radiometrically
corrected but geometrically uncorrected), standard data
(radiometrically and geometrically corrected), geocoded data(1:50,000
and 1:25000 scale), special data products like mosaiced, merged and
extracted) available on photographic (B?W and FCC in form of film of
240 mm X 240mm or enlargements/paper prints in scale varying
between 1:1M and 1:12500 and size varying between 240mm and
1000mm) and digital media (CDROMs, 8 mm tapes)
Database for groundwater using remote sensing technology (Regional
Remote Sensing Service Centre involved in generation of ground
water prospect maps at 1:50,000 scale for the State of Kerala,
Karnataka, AP, MP and Rajasthan for RGNDWM)
National Natural Resource Information System
Landuse mapping for coastal regulation zone (construction setback
line) upto 1:12500 scale
Inventory of coastal wetlands, coral reefs, mangroves, seaweeds
Monitoring and condition assessment of protected coastal areas

10
Fax 0796762735
41. State Pollution Control Board
42. State Ground Water Board

43. Survey of India
44. Town and Country Planning

Organisation
45. Wildlife Institute of India Post Bag
No. 18, Chandrabani Dehradun
248 001, Uttaranchal
Tel#0135 640111 15,
Fax#0135 640117
email : wii@wii .
46. Zoological Survey of India
Prani Vigyan Bhawan
M Block, New Alipore
Calcutta 700 053
Phone # 91334786893, 4783383
Fax # 9133786893
RO Shillong, Pune, Dehradun,
Jabalpur, Jodhpur, Chennai, Patna,
Hyderabad, Canning, Behrampur,

Kozikode, Itanagar, Digha, Port
Bliar, Solan
Wetland mapping and inventory

Mapping of potential hotspots and zoning of environmental hazards
General geological and geomorphological mapping in diverse terrain
Landslide risk zonation for Tehre area
State Air Quality Monitoring Programme
Inventory of polluting industries
Identification and authorization of hazardous waste generating
industries
Inventory of biomedical waste generating industries
Water quality monitoring of water bodies receiving wastewater
discharges
Inventory of air polluting industries
Industrial air pollution monitoring
Air consent, water consent, authorization, environment monitoring
reports
Topographical surveys on 1:250,000 scales, 1:50,000 and 1:25,000
scales
Digital Cartographical Data Base of topographical maps on scales
1:250,000 and 1:50,000
Data generation and its processing for redefinition of Indian Geodetic
Datum
Maintenance of National Tidal Data Centre and receiving/ processing
of tidal data of various ports.
Coastal mapping along the Eastern coast line has been in progress to
study the effect of submergence due to rise in sealevel and other
natural phenomenon. Ground surveys have been completed for the
proposed coastal region and maps are under printing.
District planning maps containing thematic information (135 maps)
have been printed out of 249 maps covering half the districts of India.
Districts planning maps for remaining half of the area are being
processed by National Atlas and Thematic Mapping Organisation
(NATMO)
Urban mapping Thematic maps and graphic database on towns
(under progress in association with NRSA and State town planning
department)
Provide information and advice on specific wildlife management
problems.
National Wildlife Database
Red Book for listing of endemic species

Survey of faunal resources

11
Annexure VII
Impact Prediction Tools
i
Table 1: Choice of Models for Impact Prediction: Air Environment
MODEL APPLICATION REMARKS REMARKS FOR
DISTILLERY PLANTS
APPLICATIONS
ISCST 3 Appropriate for point,
area and line sources
Application for flat or
rolling terrain
Transport distance up to
50 km valid
Computes for 1 hr to
annual averaging periods
Can take up to 99 sources
Computes concentration on
600 receptors in Cartesian
on polar coordinate system
Can take receptor elevation
Requires source data,
meteorological and receptor
data as input.
ISCST3 is appropriate for
distillery unit located in both
simple terrain, where the
terrain features are all lower
in elevation than the top of
the stack of the source, and in
complex terrain, where terrain
elevations rise to heights
above the stack top.
The meteorological data
required to run ISCST3
includes mixing heights, wind
direction, wind velocity,
temperature, atmospheric
stability and anemometer
height.
AERMOD
with
AERMET
Settling and dry
deposition of particles;
Building wake effects
(excluding cavity region
impacts);
Point, area, line, and
volume sources;
Plume rise as a function
of downwind distance;
Multiple point, area,
line, or volume sources;
Limited terrain
adjustment;
Longterm and short
term averaging modes;
Rural or urban modes;
Variable receptor grid
density; and
Actual hourly
meteorology data
Can take up to 99 sources
Computes concentration on
600 receptors in Cartesian
on polar coordinate system
Can take receptor elevation
meteorological and receptor
data as input.
AERMOD, is a stateofart
and steadystate plume
dispersion model for
assessment of pollutant
concentrations from a variety
of sources. AERMOD
simulates transport and
dispersion from multiple
points, area, or volume
sources based on an upto
date characterization of the
atmospheric boundary layer.
Sources may be located in
rural or urban areas, and
receptors may be located in
simple or complex terrain.
AERMOD accounts for
building nearwake and far
wake effects (i.e., plume
downwash) using the PRIME
wake effect model. The
AERMOD model employs
hourly sequential
meteorological data to
estimate concentrations for
averaging times ranging from
one hour to one year.
The AERMET module is the
ii
DISTILLERY PLANTS
APPLICATIONS
meteorological preprocessor
for the AERMOD program.
Output includes surface
meteorological observations
and parameters and vertical
profiles of several
atmospheric parameters.
AERMET is a general
purpose meteorological
preprocessor for organizing
available meteorological data
into a format suitable for use
by the AERMOD air quality
dispersion model
PTMAX Screening model
applicable for a single

point source
Computes maximum
concentration and
distance of maximum
concentration
occurrence as a function
of wind speed and
stability class
Require source
characteristics
No met data required
Used mainly for ambient air
monitoring network design
PTDIS Screening model
applicable for a single
point source
Computes maximum
pollutant concentration
and its occurrences for
the prevailing
meteorological
conditions
Require source
characteristics
Average met data (wind
speed, temperature, stability
class etc.) required
Used mainly to see likely
impact of a single source
MPTER Appropriate for point,
area and line sources
applicable for flat or
rolling terrain
Transport distance up to
50 km valid
Computes for 1 hr to
annual averaging periods
Terrain adjustment is
possible
Can take 250 sources
Computes concentration at
180 receptors up to 10 km
meteorological data and
receptor coordinates
iii
DISTILLERY PLANTS
APPLICATIONS
CTDM PLUS
(Complex
Terrain
Dispersion
Model)
Point source steady state
model, can estimate

hrly average
concentration in isolated
hills/ array of hills
Can take maximum 40
Stacks and computes
concentration at maximum
400 receptors
Does not simulate calm met
conditions
Hill slopes are assumed not
to exceed 15 degrees
Requires sources, met and
terrain characteristics and
receptor details
UAM (Urban
Airshed
Model)
3D grid type numerical
simulation model
Computes O
3
concentration short term
episodic conditions
lasting for 1 or 2 days
resulting from NOx and
VOCs
Appropriate for single
urban area having
significant O
3
problems
RAM (Rural
Airshed
Model)
Steady state Gaussian
plume model for
computing concentration
of relatively stable
pollutants for 1 hr to 1
day averaging time
Application for point
and area sources in rural
and urban setting
Suitable for flat terrains
Transport distance less than
50 km.
CRESTER Applicable for single
point source either in
rural or urban setting
Computes highest and
second highest
concentration for 1hr,
3hr, 24hr and annual
averaging times
Tabulates 50 highest
concentration for entire

year for each averaging
times
Can take up to 19 Stacks
simultaneously at a
common site.
Unsuitable for cool and
high velocity emissions
Do not account for tall
buildings or topographic
features
180 receptor, circular wing
at five downwind ring
distance 36 radials
iv
DISTILLERY PLANTS
APPLICATIONS
Require sources, and met
data
OCD
(Offshore and
coastal
Dispersion
Model)
It determines the impact
of offshore emissions
from point sources on
the air quality of coastal
regions
It incorporates overwater
plume transport and
dispersion as well as
changes that occur as the
plume crosses the shore
line
Most suitable for
overwater sources shore
onshore receptors are
below the lowest shore
height
Requires source emission
data
Require hrly met data at
offshore and onshore
locations like water surface
temperature; overwater air
temperature; relative
humidity etc.
FDM
(Fugitive
Dust Model)
Suitable for emissions
from fugitive dust
sources
Source may be point,
area or line (up to 121

source)
Require particle size
classification max. up to
20 sizes
Computes
concentrations for 1 hr,
3hr, 8hr, 24hr or annual
average periods
Require dust source particle
sizes
Source coordinates for area
sources, source height and
geographic details
Can compute concentration
at max. 1200 receptors
Require met data (wind
direction, speed,
Temperature, mixing height
and stability class)
Model do not include
buoyant point sources,
hence no plume rise
algorithm
RTDM
(Rough
Terrain
Diffusion
Model)
Estimates GLC is
complex/rough (or flat)
terrain in the vicinity of
one or more colocated
point sources
Transport distance max.
up to 15 km to up to 50
km
Computes for 1 to 24 hr.
or annual ave5rage
Can take up to 35 co
located point sources
Require source data and
hourly met data
maximum 400 receptors
Suitable only for non
reactive gases
Do not include gravitational
effects or depletion
v
DISTILLERY PLANTS
APPLICATIONS
concentrations mechanism such as rain/
wash out, dry deposition
CDM
(Climatologic
ally
Dispersion
Model)
It is a climatologically
steady state GPM for
determining long term
(seasonal or annual)
Arithmetic average
pollutant concentration
at any ground level
receptor in an urban area
Suitable for point and area
sources in urban region, flat
terrain
Valid for transport distance
less than 50 km
Long term averages: One
month to one year or longer
PLUVUEII
(Plume
Visibility
Model)
Applicable to assess
visibility impairment
due to pollutants emitted
from well defined point
sources
It is used to calculate
visual range reduction
and atmospheric
discoloration caused by
plumes
It predicts transport,
atmospheric diffusion,
chemical, conversion,
optical effects, and
surface deposition of
point source emissions.
Require source
characteristics, met data
and receptor coordinates &
elevation
Require atmospheric
aerosols (back ground &
emitted) characteristics,
like density, particle size
Require background
pollutant concentration of
SO
4
, NO
3
, NOx, NO
2
, O
3
,
SO
2
and deposition
velocities of SO
2
, NO
2
and
aerosols
MESOPUFF
II (Meso
scale Puff
Model)
It is a Gaussian,
Variable trajectory, puff
superposition model
designed to account fro
spatial and temporal
variations in transport,
diffusion, chemical
transformation and
removal mechanism
encountered on regional
scale.
Plume is modeled as a
series of discrete puffs
and each puff is
transported
independently
Appropriate for point
Can model five pollutants
simultaneously (SO2, SO4,
NOx, HNO3 and NO3)
Require source
characteristics
Can take 20 point sources
or 5 area source
For area source location,
effective height, initial puff
size, emission is required
Computes pollutant
concentration at max. 180
discrete receptors and 1600
(40 x 40) grided receptors
Require hourly surface data
including cloud cover and
vi
DISTILLERY PLANTS
APPLICATIONS
and area sources in
urban areas
Regional scale model.
twice a day upper air data
(pressure, temp, height,
wind speed, direction)
Do not include gravitational
effects or depletion
mechanism such as rain/

wash out, dry deposition
Table 2: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Noise Environment
Model Application
FHWA (Federal
Highway
Administration)
Noise Impact due to vehicular movement on
highways
Dhwani For predictions of impact due to group of noise
sources in the industrial complex (multiple sound
sources)
Hemispherical sound
wave propagation
Air Port
Fore predictive impact due to single noise source
For predictive impact of traffic on airport and rail
road
Table 3: Choice of Methods for Impact Modeling: Land Environment
Model Application Remarks
Digital Analysis
Techniques
Provides land use / land
cover distribution
Ranking analysis for
soil suitability criteria
Provides suitability
criteria for developmental
conversation activities
Various parameters viz. depth, texture, slope,
erosion status, geomorphology, flooding hazards,
GW potential, land use etc. are used.
vii
Table 4: Choice of Models for Impact Modeling: Water Environment
QUALII E Wind effect is insignificant, vertical dispersive
effects insignificant applicable to streams
Data required
Deoxygenation coefficients, reaeration
coefficients for carbonaceous, nitrogenous and
benthic substances, dissolved oxygen deficit
Steady state or
dynamic model
The model is found excellent to generate water
quality parameters
Photosynthetic and respiration rate of suspended
and attached algae
Parameters measured up to 15 component can
be simulated in any combination, e.g. ammonia,
nitrite, nitrate, phosphorous, carbonaceous
BOD, benthic oxygen demand, DO, coliforms,
conservative substances and temperature
DOSAG3, USEPA:
(1D) RECEIV II,
USEPA
Water quality simulation model for streams &
canal
A general Water quality model
Steadystate
Explore I, USEPA A river basin water quality model Dynamic, Simple
hydrodynamics
HSPE, USEPA Hydrologic simulation model Dynamic, Simple
hydrodynamics
RECEIVEII,
USEPA
A general dynamic planning model for water
quality management
Stanford watershed
model
This model simulates stream flows once historic
precipitation data are supplied
The major components of the hydrologic cycle
are modeled including interception, surface
detention, overland inflow, groundwater, evapo
transpiration and routing of channel flows,
temperature, TDS, DO, carbonaceous BOD
coliforms, algae, zooplanktons, nitrite, nitrate,
ammonia, phosphate and conservative
substances can be simulated
Hydrocomp model Longterm meteorological and wastewater
characterization data is used to simulate stream
flows and stream water quality
Time dependant
(Dynamic)
Stormwater
Management model
Runoff is modeled from overland flow, through
surface channels, and through sewer network
Both combined and separate sewers can be
Time Dependent
viii
(SWMM) modeled.
This model also enables to simulate water
quality effects to stormwater or combined sewer
discharges. This model simulates runoff
resulting from individual rainfall events.
Battelle Reservoir
model
Water body is divided into segments along the
direction of the flow and each segment is
divided into number of horizontal layers. The
model is found to generate excellent simulation
of temperature and good prediction of water
quality parameters.
The model simulates temperature, DO, total and
benthic BOD, phytoplankton, zooplankton,
organic and inorganic nitrogen, phosphorous,
coliform bacteria, toxic substances and

hydrodynamic conditions.
Two Dimensional
multisegment model
TIDEP (Turbulent
diffusion
temperature model
reservoirs)
Horizontal temperature homogeneity
Coefficient of vertical turbulent diffusion
constant for charge of area with depth negligible
coefficient of thermal exchange constant
Data required wind speed, air temperature, air
humidity, net incoming radiation, surface water
temperature, heat exchange coefficients and
vertical turbulent diffusion coefficients.
Steady state model
BIOLAKE Model estimates potential fish harvest from a
take
Steady state model
Estuary models/
estuarial Dynamic
model
It is simulates tides, currents, and discharge in
shallow, vertically mixed estuaries excited by
ocean tides, hydrologic influx, and wind action
Tides, currents in estuary are simulated
Dynamic model
Dynamic Water
Quality Model
It simulates the mass transport of either
conservative or nonconservative quality
constituents utilizing information derived from
the hydrodynamic model BayDelta model is
the programme generally used.
Up to 10 independent quality parameters of
either conservative or nonconservative type
plus the BODDO coupled relationship can be
handled
Dynamic model
HEC 2 To compute water surface profiles for stead7y,
gradually: varying flow in both prismatic &
non prismatic channels
SMS Lake circulation, salt water intrusion, surface
water profile simulation model
Surface water
Modeling system
ix
Hydrodynamic model
RMA2 To compute flow velocities and water surface
elevations
Hydrodynamic
analysis model
RMA4 Solves advectivediffusion equations to model
up to six noninteracting constituents
Constituent transport
model
SED2DWES Model simulates transport of sediment Sediment transport

model
HIVEL2D Model supports subcritical and supercritical
flow analysis
A 2dimensional
hydrodynamic model
MIKEII, DHI Model supports, simulations of flows, water
quality, and sediment transport in estuaries,
rives, irrigation systems, channels & other water
bodies
Professional
Engineering software
package
x
Table 5: Choice of Methods for Impact Modeling: Biological Environment
Name Relevance Applications Remarks
Flora
Sample plot
methods
Density and
relative density
Density and
relative
dominance
Average number of
individuals species per
unit area
Relative degree to which
a species predominates a
community by its sheer
numbers, size bulk or
biomass
The quadrant sampling technique
is applicable in all types of plant
communities and for the study of
submerged, sessile (attached at
the base) or sedentary plants
Frequency and
relative
frequency
importance
value
Plant dispersion over an
area or within a
community
Commonly accepted plot size:
0.1 m
2
mosses, lichens & other
matlike plants
Average of relative
density, relative
dominance and relative
frequency
0.1 m
2
herbaceous vegetation
including grasses
10.20 m
2
for shrubs and
saplings up to 3m tall, and
100 m
2
for tree communities
Transects &
line
intercepts
methods
Cover
Ratio of total amount of
line intercepted by each
species and total length
of the line intercept given
its cover
This methods allows for rapid
assessment of vegetation
transition zones, and requires
minimum time or equipment of
establish
Relative
dominance
It is the ratio of total
individuals of a species
and total individuals of
all species
Two or more vegetation strata can
be sampled simultaneously
Plotless
sampling
methods
Mean point
plant
Mean area per
plant
Mean point plant
distance
Mean area per plant
Vegetation measurements are
determined from points rather
than being determined in an area
with boundaries
Density and
relative density
Method is used in grassland and
open shrub and tree communities
Dominance and
relative
dominance
It allows more rapid and
extensive sampling than the plot
method
Importance
Point quarter method is
xi
Name Relevance Applications Remarks
value commonly used in woods and
forests.
Fauna
Species list
methods
Animal species
list
List of animal
communities observed
directly
Animal species lists present
common and scientific names of
the species involved so that the
faunal resources of the area are
catalogued
Direct
Contact
Methods
Animal species
list
List of animals
communities observed
directly
This method involves collection,
study and release of animals
Count
indices
methods
(Roadside
and aerial
count
methods)
Drive counts
Temporal
counts
Observation of animals
by driving them past
trained observers
Count indices provide estimates
of animal populations and are
obtained from signs, calls or
trailside counts or roadside counts
Call counts
Count of all animals
passing a fixed point
during some stated
interval of time
These estimates, through they do
not provide absolute population
numbers, Provide an index of the
various species in an area
Such indices allow comparisons
through the seasons or between
sites or habitats
Removal
methods
Population size Number of species
captured
Removal methods are used to
obtain population estimates of

small mammals, such as, rodents
through baited snap traps
Market
capture
methods
Population size
estimate (M)
Number of species
originally marked (T)
Number of marked
animals recaptured (t)
and total number of
animals captured during
census (n)
N = nT/t
It involves capturing a portion of
the population and at some later
date sampling the ratio of marked
to total animals caught in the
population
xii
Table 6: Choice of Methods for Impact Predictions: Biological Environment
Relevance
Name Application Remarks
Extrapolative
Methods
A prediction is made that is consistent with past
and present socioeconomic data, e.g. a prediction
based on the linear extrapolation of current trends
Intuitive
Forecasting
(Delphi
techniques)
Delphi technique is used to determine
environmental priorities and also to make
intuitive predictions through the process of
achieving group consensus
Conjecture
Brainstorming Heuristic
programming Delphi
consensus
Trend
extrapolation
and correlation
Predictions may be obtained by extrapolating
present trends Not an accurate method of making
socioeconomic forecasts, because a time series
cannot be interpreted or extrapolated very far into
the future with out some knowledge of the
underlying physical, biological, and social factors
Trend breakthrough
precursor events
correlation and
regression
Metaphors and
analogies
The experience gained else where is used to
predict the socioeconomic impacts
Growth historical
simulation commonsense
forecasts
Scenarios Scenarios are commonsense forecasts of data.
Each scenario is logically constructed on model
of a potential future for which the degrees of
confidence as to progression and outcome
remain undefined
Commonsense
Dynamic
modeling (Input
Out model)
Model predicts net economic gain to the society
after considering all inputs required for
conversion of raw materials along with cost of
finished product
Normative
Methods
Desired socioeconomic goals are specified and
an attempt is made to project the social
environment backward in time to the present to
examine whether existing or planned resources
and environmental programmes are adequate to
meet the goals
Morphological analysis
technology scanning
contextual mapping
functional array
graphic method
Mission networks and
functional arrays
decision trees &
relevance trees matrix
methods scenarios
TGM for Offshore Onshore Oil and Gas Exploration

September 2009
REFERENCES
Reference Documents
Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI Environment Impact Assessmen
t
Notification S.O.1533 dated 14th September 2006.
Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI Environment Impact Assessment
Notification 2006 Amendment S.O. 195 (E) dated 19th January 2009.
Ministry of Environment and Forest, GoI Charter on Corporate Respons
ibility for
Environment Protection Action Points for 17 Categories of Industries, CPCB, Marc
h 2003.
Larry W. Canter, Environmental Impact Assessment, Second Edition, McGraw
Hill,
University of Oklahoma, 1997.
International Finance Corporation (IFC) Environmental, Health and Safet
y
Guidelines, Offshore Oil and Gas Development, World Bank Group, April 30, 2007.
International Finance Corporation (IFC) Environmental, Health and Saf
ety
Guidelines, Onshore Oil and Gas Development, World Bank Group, April 30, 2007.
International Association for Impact Assessment in Cooperation with In
stitute of
Environmental Assessment, UK Principles of Environmental Impact Assessmen
t Best
Practice, 1996
USEPA Sector Handbook on Oil & Gas Extraction, October, 2000.
World Bank Group Pollution Prevention and Abatement Handbook on Oil
& Gas
Development (Onshore), July 1998.
Environmental Management of Offshore Oil Development and Maritime Oil
Transport,
A background document for stakeholders of the West African Marine Eco
Region by
Sandra Kloff and Clive Wicks, Members of CEESP (IUCN Commission on
Environmental, Economic and Social Policy), October 2004.
Environmental Management in Oil and Gas Exploration and Production, An Overview
of
Issues and Management Approaches, Joint E&P Forum/UNEP Technical Publicat
ion,
1997.
Ecosmart India Ltd., Report on Secondary Data Collection for Envir
onmental
Information Centre, submitted to Ministry of Environment and Forests, 28
th
March 2003
TGM for Offshore Onshore Oil and Gas Exploration
September 2009
Referred Websites
http://envfor.nic.in/divisions/iass/eia.htm
http://petroleum.nic.in/
http://www.cpcb.nic.in/
http://www.dghindia.org/site/index.aspx
http://www.industry.siemens.com/oilgas/en/processes/upstream/offshore/explorat
ion.htm
http://www.iaia.org
http://www.ogp.org.uk/
http://www.oilindia.com/
IL&FS Ecosmart Limited

Flat # 408, Saptagiri Towers
Begumpet
Hyderabad 500 016
Ph: + 91 40 40163016
Fax: + 91 40 40032220
For any queries or technical inputs kindly mail:
[email protected]
[email protected]

Offshore and Onshore Production

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Offshore and Onshore Production

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Offshore and Onshore Production

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Government of India

Former Chairman, Central Pollution Control Board

3.3.2 Hazard assessment and evaluation 3-54

Public Consultation 4-56

Table 4-5: Mitigation Measures for Construction Phase ..........................

Figure 3-16: Directional Drilling...............................................

EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

MRF Material recovery facilities

UTPCC Union Territory Pollution Control Committee

rs i.e., the project

roles and responsibilities of involved stakeholders.

conventional financial analysis, either because they are misallocated, u

Environmental performance and operational indicators could be used to navigate,

nst the set

pollution being caused by the industries, municipalities, etc., fund wi

Strategic partnership networked manufacturing and performed supplier arrangement

participants, civil authority etc.,)

To anticipate and avoid, minimize or offset the adverse significant biophysica

sectoral environmental concerns addressed, the scope of project-level EI

Purposive- should inform decision-makers and result in appropriate lev

Cumulative impact consists of an impact that is created as a result of the combi

Creation of induced actions: Significance may increase as the signifi

categorization and sedimentary basinal areas are given in Figure 3-1 a

Operational Aspects of an EIA

Operational Aspects of an EIA

3.1.1 New significant discoveries

onne (MMT) and

Operational Aspects of an EIA

Operational Aspects of an EIA

Operational Aspects of an EIA

are reviewed in desk studies to identify major sedimentary basins.

Submersible rigs: Limited to shallow waters and towed onto location.

soils may cave in

Compliant towers: Used in water depths ranging from 500 m to 1,000

the site after closure. Planning for decommissioning is an integral part o

Onshore navigational beacons

Potential requirement on ground

Additional waste disposal and storage

Formation Water Test-Flaring (Insignificant) Drill Cuttings

hydrocarbon content in the gas stream to support combustion or lack o

alternatives for produced hydrocarbons should be adequately documented and recor

gravity and / or mechanical separation and chemical treatment, and may

chemicals that are added depending on the downhole formation conditions.

General guidance for the management of hazardous materials is provided

will also help to reduce noise dispersion;

tic habitat and

topography and drainage contours;

an adequate and internationally recognized computer model

from offshore facilities.

biodegradability, bioavailability, and bioaccumulation potential

chemicals that are added depending on the downhole formation conditions.

Chemical systems should be selected in terms of their concentration,

Selected chemicals should be previously tested for environmental hazards

and their use should be documented

Operational Aspects of an EIA

As using bentonite is required for drilling, ensure that it is contai

bursting discs, vent header,

installation, safety guidelines will be as per Tariff Advisory Committee.